CROSS-REFERENCES TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

This application claims priority benefit to U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/364,872, filed on Feb. 27, 2006, which claims priority benefit to U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/192,341, filed Jul. 27, 2005, which claims priority benefit to U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 60/591,888, filed Jul. 27, 2004, U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 60/591,887, filed Jul. 27, 2004, and U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 60/683,510, filed May 19, 2005, each of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety for all purposes.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

Mammalian protein kinases are important regulators of cellular functions. Because dysfunctions in protein kinase activity have been associated with several diseases and disorders, protein kinases are targets for drug development.

The tyrosine kinase receptor, FMS-like tyrosine kinase 3 (FLT3), is implicated in cancers, including leukemia, such as acute myeloid leukemia (AML), acute lymphoblastic leukemia (ALL), and myelodysplasia. About one-quarter to one-third of AML patients have FLT3 mutations that lead to constitutive activation of the kinase and downstream signaling pathways. Although in normal humans, FLT3 is expressed mainly by normal myeloid and lymphoid progenitor cells, FLT3 is expressed in the leukemic cells of 70-80% of patients with AML and ALL. Inhibitors that target FLT3 have been reported to be toxic to leukemic cells expressing mutated and/or constitutively-active FLT3. Thus, there is a need to develop potent FLT3 inhibitors that may be used to treat diseases and disorders such as leukemia.

The Abelson non-receptor tyrosine kinase (c-Abl) is involved in signal transduction, via phosphorylation of its substrate proteins. In the cell, c-Abl shuttles between the cytoplasm and nucleus, and its activity is normally tightly regulated through a number of diverse mechanisms. Abl has been implicated in the control of growth-factor and integrin signaling, cell cycle, cell differentiation and neurogenesis, apoptosis, cell adhesion, cytoskeletal structure, and response to DNA damage and oxidative stress.

The c-Abl protein contains approximately 1150 amino-acid residues, organized into a N-terminal cap region, an SH3 and an SH2 domain, a tyrosine kinase domain, a nuclear localization sequence, a DNA-binding domain, and an actin-binding domain.

Chronic myelogenous leukemia (CML) is associated with the Philadelphia chromosomal translocation, between chromosomes 9 and 22. This translocation generates an aberrant fusion between the bcr gene and the gene encoding c-Abl. The resultant Bcr-Abl fusion protein has constitutively active tyrosine-kinase activity. The elevated kinase activity is reported to be the primary causative factor of CML, and is responsible for cellular transformation, loss of growth-factor dependence, and cell proliferation.

The 2-phenylaminopyrimidine compound imatinib (also referred to as STI-571, CGP 57148, or Gleevec) has been identified as a specific and potent inhibitor of Bcr-Abl, as well as two other tyrosine kinases, c-kit and platelet-derived growth factor receptor. Imatinib blocks the tyrosine-kinase activity of these proteins. Imatinib has been reported to be an effective therapeutic agent for the treatment of all stages of CML. However, the majority of patients with advanced-stage or blast crisis CML suffer a relapse despite continued imatinib therapy, due to the development of resistance to the drug. Frequently, the molecular basis for this resistance is the emergence of imatinib-resistant variants of the kinase domain of Bcr-Abl. The most commonly observed underlying amino-acid substitutions include Glu255Lys, Thr315Ile, Tyr293Phe, and Met351Thr.

MET was first identified as a transforming DNA rearrangement (TPR-MET) in a human osteosarcoma cell line that had been treated with N-methyl-Nâ€²-nitro-nitrosoguanidine (Cooper et al. 1984). The MET receptor tyrosine kinase (also known as hepatocyte growth factor receptor, HGFR, MET or c-Met) and its ligand hepatocyte growth factor (â€œHGFâ€ ) have numerous biological activities including the stimulation of proliferation, survival, differentiation and morphogenesis, branching tubulogenesis, cell motility and invasive growth. Pathologically, MET has been implicated in the growth, invasion and metastasis of many different forms of cancer including kidney cancer, lung cancer, ovarian cancer, liver cancer and breast cancer. Somatic, activating mutations in MET have been found in human carcinoma metastases and in sporadic cancers such as papillary renal cell carcinoma. The evidence is growing that MET is one of the long-sought oncogenes controlling progression to metastasis and therefore a very interesting target. In addition to cancer there is evidence that MET inhibition may have value in the treatment of various indications including: Listeria invasion, Osteolysis associated with multiple myeloma, Malaria infection, diabetic retinopathies, psoriasis, and arthritis.

The tyrosine kinase RON is the receptor for the macrophage stimulating protein and belongs to the MET family of receptor tyrosine kinases. Like MET, RON is implicated in growth, invasion and metastasis of several different forms of cancer including gastric cancer and bladder cancer.

The Aurora family of serine/threonine kinases is essential for mitotic progression. Expression and activity of the Aurora kinases are tightly regulated during the cell cycle. A variety of proteins having roles in cell division have been identified as Aurora kinase substrates. Based on the known function of the Aurora kinases, inhibition of their activity is believed to disrupt the cell cycle and block proliferation and therefore tumor cell viability. Harrington et al., Nature Medicine (2004).

3-phosphoinositide-dependent kinase 1 (PDK1) is a Ser/Thr protein kinase that can phosphorylate and activate a number of kinases in the AGC kinase super family, including Akt/PKB, protein kinase C (PKC), PKC-related kinases (PRK1 and PRK2), p70 ribobsomal S6-kinase (S6K1), and serum and glucocorticoid-regulated kinase (SGK). The first identified PDK1 substrate is the proto-oncogene Akt. Numerous studies have found a high level of activated Akt in a large percentage (30-60%) of common tumor types, including melanoma and breast, lung, gastric, prostate, hematological and ovarian cancers. The PDK1/Akt signaling pathway thus represents an attractive target for the development of small molecule inhibitors that may be useful in the treatment of cancer. Feldman et al., JBC Papers in Press, Mar. 16, 2005.

Because kinases have been implicated in numerous diseases and conditions, such as cancer, there is a need to develop new and potent protein kinase modulators that can be used for treatment. The present invention fulfills these and other needs in the art. Although certain protein kinases are specifically named herein, the present invention is not limited to modulators of these kinases, and, includes, within its scope, modulators of related protein kinases, and modulators of homologous proteins.

BRIEF SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

It has been discovered that pyrrolo-pyridine compounds of the present invention may be used to modulate kinase activity and to treat diseases mediated by kinase activity. These pyrrolo-pyridine kinase modulators are described in detail below. In addition, inhibitory activities of selected compounds are disclosed herein.

In one aspect, the present invention provides pyrrolo-pyridine kinase modulators (also referred to herein as a â€œcompound of the present inventionâ€ ) having formula I:

or an enantiomer, diastereomer, racemate, or pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof, wherein:

L¹and L²are each independently a bond, â€”S(O)_mâ€”, â€”Oâ€”, â€”NHâ€”, substituted or unsubstituted C₁-C₅alkylene, or substituted or unsubstituted 2 to 5 membered heteroalkylene, wherein m is an integer from 0 to 2;

A¹is independently a 6-membered substituted or unsubstituted aryl, 6-membered substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, or a 5-membered substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl;

A²is independently a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or a substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl;

R¹is independently hydrogen, halogen, â€”OR², â€”NR³R⁴, â€”C(Z)R⁵, â€”S(O)_nR⁶, â€”CN, â€”NO₂, â€”CF₃, â€”OCF₃, â€”OCHCF₂, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, wherein n is independently an integer from 0 to 2;

X¹is independently â€”C(R⁹)â• , â€”C(R⁹)(R¹⁰)â€”, â€”Nâ• , â€”N(R¹¹)â€”, â€”Sâ€” or â€”Oâ€”;

Z is independently N(R¹²), S or O;

R²is independently hydrogen, â€”CF₃, â€”CHF₂, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl;

R³and R⁴are each independently hydrogen, â€”C(X²)R¹³, â€”S(O)₂R¹³, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl;

X²is O, S, SO, SO₂or NH;

R⁵is independently hydrogen, â€”NR¹⁴R¹⁵, â€”OR¹⁶, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl;

R⁶is independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, wherein if n is 2, then R⁹may optionally be â€”NR¹⁷R¹⁸;

R⁹and R¹⁰are each independently hydrogen, halogen, â€”OR², â€”NR³R⁴, â€”C(Z)R⁵, â€”S(O)_nR⁶, â€”CN, â€”N₂, â€”CF₃, â€”OCF₃, â€”OCHF₂, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl;

R¹¹is independently hydrogen, â€”C(O)R⁵, â€”S(O)₂R¹³, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl;

R¹²is independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroalkyl;

R¹³is independently hydrogen, â€”NR¹⁹R²⁰, â€”OR²¹, â€”SR²¹, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl;

R¹⁴, R¹⁵and R¹⁶are each independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl;

R¹⁷, R¹⁸, R¹⁹and R²⁰are each independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl;

R²¹is independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl;

wherein R³and R⁴, R¹⁴and R¹⁵, R¹⁷and R¹⁸, R¹⁹and R²⁰are independently, optionally joined with the nitrogen to which they are attached to form substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, or substituted or unsubstituted 5-membered heteroaryl.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

FIG. 1 shows the wild-type ABL numbering according to ABL exon Ia.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTIONDefinitions

Abbreviations used herein have their conventional meaning within the chemical and biological arts.

Where substituent groups are specified by their conventional chemical formulae, written from left to right, they equally encompass the chemically identical substituents that would result from writing the structure from right to left, e.g., â€”CH₂Oâ€” is equivalent to â€”OCH₂â€”.

The term â€œalkyl,â€ by itself or as part of another substituent, means, unless otherwise stated, a straight (i.e., unbranched) or branched chain, or cyclic hydrocarbon radical, or combination thereof, which may be fully saturated, mono- or polyunsaturated and can include di- and multivalent radicals, having the number of carbon atoms designated (i.e., C₁-C₁₀means one to ten carbons). Examples of saturated hydrocarbon radicals include, but are not limited to, groups such as methyl, ethyl, N-propyl, isopropyl, N-butyl, t-butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl, cyclohexyl, (cyclohexyl)methyl, cyclopropylmethyl, homologs and isomers of, for example, N-pentyl, N-hexyl, N-heptyl, N-octyl, and the like. An unsaturated alkyl group is one having one or more double bonds or triple bonds. Examples of unsaturated alkyl groups include, but are not limited to, vinyl, 2-propenyl, crotyl, 2-isopentenyl, 2-(butadienyl), 2,4-pentadienyl, 3-(1,4-pentadienyl), ethynyl, 1- and 3-propynyl, 3-butynyl, and the higher homologs and isomers. Alkyl groups which are limited to hydrocarbon groups are termed â€œhomoalkylâ€ .

The term â€œalkyleneâ€ by itself or as part of another substituent means a divalent radical derived from an alkyl, as exemplified, but not limited, by â€”CH₂CH₂CH₂CH₂â€”, â€”CH₂CHâ• CHCH₂â€”, â€”CH₂Câ‰¡CCH₂â€”, â€”CH₂CH₂CH(CH₂CH₂CH₃)CH₂â€”. Typically, an alkyl (or alkylene) group will have from 1 to 24 carbon atoms, with those groups having 10 or fewer carbon atoms being preferred in the present invention. A â€œlower alkylâ€ or â€œlower alkyleneâ€ is a shorter chain alkyl or alkylene group, generally having eight or fewer carbon atoms.

The term â€œheteroalkyl,â€ by itself or in combination with another term, means, unless otherwise stated, a stable straight or branched chain, or cyclic hydrocarbon radical, or combinations thereof, consisting of at least one carbon atoms and at least one heteroatom selected from the group consisting of O, N, P, Si and S, and wherein the nitrogen, phosphorus, and sulfur atoms may optionally be oxidized and the nitrogen heteroatom may optionally be quaternized. The heteroatom(s) O, N, P and S and Si may be placed at any interior position of the heteroalkyl group or at the position at which alkyl group is attached to the remainder of the molecule. Examples include, but are not limited to, â€”CH₂â€”CH₂â€”Oâ€”CH₃, â€”CH₂â€”CH₂â€”NHâ€”CH₃, â€”CH₂â€”CH₂â€”N(CH₃)â€”CH₃, â€”CH₂â€”Sâ€”CH₂â€”CH₃, â€”CH₂â€”CH₂, â€”S(O)â€”CH₃, â€”CH₂â€”CH₂â€”S(O)₂â€”CH₃, â€”CHâ• CHâ€”Oâ€”CH₃, â€”Si(CH₃)₃, â€”CH₂â€”CHâ• Nâ€”OCH₃, â€”CHâ• CHâ€”N(CH₃)â€”CH₃, Oâ€”CH₃, â€”Oâ€”CH₂â€”CH₃, and â€”CN. Up to two or three heteroatoms may be consecutive, such as, for example, â€”CH₂â€”NHâ€”OCH₃and â€”CH₂â€”Oâ€”Si(CH₃)₃. Similarly, the term â€œheteroalkyleneâ€ by itself or as part of another substituent means a divalent radical derived from heteroalkyl, as exemplified, but not limited by, â€”CH₂â€”CH₂â€”Sâ€”CH₂â€”CH₂â€” and â€”CH₂â€”Sâ€”CH₂â€”CH₂â€”NHâ€”CH₂â€”. For heteroalkylene groups, heteroatoms can also occupy either or both of the chain termini (e.g., alkyleneoxo, alkylenedioxo, alkyleneamino, alkylenediamino, and the like). Still further, for alkylene and heteroalkylene linking groups, no orientation of the linking group is implied by the direction in which the formula of the linking group is written. For example, the formula â€”C(O)ORâ€²â€” represents both â€”C(O)ORâ€²â€” and â€”Râ€²OC(O)â€”. As described above, heteroalkyl groups, as used herein, include those groups that are attached to the remainder of the molecule through a heteroatom, such as â€”C(O)Râ€², â€”C(O)NRâ€², â€”NRâ€²Râ€³, â€”ORâ€², â€”SRâ€², and/or â€”SO₂Râ€². Where â€œheteroalkylâ€ is recited, followed by recitations of specific heteroalkyl groups, such as â€”NRâ€²Râ€³ or the like, it will be understood that the terms heteroalkyl and â€”NRâ€²Râ€³ are not redundant or mutually exclusive. Rather, the specific heteroalkyl groups are recited to add clarity. Thus, the term â€œheteroalkylâ€ should not be interpreted herein as excluding specific heteroalkyl groups, such as â€”NRâ€²Râ€³ or the like.

The terms â€œcycloalkylâ€ and â€œheterocycloalkylâ€ , by themselves or in combination with other terms, represent, unless otherwise stated, cyclic versions of â€œalkylâ€ and â€œheteroalkylâ€ , respectively. Additionally, for heterocycloalkyl, a heteroatom can occupy the position at which the heterocycle is attached to the remainder of the molecule. Examples of cycloalkyl include, but are not limited to, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, 1-cyclohexenyl, 3-cyclohexenyl, cycloheptyl, and the like. Examples of heterocycloalkyl include, but are not limited to, 1-(1,2,5,6-tetrahydropyridyl), 1-piperidinyl, 2-piperidinyl, 3-piperidinyl, 4-morpholinyl, 3-morpholinyl, tetrahydrofuran-2-yl, tetrahydrofuran-3-yl, tetrahydrothien-2-yl, tetrahydrothien-3-yl, 1-piperazinyl, 2-piperazinyl, and the like. The terms â€œcycloalkyleneâ€ and â€œheterocycloalkyleneâ€ refer to the divalent derivatives of cycloalkyl and heterocycloalkyl, respectively.

The terms â€œhaloâ€ or â€œhalogen,â€ by themselves or as part of another substituent, mean, unless otherwise stated, a fluorine, chlorine, bromine, or iodine atom. Additionally, terms such as â€œhaloalkyl,â€ are meant to include monohaloalkyl and polyhaloalkyl. For example, the term â€œhalo(C₁-C₄)alkylâ€ is mean to include, but not be limited to, trifluoromethyl, 2,2,2-trifluoroethyl, 4-chlorobutyl, 3-bromopropyl, and the like.

The term â€œarylâ€ means, unless otherwise stated, a polyunsaturated, aromatic, hydrocarbon substituent which can be a single ring or multiple rings (preferably from 1 to 3 rings) which are fused together or linked covalently. The term â€œheteroarylâ€ refers to aryl groups (or rings) that contain from one to four heteroatoms (in each separate ring in the case of multiple rings) selected from N, O, and S, wherein the nitrogen and sulfur atoms are optionally oxidized, and the nitrogen atom(s) are optionally quaternized. A heteroaryl group can be attached to the remainder of the molecule through a carbon or heteroatom. Non-limiting examples of aryl and heteroaryl groups include phenyl, 1-naphthyl, 2-naphthyl, 4-biphenyl, 1-pyrrolyl, 2-pyrrolyl, 3-pyrrolyl, 3-pyrazolyl, 2-imidazolyl, 4-imidazolyl, pyrazinyl, 2-oxazolyl, 4-oxazolyl, 2-phenyl-4-oxazolyl, 5-oxazolyl, 3-isoxazolyl, 4-isoxazolyl, 5-isoxazolyl, 2-thiazolyl, 4-thiazolyl, 5-thiazolyl, 2-furyl, 3-furyl, 2-thienyl, 3-thienyl, 2-pyridyl, 3-pyridyl, 4-pyridyl, 2-pyrimidyl, 4-pyrimidyl, 5-benzothiazolyl, purinyl, 2-benzimidazolyl, 5-indolyl, 1-isoquinolyl, 5-isoquinolyl, 2-quinoxalinyl, 5-quinoxalinyl, 3-quinolyl, and 6-quinolyl. Substituents for each of above noted aryl and heteroaryl ring systems are selected from the group of acceptable substituents described below. The terms â€œaryleneâ€ and â€œheteroaryleneâ€ refer to the divalent radicals of aryl and heteroaryl, respectively.

For brevity, the term â€œarylâ€ when used in combination with other terms (e.g., aryloxo, arylthioxo, arylalkyl) includes both aryl and heteroaryl rings as defined above. Thus, the term â€œarylalkylâ€ is meant to include those radicals in which an aryl group is attached to an alkyl group (e.g., benzyl, phenethyl, pyridylmethyl and the like) including those alkyl groups in which a carbon atom (e.g., a methylene group) has been replaced by, for example, an oxygen atom (e.g., phenoxymethyl, 2-pyridyloxymethyl, 3-(1-naphthyloxy)propyl, and the like). However, the term â€œhaloaryl,â€ as used herein is meant to cover only aryls substituted with one or more halogens.

Where a heteroalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, or heteroaryl includes a specific number of members (e.g., â€œ3 to 7 memberedâ€ ), the term â€œmemberâ€ referrers to a carbon or heteroatom.

The term â€œoxoâ€ as used herein means an oxygen that is double bonded to a carbon atom.

Each of above terms (e.g., â€œalkyl,â€ â€œheteroalkyl,â€ â€œcycloalkyl, and â€œheterocycloalkylâ€ , â€œaryl,â€ â€œheteroarylâ€ as well as their divalent radical derivatives) are meant to include both substituted and unsubstituted forms of the indicated radical. Preferred substituents for each type of radical are provided below.

Substituents for alkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl monovalent and divalent derivative radicals (including those groups often referred to as alkylene, alkenyl, heteroalkylene, heteroalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, and heterocycloalkenyl) can be one or more of a variety of groups selected from, but not limited to: â€”ORâ€², â• O, â• NRâ€², â• Nâ€”ORâ€², â€”NRâ€²Râ€³, â€”SRâ€², -halogen, â€”SiRâ€²Râ€³Râ€²â€³, â€”OC(O)Râ€², â€”C(O)Râ€², â€”CO₂Râ€², â€”C(O)NRâ€²Râ€³, â€”OC(O)NRâ€²Râ€³, â€”NRâ€³C(O)Râ€², â€”NRâ€²â€”C(O)NRâ€³Râ€²â€³, â€”NRâ€³C(O)ORâ€², â€”NRâ€”C(NRâ€²Râ€³)â• NRâ€²â€³, â€”S(O)Râ€², â€”S(O)₂Râ€², â€”S(O)₂NRâ€²Râ€³, â€”NRSO₂Râ€², â€”CN and â€”NO₂in a number ranging from zero to (2mâ€²+1), where mâ€² is the total number of carbon atoms in such radical. Râ€², Râ€³, Râ€²â€³ and Râ€³â€³ each preferably independently refer to hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted heteroalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl (e.g., aryl substituted with 1-3 halogens), substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, alkoxy or thioalkoxy groups, or arylalkyl groups. When a compound of the invention includes more than one R group, for example, each of the R groups is independently selected as are each Râ€², Râ€³, Râ€²â€³ and Râ€³â€³ groups when more than one of these groups is present. When Râ€² and Râ€³ are attached to the same nitrogen atom, they can be combined with the nitrogen atom to form a 4-, 5-, 6-, or 7-membered ring. For example, â€”NRâ€²Râ€³ is meant to include, but not be limited to, 1-pyrrolidinyl and 4-morpholinyl. From the above discussion of substituents, one of skill in the art will understand that the term â€œalkylâ€ is meant to include groups including carbon atoms bound to groups other than hydrogen groups, such as haloalkyl (e.g., â€”CF₃and â€”CH₂CF₃) and acyl (e.g., â€”C(O)CH₃, â€”C(O)CF₃, â€”C(O)CH₂OCH₃, and the like).

Similar to the substituents described for alkyl radicals above, exemplary substituents for aryl and heteroaryl groups (as well as their divalent derivatives) are varied and are selected from, for example: halogen, â€”ORâ€², â€”NRâ€²Râ€³, â€”SRâ€², -halogen, â€”SiRâ€²Râ€³Râ€²â€³, â€”OC(O)Râ€², â€”C(O)Râ€², â€”CO₂Râ€², â€”C(O)NRâ€²Râ€³, â€”OC(O)NRâ€²Râ€³, â€”NRâ€³C(O)Râ€², â€”NRâ€²â€”C(O)NRâ€³Râ€²â€³, â€”NRâ€³C(O)ORâ€², â€”NRâ€”C(NRâ€²Râ€³Râ€²â€³)â• NRâ€³â€³, â€”NRâ€”C(NRâ€²Râ€³)â• NRâ€²â€³, â€”S(O)Râ€², â€”S(O)₂Râ€², â€”S(O)₂NRâ€²Râ€³, â€”NRSO₂Râ€², â€”CN and â€”NO₂, â€”Râ€², â€”N₃, â€”CH(Ph)₂, fluoro(C₁-C₄)alkoxo, and fluoro(C₁-C₄)alkyl, in a number ranging from zero to the total number of open valences on aromatic ring system; and where Râ€², Râ€³, Râ€²â€³ and Râ€³â€³ are preferably independently selected from hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl and substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl. When a compound of the invention includes more than one R group, for example, each of the R groups is independently selected as are each Râ€², Râ€³, Râ€²â€³ and Râ€³â€³ groups when more than one of these groups is present.

Two of the substituents on adjacent atoms of aryl or heteroaryl ring may optionally form a ring of the formula -T-C(O)â€”(CRRâ€²)_q-U-, wherein T and U are independently â€”NRâ€”, â€”Oâ€”, â€”CRRâ€²â€” or a single bond, and q is an integer of from 0 to 3. Alternatively, two of the substituents on adjacent atoms of aryl or heteroaryl ring may optionally be replaced with a substituent of the formula -A-(CH₂)_râ€”Bâ€”, wherein A and B are independently â€”CRRâ€²â€”, â€”Oâ€”, â€”NRâ€”, â€”Sâ€”, â€”S(O)â€”, â€”S(O)₂â€”, â€”S(O)₂NRâ€²â€” or a single bond, and r is an integer of from 1 to 4. One of the single bonds of the new ring so formed may optionally be replaced with a double bond. Alternatively, two of the substituents on adjacent atoms of aryl or heteroaryl ring may optionally be replaced with a substituent of the formula â€”(CRRâ€²)_sâ€”Xâ€²â€”(Câ€³Râ€²â€³)_dâ€”, where s and d are independently integers of from 0 to 3, and Xâ€² is â€”Oâ€”, â€”NRâ€²â€”, â€”Sâ€”, â€”S(O)â€”, â€”S(O)₂â€”, or â€”S(O)₂NRâ€²â€”. The substituents R, Râ€², Râ€³ and Râ€²â€³ are preferably independently selected from hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, and substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl.

As used herein, the term â€œheteroatomâ€ or â€œring heteroatomâ€ is meant to include oxygen (O), nitrogen (N), sulfur (S), phosphorus (P), and silicon (Si).

An â€œaminoalkylâ€ as used herein refers to an amino group covalently bound to an alkylene linker. The amino group is â€”NRâ€²Râ€³, wherein Râ€² and Râ€³ are typically selected from hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl.

A â€œsubstituent group,â€ as used herein, means a group selected from the following moieties:

- (A)-OH, â€”NH₂, â€”SH, â€”CN, â€”CF₃, â€”NO₂, oxo, halogen, unsubstituted alkyl, unsubstituted heteroalkyl, unsubstituted cycloalkyl, unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, unsubstituted aryl, unsubstituted heteroaryl, and
- (B) alkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, and heteroaryl, substituted with at least one substituent selected from:
  - (i) oxo, â€”OH, â€”NH₂, â€”SH, â€”CN, â€”CF₃, â€”NO₂, halogen, unsubstituted alkyl, unsubstituted heteroalkyl, unsubstituted cycloalkyl, unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, unsubstituted aryl, unsubstituted heteroaryl, and
  - (ii) alkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, and heteroaryl, substituted with at least one substituent selected from:
    - (a) oxo, â€”OH, â€”NH₂, â€”SH, â€”CN, â€”CF₃, â€”NO₂, halogen, unsubstituted alkyl, unsubstituted heteroalkyl, unsubstituted cycloalkyl, unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, unsubstituted aryl, unsubstituted heteroaryl, and
    - (b) alkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, substituted with at least one substituent selected from oxo, â€”OH, â€”NH₂, â€”SH, â€”CN, â€”CF₃, â€”NO₂, halogen, unsubstituted alkyl, unsubstituted heteroalkyl, unsubstituted cycloalkyl, unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, unsubstituted aryl, and unsubstituted heteroaryl.

A â€œsize-limited substituentâ€ or â€œsize-limited substituent group,â€ as used herein means a group selected from all of the substituents described above for a â€œsubstituent group,â€ wherein each substituted or unsubstituted alkyl is a substituted or unsubstituted C₁-C₂₀alkyl, each substituted or unsubstituted heteroalkyl is a substituted or unsubstituted 2 to 20 membered heteroalkyl, each substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl is a substituted or unsubstituted C₄-C₈cycloalkyl, and each substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl is a substituted or unsubstituted 4 to 8 membered heterocycloalkyl.

A â€œlower substituentâ€ or â€œlower substituent group,â€ as used herein means a group selected from all of the substituents described above for a â€œsubstituent group,â€ wherein each substituted or unsubstituted alkyl is a substituted or unsubstituted C₁-C₉alkyl, each substituted or unsubstituted heteroalkyl is a substituted or unsubstituted 2 to 8 membered heteroalkyl, each substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl is a substituted or unsubstituted C₅-C₇cycloalkyl, and each substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl is a substituted or unsubstituted 5 to 7 membered heterocycloalkyl.

The compounds of the present invention may exist as salts. The present invention includes such salts. Examples of applicable salt forms include hydrochlorides, hydrobromides, sulfates, methanesulfonates, nitrates, maleates, acetates, citrates, fumarates, tartrates (eg (+)-tartrates, (âˆ’)-tartrates or mixtures thereof including racemic mixtures, succinates, benzoates and salts with amino acids such as glutamic acid. These salts may be prepared by methods known to those skilled in art. Also included are base addition salts such as sodium, potassium, calcium, ammonium, organic amino, or magnesium salt, or a similar salt. When compounds of the present invention contain relatively basic functionalities, acid addition salts can be obtained by contacting the neutral form of such compounds with a sufficient amount of the desired acid, either neat or in a suitable inert solvent. Examples of acceptable acid addition salts include those derived from inorganic acids like hydrochloric, hydrobromic, nitric, carbonic, monohydrogencarbonic, phosphoric, monohydrogenphosphoric, dihydrogenphosphoric, sulfuric, monohydrogensulfuric, hydriodic, or phosphorous acids and the like, as well as the salts derived organic acids like acetic, propionic, isobutyric, maleic, malonic, benzoic, succinic, suberic, fumaric, lactic, mandelic, phthalic, benzenesulfonic, p-tolylsulfonic, citric, tartaric, methanesulfonic, and the like. Also included are salts of amino acids such as arginate and the like, and salts of organic acids like glucuronic or galactunoric acids and the like. Certain specific compounds of the present invention contain both basic and acidic functionalities that allow the compounds to be converted into either base or acid addition salts.

The neutral forms of the compounds are preferably regenerated by contacting the salt with a base or acid and isolating the parent compound in the conventional manner. The parent form of the compound differs from the various salt forms in certain physical properties, such as solubility in polar solvents.

Certain compounds of the present invention can exist in unsolvated forms as well as solvated forms, including hydrated forms. In general, the solvated forms are equivalent to unsolvated forms and are encompassed within the scope of the present invention. Certain compounds of the present invention may exist in multiple crystalline or amorphous forms. In general, all physical forms are equivalent for the uses contemplated by the present invention and are intended to be within the scope of the present invention.

Certain compounds of the present invention possess asymmetric carbon atoms (optical or chiral centers) or double bonds; the enantiomers, racemates, diastereomers, tautomers, geometric isomers, stereoisometric forms that may be defined, in terms of absolute stereochemistry, as (R)- or (S)- or, as (D)- or (L)- for amino acids, and individual isomers are encompassed within the scope of the present invention. The compounds of the present invention do not include those which are known in art to be too unstable to synthesize and/or isolate. The present invention is meant to include compounds in racemic and optically pure forms. Optically active (R)- and (S)-, or (D)- and (L)-isomers may be prepared using chiral synthons or chiral reagents, or resolved using conventional techniques. When the compounds described herein contain olefinic bonds or other centers of geometric asymmetry, and unless specified otherwise, it is intended that the compounds include both E and Z geometric isomers.

The term â€œtautomer,â€ as used herein, refers to one of two or more structural isomers which exist in equilibrium and which are readily converted from one isomeric form to another.

It will be apparent to one skilled in the art that certain compounds of this invention may exist in tautomeric forms, all such tautomeric forms of the compounds being within the scope of the invention.

Unless otherwise stated, structures depicted herein are also meant to include all stereochemical forms of the structure; i.e., the R and S configurations for each asymmetric center. Therefore, single stereochemical isomers as well as enantiomeric and diastereomeric mixtures of the present compounds are within the scope of the invention.

Unless otherwise stated, structures depicted herein are also meant to include compounds which differ only in the presence of one or more isotopically enriched atoms. For example, compounds having the present structures except for the replacement of a hydrogen by a deuterium or tritium, or the replacement of a carbon by ¹³C- or ¹⁴C-enriched carbon are within the scope of this invention.

The compounds of the present invention may also contain unnatural proportions of atomic isotopes at one or more of atoms that constitute such compounds. For example, the compounds may be radiolabeled with radioactive isotopes, such as for example tritium (³H), iodine-125 (¹²⁵I) or carbon-14 (¹⁴C). All isotopic variations of the compounds of the present invention, whether radioactive or not, are encompassed within the scope of the present invention.

The term â€œpharmaceutically acceptable saltsâ€ is meant to include salts of active compounds which are prepared with relatively nontoxic acids or bases, depending on the particular substituent moieties found on the compounds described herein. When compounds of the present invention contain relatively acidic functionalities, base addition salts can be obtained by contacting the neutral form of such compounds with a sufficient amount of the desired base, either neat or in a suitable inert solvent. Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable base addition salts include sodium, potassium, calcium, ammonium, organic amino, or magnesium salt, or a similar salt. When compounds of the present invention contain relatively basic functionalities, acid addition salts can be obtained by contacting the neutral form of such compounds with a sufficient amount of the desired acid, either neat or in a suitable inert solvent. Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts include those derived from inorganic acids like hydrochloric, hydrobromic, nitric, carbonic, monohydrogencarbonic, phosphoric, monohydrogenphosphoric, dihydrogenphosphoric, sulfuric, monohydrogensulfuric, hydriodic, or phosphorous acids and the like, as well as the salts derived from relatively nontoxic organic acids like acetic, propionic, isobutyric, maleic, malonic, benzoic, succinic, suberic, fumaric, lactic, mandelic, phthalic, benzenesulfonic, p-tolylsulfonic, citric, tartaric, methanesulfonic, and the like. Also included are salts of amino acids such as arginate and the like, and salts of organic acids like glucuronic or galactunoric acids and the like (see, e.g., Berge et al., Journal of Pharmaceutical Science, 66: 1-19 (1977)). Certain specific compounds of the present invention contain both basic and acidic functionalities that allow the compounds to be converted into either base or acid addition salts.

In addition to salt forms, the present invention provides compounds, which are in a prodrug form. Prodrugs of the compounds described herein are those compounds that readily undergo chemical changes under physiological conditions to provide the compounds of the present invention. Additionally, prodrugs can be converted to the compounds of the present invention by chemical or biochemical methods in an ex vivo environment. For example, prodrugs can be slowly converted to the compounds of the present invention when placed in a transdermal patch reservoir with a suitable enzyme or chemical reagent.

The terms â€œa,â€ an, or â€œa(n)â€ , when used in reference to a group of substituents herein, mean at least one. For example, where a compound is substituted with â€œanâ€ alkyl or aryl, the compound is optionally substituted with at least one alkyl and/or at least one aryl. Moreover, where a moiety is substituted with an R substituent, the group may be referred to as â€œR-substituted.â€ Where a moiety is R-substituted, the moiety is substituted with at least one R substituent and each R substituent is optionally different.

Description of compounds of the present invention are limited by principles of chemical bonding known to those skilled in the art. Accordingly, where a group may be substituted by one or more of a number of substituents, such substitutions are selected so as to comply with principles of chemical bonding and to give compounds which are not inherently unstable and/or would be known to one of ordinary skill in the art as likely to be unstable under ambient conditions, such as aqueous, neutral, and several known physiological conditions. For example, a heterocycloalkyl or heteroaryl is attached to the remainder of the molecule via a ring heteroatom in compliance with principles of chemical bonding known to those skilled in the art thereby avoiding inherently unstable compounds.

The terms â€œtreatingâ€ or â€œtreatmentâ€ in reference to a particular disease includes prevention of the disease.

The symbol denotes the point of attachment of a moiety to the remainder of the molecule.

Pyrrolo-Pyridine Kinase Modulators

In one aspect, the present invention provides a pyrrolo-pyridine kinase modulator (also referred to herein as a â€œcompound of the present inventionâ€ ) having formula I:

or an enantiomer, diastereomer, racemate, or pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof, wherein:

L¹and L²are each independently a bond, â€”S(O)_mâˆ’1, â€”Oâ€”, â€”NHâ€”, substituted or unsubstituted C₁-C₅alkylene, or substituted or unsubstituted 2 to 5 membered heteroalkylene, wherein m is an integer from 0 to 2;

A¹is independently a 6-membered substituted or unsubstituted aryl, 6-membered substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, or a 5-membered substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl;

A²is independently a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or a substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl;

X¹is independently â€”C(R⁹)â• , â€”C(R⁹)(R¹⁰)â€”, â€”Nâ• , â€”N(R¹¹)â€”, â€”Sâ€” or â€”Oâ€”;

Z is independently N(R¹²), S or O;

X²is O, S, SO, SO₂or NH;

R⁹and R¹⁰are each independently hydrogen, halogen, â€”OR², â€”NR³R⁴, â€”C(Z)R⁵, â€”S(O)_nR⁶, â€”CN, â€”NO₂, â€”CF₃, â€”OCF₃, â€”OCHF₂, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl;

R¹²is independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroalkyl;

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein A¹is 6-membered substituted aryl or 6-membered substituted heteroaryl.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein A¹is substituted phenyl, substituted pyridinyl, substituted pyrimidinyl, substituted benzodioxolyl, substituted benzimidazolyl, or substituted indolyl.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein A¹is substituted with a halogen.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein A¹is substituted phenyl.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein A¹has the formula:

wherein x is an integer from 1 to 5; R²²is independently hydrogen, halogen, â€”OR², â€”NR³R⁴, â€”C(Z)R⁵, â€”S(O)_nR⁶, â€”CN, â€”NO₂, â€”CF₃, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, or wherein two R²²groups are optionally combined to form a substituted or unsubstituted ring with the carbons to which they are attached.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein an R²²attached at position 1 is combined with an R²²attached at position 2 to form a substituted or unsubstituted ring.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein an R²²attached at position 2 is combined with an R²²attached at position 3 to form a substituted or unsubstituted ring.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein two R²²groups are optionally combined to form a substituted or unsubstituted ring with the carbons to which they are attached, wherein said substituted or unsubstituted ring is substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein R²²is independently halogen, OR², â€”NR³R⁴, or substituted or unsubstituted alkyl.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein R², R³and R⁴are independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, wherein R³and R⁴are optionally joined with nitrogen to which they are attached to form substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, or substituted or unsubstituted 5-membered heteroaryl.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein R²R³and R⁴are independently hydrogen, or substituted or unsubstituted alkyl.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein R², R³and R⁴are independently hydrogen, or substituted or unsubstituted C₁-C₆alkyl.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein x is 1 and R²²is attached at position 2.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein x is 1 and R²²is attached at position 1.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein x is an integer from 2 to 5 and at least one R²²is attached at position 1.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein x is an integer from 2 to 5 and at least one R²²is attached at position 2.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein A²is substituted or unsubstituted aryl or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein A²is substituted or unsubstituted phenyl, substituted or unsubstituted thiopenyl, substituted or unsubstituted pyridinyl, substituted or unsubstituted pyrrolyl, substituted or unsubstituted triazolyl, substituted or unsubstituted pyrimidinyl, substituted or unsubstituted pyrazinyl, or substituted or unsubstituted imidazolyl.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein A²has the formula:

wherein y is an integer from 0 to 4; R²³is independently hydrogen, halogen, â€”OR², â€”NR³R⁴, â€”C(Z)R⁵, â€”S(O)_nR⁶, â€”CN, â€”NO₂, â€”CF₃, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, wherein two R²³groups are optionally combined to form a substituted or unsubstituted ring with the carbons to which they are attached, or wherein one R²³and R¹are optionally combined to form a substituted or unsubstituted ring with the carbons to which they are attached.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein R²³is independently halogen, OR², â€”NR³R⁴or substituted or unsubstituted alkyl.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein the R², R³and R⁴of said R²³are independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, wherein R³and R⁴are optionally joined with nitrogen to which they are attached to form substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, or substituted or unsubstituted 5-membered heteroaryl.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein the R², R³and R⁴of said R²³are independently hydrogen, or substituted or unsubstituted alkyl.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein the R², R³and R⁴of said R²³are independently hydrogen, or substituted or unsubstituted C₁-C₆alkyl.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein y is 1; and R²³is attached at position 3â€².

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein y is 2; and R²³is attached at position 3â€² and position 4â€².

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein A²has the formula:

wherein y is an integer from 0 to 3; R²³is independently halogen, â€”OR², â€”NR³R⁴, â€”C(Z)R⁵, â€”S(O)_nR⁶, â€”CN, â€”NO₂, â€”CF₃, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, wherein one R²³and R¹are optionally combined to form a substituted or unsubstituted ring with the carbons to which they are attached.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein y is 1; and R²³is attached at position 3â€².

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein L¹is a bond.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein L²is a bond.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein L¹and L²are a bond.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein R¹is â€”C(Z)R⁵; Z is O; and R⁵is â€”NR¹⁴R¹⁵.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein R¹is â€”C(Z)R⁵, Z is O; R⁵is â€”NR¹⁴R¹⁵; and R¹⁴and R¹⁵are independently substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroalkyl, or are combined with the nitrogen to which they are attached to form substituted or unsubstituted piperidinyl, or substituted or unsubstituted piperazinyl, substituted or unsubstituted pyrrolidinyl, or substituted or unsubstituted morpholino.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein y is 0.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein the R¹⁴and R¹⁵of said R⁵are combined with the nitrogen to which they are attached to form a piperazinyl substituted with a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl or substituted or unsubstituted heteroalkyl.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein said piperazinyl is substituted with a substituent having the formula â€”(CH₂)_tâ€”NR²⁴R²⁵, wherein t is an integer from 0 to 6; R²⁴and R²⁵are independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl; wherein R²⁴and R²⁵are optionally combined with the nitrogen to which they are attached to form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein R²⁴and R²⁵are combined with the nitrogen to which they are attached to form a substituted or unsubstituted piperazinyl, substituted or unsubstituted piperidinyl, or substituted or unsubstituted morpholino.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein R²⁴and R²⁵are independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, or substituted or unsubstituted aminoalkyl.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein A¹is substituted with at least one â€”OR², wherein R²is independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein A²has the formula:

wherein y is an integer from 0 to 4; R²³is halogen, â€”OR², â€”NR³R⁴, â€”C(Z)R⁵, â€”S(O)_nR⁵, â€”CN, â€”NO₂, â€”CF₃, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, wherein two R²³groups are optionally combined to form a substituted or unsubstituted ring with the carbons to which they are attached, or wherein one R²³and R¹are optionally combined to form a substituted or unsubstituted ring with the carbons to which they are attached.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein an R²³attached at position 3â€² is combined with R¹to form a substituted or unsubstituted ring.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein an R²³attached at position 3â€² is combined with an R²⁰attached at position 4â€² to form a substituted or unsubstituted ring.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein R¹is â€”C(Z)R⁵; Z is O; and R⁵is â€”NR¹⁴R¹⁵, wherein R¹⁵and R²³are combined to form a substituted or unsubstituted ring with the carbon to which R²³is attached and the nitrogen to which R¹⁵is attached.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein L¹and L²are a bond.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein R¹is â€”C(Z)R⁵.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein the R⁵of said R¹is â€”NR¹⁴R¹⁵.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein the R¹⁴and R¹⁵of said R¹are substituted or unsubstituted (C₁-C₁₀) alkyl, or substituted or unsubstituted 2 to 10 membered heteroalkyl.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein R²³is â€”NR³R⁴.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein the R³of said R²³is hydrogen.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein the R⁴of said R²³is hydrogen, â€”C(X²)R¹³, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein X²is O.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein R²³is attached at position 3â€².

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, R²²is â€”OR².

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein said R²of said R²²is substituted or unsubstituted C₁-C₁₀alkyl.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein said R²of said R²²is unsubstituted C₁-C₁₀alkyl.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein L¹and L²are a bond.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein x is 1 and y is 0.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein R²²is attached at position 1.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein R²²is attached at position 2.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein x is 2; y is 0; and R²²is attached at positions 1 and 4.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein x is 2; y is 0; and R²²is attached at positions 1 and 5.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein x is 1; y is 1; R²³is attached at position 3â€²; and R²²is attached at position 1.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein x is 1; y is 2; R²³is attached at positions 3â€² and 4â€²; and R²²is attached at position 1.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein x is 2; y is 0; and one R²²is attached at position 2.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein A²has the formula:

wherein y is an integer from 0 to 3; R²³is halogen, â€”OR², â€”NR³R⁴, â€”C(Z)R⁵, â€”S(O)_nR⁶, â€”CN, â€”CF₃, â€”NO₂, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl.

In another aspect, the invention relates to compounds having formula I, wherein y is 1 and R²³is attached at position 3â€².

In another aspect, the invention relates to methods for modulating the activity of a protein kinase comprising contacting the protein kinase with a compound having formula I.

In another aspect, the invention relates to methods for modulating the activity of a protein kinase selected from the group consisting of Abelson tyrosine kinase, Ron receptor tyrosine kinase, Met receptor tyrosine kinase, Fms-like tyrosine kinase-3, Aurora kinases, p21-activated kinase-4 and 3-phosphoinositide-dependent kinase-1, wherein the method comprises contacting the kinase with a compound having the formula II:

wherein

In another aspect, the invention relates to methods for modulating the activity of a protein kinase, wherein the method comprises contacting the kinase with a compound having the formula II.

In another aspect, the invention relates to methods for modulating the activity of a protein kinase, wherein the method comprises contacting the kinase with a compound having the formula II, wherein said protein kinase is a Bcr-Abl kinase having a mutation selected from the group consisting of M244V, L248V, G250E, G250A, Q252H, Q252R, Y253F, Y253H, E255K, E255V, D276G, F311L, T315I, T315N, T315A, F317V, F317L, M343T, M351T, E355G, F359A, F359V, V3791, F382L, L387M, H396P, H396R, S417Y, E459K and F486S.

In another aspect, the invention relates to methods for treating cancer, allergy, asthma, inflammation, obstructive airway disease, autoimmune diseases, metabolic disease, infection, CNS disease, brain tumor, obesity, asthma, hematological disorder, degenerative neural disease, cardiovascular disease, or disease associated with angiogenesis, neovascularization, or vasculogenesis in a subject in need of such treatment, the method comprising administering to the subject a therapeutically effective amount of the compound having formula I.

In another aspect, the invention relates to methods for treating cancer, wherein the cancer is leukemia or myeloproliferative disorder.

In another aspect, the invention relates to methods for treating cancer in a subject in need of such treatment, the method comprising administering to the subject a therapeutically effective amount of a compound having the formula II, wherein L¹and L²are each independently a bond, â€”S(O)_mâ€”, â€”Oâ€”, â€”NHâ€”, substituted or unsubstituted C₁-C₅alkylene, or substituted or unsubstituted 2 to 5 membered heteroalkylene, wherein m is an integer from 0 to 2; and A¹and A²are independently substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl.

In another aspect, the invention relates to methods for treating cancer, the method comprising administering to the subject a therapeutically effective amount of a compound having the formula II, wherein the cancer is leukemia or myeloproliferative disorder.

In another aspect, the invention relates to pharmaceutical compositions comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient and a compound having the formula II, wherein L¹and L²are each independently a bond, â€”S(O)_mâ€”, â€”Oâ€”, â€”NHâ€”, substituted or unsubstituted C₁-C₅alkylene, or substituted or unsubstituted 2 to 5 membered heteroalkylene, wherein m is an integer from 0 to 2; and A¹and A²are independently substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl.

In another aspect, the invention relates to pharmaceutical compositions comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient and a compound having the formula I, wherein

A¹is independently a 6-membered substituted or unsubstituted aryl, 6-membered substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, or a 5-membered substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl;

A²is independently a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or a substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl;

X¹is independently â€”C(R⁹)â• , â€”C(R⁹)(R¹⁰)â€”, â€”Nâ• , â€”N(R¹¹)â€”, â€”Sâ€” or â€”Oâ€”;

Z is N(R¹²), S or O;

NX²is O, S, SO, SO₂or NH;

R⁹and R¹⁰are each independently hydrogen, halogen, â€”OR³, â€”NR³R⁴, â€”C(Z)R⁵, â€”S(O)_nR⁶, â€”CN, â€”NO₂, â€”CF₃, â€”OCF₃, â€”OCHF₂, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl;

A¹and A²are each independently substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl.

In another aspect, the invention relates to methods for modulating the activity of a protein kinase, wherein the method comprises contacting the kinase with a compound having the formula II, wherein L¹and L²are each independently a bond, â€”S(O)_m, â€”Oâ€”, â€”NHâ€”, unsubstituted C₁-C₅alkylene, or unsubstituted 2 to 5 membered heteroalkylene.

In another aspect, the invention relates to methods for modulating the activity of a protein kinase, wherein the method comprises contacting the kinase with a compound having the formula II, wherein A¹and A²are each independently substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or 6-membered substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl.

In another aspect, the invention relates to methods for modulating the activity of a protein kinase, wherein the method comprises contacting the kinase with a compound having the formula II, wherein A²is substituted with at least one â€”C(Z)R⁵, wherein Z is N(R¹²), S or O, wherein R¹²is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroalkyl; R⁵is hydrogen, â€”NR¹⁴R¹⁵, â€”OR¹⁶, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl; and R¹⁴, R¹⁵and R¹⁶are independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl.

R¹²is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroalkyl;

wherein R³and R⁴, R¹⁴and R¹⁵, R¹⁷and R¹⁸, R¹⁹and R²⁰are, independently, optionally joined with the nitrogen to which they are attached to form substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, or substituted or unsubstituted 5-membered heteroaryl.

In other aspects, the invention relates to compounds having formula II:

wherein L¹and L²are independently a bond, â€”S(O)_nâ€”, â€”Oâ€”, â€”NHâ€”, substituted or unsubstituted C₁-C₅alkylene, or substituted or unsubstituted 2 to 5 membered heteroalkylene. The symbol n represents an integer from 0 to 2.

A¹and A²are independently substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl.

In some embodiments, L¹and L²are independently a bond, â€”S(O)_n, â€”Oâ€”, â€”NHâ€”, unsubstituted C₁-C₅alkylene, or unsubstituted 2 to 5 membered heteroalkylene. In other embodiments L¹and/or L²is a bond.

A¹and A²may independently be substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl. A¹and A²may also independently be substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or 6-membered substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl.

In some embodiments, A¹is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl (e.g., a 6-membered substituted or unsubstituted aryl such as phenyl) or 6-membered substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl. A¹may also be substituted phenyl or 6-membered substituted heteroaryl. In some embodiments, A¹is substituted or unsubstituted phenyl, substituted or unsubstituted pyridinyl, substituted or unsubstituted pyrimidinyl, substituted or unsubstituted benzodioxolyl, substituted or unsubstituted benzodioxanyl, substituted or unsubstituted benzimidazolyl, or substituted or unsubstituted indolyl.

A²may be a substituted aryl or substituted heteroaryl. In some embodiments, A²is a substituted phenyl, substituted thiopenyl, substituted pyridinyl, substituted pyrrolyl, substituted triazolyl, substituted pyrimidinyl, substituted pyrazinyl, or substituted imidazolyl.

In some embodiments, A¹and A²are independently selected from substituted or unsubstituted phenyl, substituted or unsubstituted hydantoinyl, substituted or unsubstituted dioxolanyl, substituted or unsubstituted benzodioxolyl, substituted or unsubstituted dioxanyl, substituted or unsubstituted trioxanyl, substituted or unsubstituted tetrahydrothienyl, substituted or unsubstituted tetrahydrofuranyl, substituted or unsubstituted tetrahydrothiophenyl, substituted or unsubstituted tetrahydropyranyl, substituted or unsubstituted tetrahydrothiopyranyl, substituted or unsubstituted pyrrolidinyl, substituted or unsubstituted morpholino, substituted or unsubstituted piperidinyl, substituted or unsubstituted piperazinyl, substituted or unsubstituted pyrazolyl, substituted or unsubstituted furanyl, substituted or unsubstituted imidazolyl, substituted or unsubstituted isoxazolyl, substituted or unsubstituted oxadiazolyl, substituted or unsubstituted oxazolyl, substituted or unsubstituted pyridyl, substituted or unsubstituted pyrazyl, substituted or unsubstituted pyrimidyl, substituted or unsubstituted pyridazinyl, substituted or unsubstituted thiazolyl, substituted or unsubstituted isothioazolyl, substituted or unsubstituted triazolyl, substituted or unsubstituted thienyl, substituted or unsubstituted triazinyl, substituted or unsubstituted thiadiazolyl, or substituted or unsubstituted tetrazolyl.

In some embodiments, A¹is substituted with at least one R²²group, wherein each R²²group is optionally different. Each R²²group may be independently selected from halogen, â€”OR², â€”NR³R⁴, â€”C(Z)R⁵, â€”S(O)_wR⁶, â€”CN, â€”NO₂, â€”CF₃, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl. In some embodiments, at least two R²²groups are combined to form a substituted or unsubstituted ring with the atoms to which they are attached. As used herein, the term â€œsubstituted or unsubstituted ringâ€ refers to a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, or substituted or unsubstituted aryl. In other embodiments, R²²is independently halogen (e.g., fluorine or chlorine), â€”NR⁶R⁷, OR⁵, or substituted or unsubstituted alkyl.

In some embodiments, A²is substituted with at least one R¹group and/or one R²³group, wherein each R¹and R²³groups are optionally different. R¹and each R²³group may be independently selected from halogen, â€”OR², â€”NR³R⁴, â€”C(Z)R⁵, â€”S(O)_wR⁶, â€”CN, â€”NO₂, â€”CF₃, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl. In some embodiments, at least two R²³groups or an R²³and an R¹group are combined to form a substituted or unsubstituted ring with the atoms to which they are attached. In some embodiments, R²³is independently halogen, â€”NR³R⁴, â€”OR², or substituted or unsubstituted alkyl.

In some embodiments, R¹to R²³are each independently selected from hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted C₁-C₂₀alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted 2 to 20 membered heteroalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C₃-C₈cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted 3 to 8 membered heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl. In other embodiments, R¹to R²³are independently selected from hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted C₁-C₁₀alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted 2 to 20 membered heteroalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C₃-C₆cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted 3 to 6 membered heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl.

Wherein any of R¹to R²³is a ring or are joined together to form a ring (e.g., cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl), the ring may be independently selected from substituted or unsubstituted phenyl, substituted or unsubstituted hydantoinyl, substituted or unsubstituted dioxolanyl, substituted or unsubstituted benzodioxolyl, substituted or unsubstituted dioxanyl, substituted or unsubstituted trioxanyl, substituted or unsubstituted tetrahydrothienyl, substituted or unsubstituted tetrahydrofuranyl, substituted or unsubstituted tetrahydrothiophenyl, substituted or unsubstituted tetrahydropyranyl, substituted or unsubstituted tetrahydrothiopyranyl, substituted or unsubstituted pyrrolidinyl, substituted or unsubstituted morpholino, substituted or unsubstituted piperidinyl, substituted or unsubstituted piperazinyl, substituted or unsubstituted pyrazolyl, substituted or unsubstituted furanyl, substituted or unsubstituted imidazolyl, substituted or unsubstituted isoxazolyl, substituted or unsubstituted oxadiazolyl, substituted or unsubstituted oxazolyl, substituted or unsubstituted pyridyl, substituted or unsubstituted pyrazyl, substituted or unsubstituted pyrimidyl, substituted or unsubstituted pyridazinyl, substituted or unsubstituted thiazolyl, substituted or unsubstituted isothioazolyl, substituted or unsubstituted triazolyl, substituted or unsubstituted thienyl, substituted or unsubstituted triazinyl, substituted or unsubstituted thiadiazolyl, or substituted or unsubstituted tetrazolyl. One of skill will recognize that the normal rules of valency apply. Therefore, where two groups are joined together with a nitrogen to which they are attached to form a ring, the ring will typically be a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl or 5 membered heteroaryl.

One of skill in the art will immediately recognize that the compounds of the present invention may include more than one R¹to R²³group. Where more than one R¹to R²³group is present, each R¹to R²³group is optionally different.

In some embodiments, A¹is substituted with a halogen, â€”OR², or unsubstituted C₁-C₁₀alkyl. In some embodiments, A¹is substituted with at least one â€”OR². In some related embodiments, R²is independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl. In other related embodiments, R²is hydrogen or unsubstituted C₁-C₁₀alkyl (e.g., A¹is substituted with â€”OCH₃).

In some embodiments, A²is substituted with at least one â€”C(Z)R⁵group. In some related embodiments, Z is O and R⁵is â€”NR¹⁴R¹⁵. In some related embodiments, R¹⁴and R¹⁵are independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroalkyl, or are joined together to form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl or 5-membered heteroaryl (e.g., piperidinyl or piperazinyl). In some embodiments, R¹⁴and/or R¹⁵are substituted with a group having the formula â€”(CH₂)_tâ€”NR²¹R²². The symbol t, R²¹and R²²are as described above.

In some embodiments, A¹has the formula

wherein R²²is as described above; and x is an integer from 1 to 5.

In some embodiments, two R²²groups are optionally combined to form a substituted or unsubstituted ring with the carbons to which they are attached.

In some embodiments, R²²is attached at position 1 and/or position 2. An R²²attached at position 1 may be combined with an R²²attached at position 2 to form a substituted or unsubstituted ring (fused to A¹). In some embodiments, an R²²attached at position 2 is combined with an R²²attached at position 3 to form a substituted or unsubstituted ring (fused to A¹). Examples of rings formed by the combination of two R²²groups are discussed above. In some embodiments, the ring formed is a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl.

In some embodiments, x is 1 and R²²is attached at position 2. In other embodiments, x is 1 and R²²is attached at position 1. Alternatively, x is an integer from 2 to 5 and at least one R²²is attached at position 1. In other embodiments, x is an integer from 2 to 5 and at least one R²²is attached at position 2.

Examples of R², R³, and R⁴groups are discussed above. In some embodiments, if R²²is â€”OR², or â€”NR³R⁴, then R², R³, and R⁴are independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl. In other embodiments, R², R³, and R⁴are hydrogen or substituted or unsubstituted C₁-C₅alkyl. In other embodiments, R², R³, and R⁴are hydrogen or unsubstituted C₁-C₅alkyl.

In some embodiments, A²has the formula:

wherein X¹is â€”C(R⁹)â• , â€”C(R⁹)(R¹⁰)â€”, â€”Nâ• , â€”N(R¹¹)â€”, â€”Sâ€”, or â€”Oâ€”. Thus, A²is substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted substituted heteroaryl. Where A²is unsubstituted, A¹has no further substituents other than R¹(and hydrogen). Where A²is substituted, A¹is substituted with substituents in addition to R¹(e.g., with one or more R²³groups).

In some embodiments, A²is substituted or unsubstituted phenyl, substituted or unsubstituted thiopenyl, substituted or unsubstituted pyridinyl, substituted or unsubstituted pyrrolyl, substituted or unsubstituted triazolyl, substituted or unsubstituted pyrimidinyl, substituted or unsubstituted pyrazinyl, or substituted or unsubstituted imidazolyl.

In some embodiments, R¹is hydrogen, halogen, â€”OR², â€”NR³R⁴, â€”C(Z)R⁵, â€”S(O)_wR⁶, â€”CN, â€”NO₂, â€”CF₃, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl.

R⁹and R¹⁰are independently hydrogen, halogen, â€”OR², â€”NR³R⁴, â€”C(Z)R⁵, â€”S(O)_wR⁶, â€”CN, â€”NO₂, â€”CF₃, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl.

R¹¹is hydrogen, â€”C(O)R⁵, â€”S(O)₂R¹³, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl.

Thus, in some embodiments, the compounds of the present invention have formula I:

wherein L¹, L², A¹, A, X¹and R¹are as described.

In other embodiments, the compounds of the present invention have formula III:

In formula III, L¹, L², R¹, R²², R²³, x, and y are as described above. In some embodiments, L¹and/or L²is a bond. In some embodiments, x is 1 and y is 0. In other embodiments, R²²is attached at position 1 and/or position 2. R^xmay be â€”C(Z)R⁵(defined above). In some related embodiments, Z is O and R⁵is â€”NR¹⁴R¹⁵(defined above). R²²may be â€”OR²(defined above).

In some embodiments, the compounds of the present invention have formula IV:

In formula IV, L¹, L², R¹, R²², and R²³are as defined above. In some embodiments, L¹and/or L²is a bond. R¹may be â€”C(Z)R⁵(defined above). In some related embodiments, Z is O and R⁵is â€”NR¹⁴R¹⁵(defined above). R²²may be â€”OR²(defined above). In some embodiments, R²³is halogen, â€”OR², or â€”NR³R⁴(defined above).

In some embodiments, the compounds of the present invention have formula V:

In formula V, L¹, L², R¹, and R²²are as defined above. R¹may be â€”C(Z)R⁵(defined above). In some related embodiments, Z is O and R⁵is â€”NR¹⁴R¹⁵(defined above). In some embodiments, L¹and/or L²is a bond. One R²²may be attached at the 1 position and may be â€”OR²and the other R²²is attached at the 4 position and may be halogen.

In some embodiments, the compounds of the present invention have formula VI:

In formula VI, L¹, L², R¹, R¹⁹, and R²⁰are as defined above. In some embodiments, L¹and/or L²is a bond. R¹may be â€”C(Z)R⁵(defined above). In some related embodiments, Z is O and R⁵is â€”NR¹⁴R¹⁵(defined above). R²²may be â€”OR²(defined above). R²³attached at the 3â€² position may be â€”OR². R²³attached at the 4â€² position may be halogen or substituted or unsubstituted alkyl (such as C₁-C₅alkyl).

In some embodiments, the compounds of the present invention have formula VII:

In formula VII, L¹, L², R¹, R²², R²³, x, and y are as defined above. In some embodiments, L¹and/or L²is a bond. In some embodiments, x is 1 and y is 0. In other embodiments, R²²is attached at position 1 and/or position 2. R¹may be â€”C(Z)R⁵(defined above). In some related embodiments, Z is O and R⁵is â€”NR¹⁴R¹⁵(defined above). R²²may be â€”OR².

In some embodiments, the compounds of the present invention have formula VIII:

In formula VIII, L¹, L¹, R¹, R²², R²³, and x are as defined above. In some embodiments, L¹and/or L²is a bond. In some embodiments, x is 1. R¹may be â€”C(Z)R⁵(defined above). R²²may be â€”OR²(defined above). In some related embodiments, Z is O and R⁵is NR¹⁴R¹⁵(defined above). R²³may be halogen, or substituted or unsubstituted alkyl (such as C₁-C₅alkyl). R²³may be â€”OR².

In some embodiments, the compounds of the present invention have formula IX:

In formula IX, L¹, L², R¹, R²², and x are as defined above. In some embodiments, L¹and/or L²is a bond. In some embodiments, x is 1. R¹may be â€”C(Z)R⁵(defined above). R²²may be â€”OR²(defined above). In some related embodiments, Z is O and R⁵is NR¹⁴R¹⁵(defined above).

In some embodiments, the compounds of the present invention have formula X:

In formula X, L¹, L², R¹, R¹⁹, and x are as defined above. In some embodiments, L¹and/or L²is a bond. In some embodiments, x is 1. R¹may be â€”C(Z)R⁵(defined above). R²²may be â€”OR²(defined above). In some related embodiments, Z is O and R⁵is NR¹⁴R¹⁵(defined above).

In some embodiments, each substituted group described above in the compounds of formulae I to X is substituted with at least one substituent group. More specifically, in some embodiments, each substituted alkyl, substituted heteroalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, substituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted aryl, substituted heteroaryl, substituted alkylene, and/or substituted heteroalkylene, described above in the compounds of formulae I to X are substituted with at least one substituent group. In other embodiments, at least one or all of these groups are substituted with at least one size-limited substituent group. Alternatively, at least one or all of these groups are substituted with at least one lower substituent group.

In other embodiments of the compounds of formulae I to X, each substituted or unsubstituted alkyl is a substituted or unsubstituted C₁-C₂₀alkyl, each substituted or unsubstituted heteroalkyl is a substituted or unsubstituted 2 to 20 membered heteroalkyl, each substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl is a substituted or unsubstituted C₄-C₈cycloalkyl, each substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl is a substituted or unsubstituted 4 to 8 membered heterocycloalkyl, each substituted or unsubstituted alkylene is a substituted or unsubstituted C₁-C₂₀alkylene, and/or each substituted or unsubstituted heteroalkylene is a substituted or unsubstituted 2 to 20 membered heteroalkylene.

Alternatively, each substituted or unsubstituted alkyl is a substituted or unsubstituted C₁-C₈alkyl, each substituted or unsubstituted heteroalkyl is a substituted or unsubstituted 2 to 8 membered heteroalkyl, each substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl is a substituted or unsubstituted C₅-C₇cycloalkyl, each substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl is a substituted or unsubstituted 5 to 7 membered heterocycloalkyl, each substituted or unsubstituted alkylene is a substituted or unsubstituted C₁-C₈alkylene, and/or each substituted or unsubstituted heteroalkylene is a substituted or unsubstituted 2 to 8 membered heteroalkylene.

In another embodiment, the compounds of the present invention include the compounds of any one of Tables 1-39, or any one of the methods 1-61. In other embodiments, the compounds of the present invention include the compounds of any one of Tables 2-39, or any one of the methods 2-61.

Exemplary Syntheses

The compounds of the invention are synthesized by an appropriate combination of generally well known synthetic methods. Techniques useful in synthesizing the compounds of the invention are both readily apparent and accessible to those of skill in the relevant art. The discussion below is offered to illustrate how, in principle, to gain access to the compounds claimed under this invention and to give details on certain of the diverse methods available for use in assembling the compounds of the invention. However, the discussion is not intended to define or limit the scope of reactions or reaction sequences that are useful in preparing the compounds of the present invention. The compounds of this invention may be made by the procedures and techniques disclosed in the Examples section below, as well as by known organic synthesis techniques. In Schemes 1, 2 and 3, L¹and L²are as defined above. R¹in Schemes 1, 2 and 3 correspond to A¹as defined above. R²in Schemes 1, 2 and 3 correspond to A²as defined above.

The complete synthesis of certain compounds of the present invention is outlined in Scheme 1. Many of these compounds can be synthesized conveniently from commercially available 2-amino-nicotinic acid. Starting from 2-aminonicotinic acid, bromination in the 5-position to 1 (X=Br) can be achieved by various methods well known in the chemical literature, such as, but not limited to reactions using elemental bromine or N-bromosuccinimide (step a in Scheme 1).

Synthesis of a ketone intermediate of general formula 3 (X=Br) can be achieved by treating the corresponding Weinreb-amide 2 or its hydrochloride salt with a suitable organometallic species, for example, using an organomagnesium or organolithium compound [step c in Scheme 1]. (for examples of the use of N-methoxy-N-methylamides (Weinreb amides) in ketone synthesis, see Nam S, and Weinreb S. M.â€”Tetrahedron Lett., 22:3815 (1981)). The Weinreb-amide 2 (X=Br) is accessible by condensation of the parent acid 1 (X=Br, X²=CH) with N, O-dimethylhydroxylamine using standard methods for amide-formation, either by prior activation of the acid or in situ or via a direct condensation. Methods and reagents for both transformations are described in the chemical literature and well known to someone skilled in the art [step b in Scheme 1]. For example, amide formation is achieved by direct methods using suitable coupling reagents such as, but not limited to, PyBOP, HBTU or HATU.

The organometallic reagents required for the introduction of a ketone residue R¹in 3 (X=Br) [step c in Scheme 1] can be obtained either commercially or synthesized by various methods described in the literature, such as, but not limited to the Grignard-reaction of organic chlorides, bromides, or iodides, with magnesium (cf. March J., Advanced Organic Chemistry (3rd ed. 1992), metal-halogen exchange reactions of organic bromides or iodides using suitable organolithium or organomagnesium compounds such as, but not limited to, N-butyllithium, tert-butyllithium or iso-propylmagnesium chloride or bromide (e.g., Clayden J., Organolithiums. Selectivity for Synthesis (2002); Boudier A. et al., Angew. Chem. Int. Ed., 39, 4414 (2000)) or deprotonation of sufficiently acidic compounds, such as for example pyrimidines, pyrazines, 2-chloro- or 2-fluoropyridines using a suitable base, such as for example lithium N,N-diisopropylamide or lithium 2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidide (cf. Clayden J., Organolithiums. Selectivity for Synthesis (2002); Turck A. et al., Tetrahedron, 57, 4489 (2001); Mongin F. and Queguiner G., Tetrahedron, 57, 4059 (2001). The aforementioned group R¹can be substituted with one or more functional groups, in which acidic protons such as, for example, the hydrogen atoms attached to nitrogen or oxygen may, as needed, be protected by a suitable protecting group by methods well known in the chemical literature (cf. Greene T. W. and P. G. M. Wuts, Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis (3rd ed. 1999). Such functional groups will allow for the elaboration of the products obtained in such fashion to various compounds claimed under this invention by generally well known methods.

Olefination of the resulting ketones 3 (X=Br) [step d in Scheme 1] can be achieved by several methods known to those skilled in the art but is most conveniently carried out via a WITTIG-reaction (cf. Maryanoff B. E. and Reitz A. B., Chem. Rev., 89:863 (1989)) using anylide generated from commercially available methoxymethyltriphenylphosphonium chloride and a suitable base, for example, but not limited to, a strong organometallic base such as, but not limited to, a non-nucleophilic amide such as the lithium, sodium or potassium salt of bis(trimethylsilyl)amine. Such olefinations can also be conveniently carried out without purification of the respective ketone 3 (X=Br), using the crude material obtained from the reaction of the WEINREB amide 2 (X=Br) with an organometallic reagent as described above.

Subsequent cyclization of the resulting olefin 4 (X=Br), [step e in Scheme I] which can be utilized in either the E- or Z-form or a mixture of these both forms, can be achieved under general acid catalysis conditions using strong inorganic or organic acids, such as, but not limited to sulfuric acid, perchloric acid, hydrochloric acid, trifluoromethanesulfonic acid or trifluoroacetic acid in suitable solvents such as, but not limited to THF, dioxane, diethyl ether, dimethoxyethane, diglyme, dichloromethane, dichloroethane or chloroform, water, methanol, or ethanol, or mixtures thereof. A similar cyclization has been described by Sakamoto et al., Heterocycles, 34(12):2379-84 (1992). There the authors describe the conversion of 2-nitro-3-(2-ethoxyvinyl)pyridine to the parent pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine. Formation of the vinyl group is achieved via a STILLE-coupling of the 3-bromo analog with tributyl-2-ethoxyvinylstannane.

Introduction of aromatic, olefin, alkyne, or an aliphatic substituents at the 5-position of bromide 5 to afford compounds of the general formula 6 (X=Br) [step f in Scheme 1] can be achieved via standard halogen cross-coupling methodologies (cf. Diederich F. and Stang P. J., Metal-catalyzed Cross-coupling Reactions (1998); Tsuji J., Palladium Reagents and Catalysts (1995). Couplings of the bromide 5 (X=Br) with suitable reagents such as, but not limited to, boronic acids and boronates, organoboranes, trifluoroborate salts (e.g., Molander G. A. et al., J. Org. Chem., 68, 5534 (2003), Molander G. A. and Biolatto B., J. Org. Chem. 68, 4302 (2003)), organostannanes, organozinc compounds, organomagnesium compounds, olefins or terminal alkynes, either purchased or obtained via protocols well known in the chemical literature, are carried out in the presence of a suitable transition metal catalyst, for example, but not limited to, suitable palladium compounds, either in the presence of ligands such as, but not limited to, phosphines, diphosphines or arsines or without and, as necessary, organic or inorganic bases, such as tertiary or secondary amines, alkaline carbonates, bicarbonates or phosphates and, as needed, other additives that are known in the chemical literature to assist or accelerate such transformations, such as lithium chloride, copper halides or silver salts. These cross coupling reactions are carried out in suitable solvents such as, but not limited to, THF, dioxane, dimethoxyethane, diglyme, dichloromethane, dichloroethane, acetonitrile, DMF, N-methylpyrrolidone, ethanol, or water, or mixtures of these at temperatures ranging from 25Â° C. to 200Â° C. using either no heating, conventional heating or microwave irradiation.

This methodology may be extended to the incorporation of non-carbon based nucleophiles such as, but not limited to alcohols, thiols, primary or secondary amines, heterocyclic rings containing hydrogen attached to a nitrogen atom, that may or may not contain groups which are known in the chemical literature to be suitable protecting groups (examples of such groups can be found in Greene T. W. and Wuts P. G. M., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis (3rd ed. 1999) of alcohols, thiols or amines by methods well known in the chemical literature such as, by way of example, those mentioned in Ley S. V. and Thomas A. W., Angew. Chem., 115:5558 (2003); Wolfe J. P. et al., Acc. Chem. Res., 31:805 (1998), and Hartwig J. F., Acc. Chem. Res., 31:852 (1998). The compounds obtained by such methods can be further elaborated by methods well known in the chemical literature to other compounds claimed under this invention.

In one embodiment of the invention, a halide 5 (X=Br) is treated with a boronic acid in the presence of a suitable palladium catalyst, for example, but not limited to tetrakis(triphenylphosphino)alladium(0), dichlorbis(triphenylphosphino)palladium(II) or dichloro[1,1â€²-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene]palladium(II), and a suitable base (e.g., sodium carbonate, cesium carbonate or cesium fluoride) in aqueous solvent mixtures such as, acetonitrile/water or dimethoxyethane/water at temperatures between 110Â° C. and 200Â° C. either using conventional heating or microwave irradiation.

In some cases it may be advantageous to achieve cross-couplings to carbon or non-carbon atoms such as all those mentioned above, by first converting a halide 5 into an organometallic derivative 5b such as a boronic acid or ester, trifluoroborate salt, organomagnesium, organozinc, or organotin compound. Such compounds are accessible by means of substituting the bromide moiety with an appropriate metal or metalloid in which case any functional group present in derivative 5, most notably the ring nitrogen in position 1 of the pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine, may be protected by a suitable protecting group (examples of such groups can be found in Greene T. W. land Wuts P. G. M., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, (3rd ed. 1999). Introduction of such metals or metalloids can be achieved in a number of ways, such as via reductive metallation using metals such alkaline or alkaline earth metals or activated forms of such metals such as lithium, magnesium or lithium naphthalide or via a metal-halogen exchange reactions using suitable organolithium or organomagnesium compounds (e.g., N-butyllithium, tert-butyllithium or iso-propylmagnesium chloride or bromide) and, as needed, subsequent transmetalation reactions of the organometallic intermediate with a suitable soluble and reactive metal compound (e.g., magnesium chloride, magnesium bromide, tri-N-butyltin chloride, trimethyltin chloride, trimethyl borate, triethyl borate, tri-iso-propyl borate, zinc triflate or zinc chloride). Introduction of a boronic acid pinacol ester may be conveniently achieved by reacting derivative 5 directly with bis(pinacolato)diboron in the presence of dichloro[1,1â€²-bis(diphenylphos-phino)-ferrocene]palladium(II) and suitable bases (e.g., potassium or sodium acetate) in solvents such as DMSO, DMF, DMA or N-methylpyrrolidone at temperatures ranging from 80-160Â° C. either using conventional heating or microwave irradiation (literature precedent for similar transformations can be found in Ishiyama T. et al., J. Org. Chem., 60:7508 (1995)). Methods for conversion of the boronic acid pinacol ester obtained by this method into other boronic acid derivatives such as boronic acids, boronates, or trifluoroborate salts are well described in the chemical literature.

Cross-couplings of metallated derivatives 5b with suitable reagents such as aromatic, heteroaromatic or olefinic chlorides, bromides, iodides, triflates or acyl halides either purchased or obtained via protocols well known in the chemical literature, are carried out in the presence of a suitable transition metal catalyst (e.g., suitable palladium compounds, either in the presence of ligands such as phosphines, diphosphines or arsines or without and, as necessary, organic or inorganic bases, such as tertiary or secondary amines, alkaline carbonates, bicarbonates or phosphates and, as needed, other additives that are known in the chemical literature to assist or accelerate such transformations, such as copper halides or silver salts). These cross coupling reactions are carried out in suitable solvents (e.g., THF, dioxane, dimethoxyethane, diglyme, dichloromethane, dichloroethane, acetonitrile, DMF, N-methylpyrrolidone, or mixtures of these) at temperatures ranging from 25Â° C. to 200Â° C. using either no heating, conventional heating or microwave irradiation. The compounds obtained by such methods, particularly those containing suitable functional groups (e.g., carboxylic acids or esters, nitriles, amines, aldehydes or olefins) can be further elaborated by methods well known in the chemical literature to other compounds claimed under this invention.

More reactive organic nucleophiles such as organometallic compounds 5b containing alkaline, or alkaline earth or certain transition metals (e.g., organolithium, organomagnesium or organozinc compounds) can also be coupled to a range of other electrophilic coupling partners such as activated olefins (MICHAEL-acceptors), aldehydes, nitriles, aromatic nitro compounds (see, e.g., Sapountzis I. and Knochel P., J. Am. Chem. Soc., 124:9390 (2002)), carboxylic acid derivatives, carbon dioxide, organic disulfides or organic halides. Such couplings can be achieved using either no catalyst or a suitable transition metal catalyst, such as a suitable copper, cobalt or iron compound in suitable solvents (e.g., ether, THF, dioxane, dimethoxyethane, or diglyme, or mixtures of these) at temperatures ranging from âˆ’100Â° C. to 100Â° C. either in the presence of other additives that are known in the chemical literature to assist or accelerate such transformations, such as, for example, lithium halides, amines or diamines or their derivatives, or without. As will be apparent to someone with skill in the art, the compounds obtained by such methods, particularly such compounds containing suitable functional groups, such as carboxylic acids or esters, nitriles, amines, aldehydes or olefins, can be further elaborated by methods well known in the chemical literature to other compounds claimed under this invention.

3,5-disubstituted pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridines can also be accessed via another method outlined in Scheme 2 (see also WO 2004/032874). Iodination of 2-amino-5-bromopyridine can be achieved by reacting it with iodine and sodium periodate in a suitable solvent such as DMF, DMA or N-methylpyrrolidone at elevated temperatures of 100-200Â° C. to afford intermediate 31. This intermediate 31 can be acylated under standard conditions, such as reacting it with acetyl chloride in a suitable solvent such as pyridine at 25-100Â° C. Coupling of bromide 32 with ethynyltrimethylsilane to afford alkyne 33 can be achieved via standard halogen cross-coupling methodologies (cf. Diederich F. and Stang P. J., Metal-catalyzed Cross-coupling Reactions (1998); Tsuji J., Palladium Reagents and Catalysts (1995) such as using suitable palladium compounds, such as dichlorobis(triphenylphosphino)palladium(II) or dichloro[1,1â€²-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene]palladium (II) as a catalyst in the presence of copper(I)-salts, such as cuprous iodide in the presence of organic bases, such as triethyl amine, in suitable solvents, such as dichloromethane at temperatures of 25Â° C. or above. Cyclization of the resulting alkynylpyridine 33 can be most conveniently achieved by exposure to soluble fluorides, such as tetrabutylammonium fluoride, in suitable solvents such as THF or dioxane at temperatures of 25-110Â° C. to afford 5-bromo-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (34).

Elaboration of halides 34, 35 or 38 can be readily accomplished by generally well known methods. For example, metal catalyzed cross coupling reactions may be employed using various known transition metal compounds (e.g., compounds derived from palladium, iron or nickel). Examples of such transformations can be found in the following references: Diederich F. and Stang P. J., Metal-catalyzed Cross-coupling Reactions (1998); Beller M., Transition Metals for Organic Synthesis (1998); Tsuji J., Palladium Reagents and Catalysts (1^st& 2^ndeds. 1995, 2004); Fuerstner A., et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc., 124:13856 (2002); and Bolm C., et al., Chem. Rev., 104:6217 (2004).

Other useful methods involve the conversion of a bromine or iodine substituent into a metal or metalloid substituent (e.g., organoboron, organolithium, organotin, organosilicon, organozinc, organocopper or organomagnesium compound) using generally well known methods (e.g., metal halogen exchange and, as appropriate or required, subsequent transmetallation using soluble and reactive compounds of boron, magnesium, zinc, tin, silicon or copper; for representative examples of such methodology. See Schlosser M., Organometallics in Synthesis (2nd. ed. 2002.). Organometallic derivatives obtained in such fashion may itself be of use in transition metal catalyzed coupling reactions with aromatic or olefinic halides or triflates, or, if sufficiently reactive, be reacted directly with suitable electrophiles, such as, for example, certain organic halides, MICHAEL-acceptors, oxiranes, aziridines, aldehydes, acyl halides, or nitrites.

Selective functionalization at either the 3- or 5-position may require different strategies depending on the nature of the transformations utilized to introduce functionalities at either position, especially the sequence of functionalization at either position. Thus, it may be advantageous or necessary to achieve functionalization at the 3-position prior to functionalization of the 5-position in some cases while the opposite approach may be required in other cases, depending on the nature of the specific groups to be introduced, the methods required to accomplish such transformations, or the inherent selectivity of the methods utilized. For example, some reactants, such as for example some boronic acids or their esters that are electron deficient (i.e., contain one or more electron withdrawing substituents or that represent derivatives of certain heterocyclic systems) and/or contain one or more substituents ortho to the boron-carbon bond may require the use of highly active palladium catalysts (such as, for example, those mentioned in Vilar R. and Christman U., Angew. Chem., 117:370 (2005); Littke A. F. and Fu G., Angew. Chem., 114:4350 (2002)) and more forcing conditions, such as for example higher temperatures and/or longer reaction times. Such conditions may not be conducive to achieving appreciable selectivities in reactions of 5-bromo-3-iodo-1H-pyrrolo[3,4-b]pyridine. Hence, in such cases, it will be advantageous to avoid selectivity issues altogether by sequential substitution of bromine in 5-bromo-1H-pyrrolo[3,4-b]pyridine, iodination at the 3-position and subsequent introduction of the second substituent at position 3 utilizing the methods detailed above. Generally speaking, whenever substitution of the halogen atom at either position may require conditions that involve highly reactive catalysts or reagents under conditions that generally do not favor high levels of selectivity between the two halogen atoms present in 5-bromo-3-iodo-1H-pyrrolo[3,4-b]pyridine it will be advantageous to resort to this sequential approach.

It will also be appreciated that protection of reactive groups within R¹and/or R²as well as the pyrrolo[3,4-b]pyridine scaffold, (e.g., the proton at position 1), with a suitable protecting group may be advantageous or required. For example it was found to be advantageous in some cross-coupling reactions to protect the nitrogen at position 1 of the 1H-pyrrolo[3,4-b]pyridine scaffold by introduction of, for example, a 4-toluoylsulfonyl, tri-iso-propylsilyl or tetrahydro-1H-pyranyl group at that position. Introduction and removal of these protecting groups could be conveniently accomplished by methods well known in the chemical literature. As will be apparent to someone with skill in the art, the compounds obtained by any of the aforementioned methods may contain functional groups, either free or protected, that can be further elaborated by generally well known methods.

A more detailed description of the utilization of cross-coupling procedures in the synthesis of the compounds claimed under this invention is illustrated in Scheme 3: X¹and X²are selected from, but not limited to, halogen, boronic acid or ester, trifluoroborate salt, organomagnesium, organozinc, or organotin. With respect to the introduction of individual residues L¹R¹or L²R²such transformations, as outlined above, can be achieved via standard halogen cross-coupling methodologies.

Couplings of the corresponding bromide or iodide (X¹, X²=Br, I) with suitable reagents such as boronic acids and boronates, organoboranes, organostannanes, organozinc compounds, organomagnesium compounds, olefins or terminal alkynes (either purchased or obtained via generally well known protocols) can be carried out in the presence of a suitable transition metal catalyst (e.g., palladium compounds). The coupling may optionally be performed in the presence of ligands such as, but not limited to, phosphines, diphosphines, ARDUENGO-type heterocyclic carbenes (c.f. Arduengo A. J. III et al., Organometallics, 17:3375 (1998); Arduengo A. J. III et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc. 116:4391 (1994)) or arsines. Organic or inorganic bases (e.g., tertiary or secondary amines, alkaline carbonates, bicarbonates, fluorides or phosphates) and/or other well known additives (e.g., lithium chloride, copper halides or silver salts) may be utilized to effect, assist or accelerate such transformations.

These cross coupling reactions may be carried out in suitable solvents such as THF, dioxane, dimethoxyethane, diglyme, dichloromethane, dichloroethane, acetonitrile, DMF, N-methylpyrrolidone, water, or mixtures of thereof at temperatures ranging from 25Â° C. to 200Â° C. using. The temperature may optionally be maintained with heating, conventional heating or microwave irradiation. In the case of the 3-iodo-5-bromo-1H-pyrrolo[3,4-b]pyridine, the selective or preferential substitution of the iodo substituent over the bromo substituent is possible under generally less forcing conditions, such as lower temperature and shorter reaction times using a suitable transition metal catalyst. Selective functionalizations of di- or oligohalogen compounds by means of transition metal catalyzed transformations are well precedented in the chemical literature: see, e.g., Ji J. et al., Org. Lett, 5:4611 (2003); Bach T. et al., J. Org. Chem., 67:5789 (2002); Adamczyk M. et. al., Tetrahedron, 59:8129 (2003).

This methodology may be extended to the incorporation of non-carbon based nucleophiles (e.g., alcohols, thiols, primary or secondary amines) that may optionally contain suitable protecting groups of alcohols, thiols or amines. Examples of such groups can be found in Greene T. et al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis (3rd ed.) 1999. Exemplary methods of such utilization of non-carbon nucleophiles in related cross-coupling reactions may be found in Ley S. et al., Angew. Chem., 115:5558 (2003); Wolfe J. et al., Acc. Chem. Res., 31:805 (1998); Hartwig, Acc. Chem. Res., 31:852 (1998); Navarro O., et al., J. Org. Chem., 69:3173 (2004), Ji J. et al., Org. Lett., 5:4611 (2003). The skilled artisan will recognize that the compounds obtained by such methods can be further elaborated by generally well known methods to obtain other compounds of the present invention.

In some cases it may be advantageous to achieve cross-couplings to carbon or non-carbon atoms by first converting the respective halogen derivative into the corresponding organometallic derivative (e.g., a boronic acid or ester, trifluoroborate salt, organomagnesium, organozinc or organotin compound). Such compounds are accessible by means of substituting the halide moiety with an appropriate metal or metalloid. Any functional groups present (e.g., the ring nitrogen in position 1 of the pyrrolo[3,4-b]pyridine), may need to be protected by a suitable protecting group (â€œPGâ€ , c.f. Greene T. et al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis (3rd ed. 1999).

Introduction of such metals or metalloids can be achieved by generally well-known methods, such as metallation using metals or a metal-halogen exchange reaction. Useful metals for metallation include alkaline or alkaline earth metals or activated forms of such metals. Suitable reagents for use in metal-halogen exchange reactions include organolithium or organomagnesium compounds (e.g., N-butyllithium, tert-butyllithium or iso-propylmagnesium chloride or bromide). Subsequent transmetalation reactions of the organometallic intermediate may be performed as needed with a suitable soluble and reactive metal compound such as magnesium chloride, magnesium bromide, tri-N-butyltin chloride, trimethyltin chloride, trimethyl borate, triethyl borate, tri-iso-propyl borate, zinc triflate or zinc chloride. Introduction of a boronic acid pinacol ester can be conveniently achieved by reacting the halogen derivative directly with bis(pinacolato)diboron in the presence of dichloro[1,1â€²-bis(diphenylphosphino)-ferrocene]palladium(II) and suitable bases (e.g., potassium or sodium acetate) in solvents such as DMSO, DMF, DMA or N-methylpyrrolidone at temperatures ranging from 80-160Â° C. Conventional heating or microwave irradiation may be employed to maintain the appropriate temperature (for literature precedent of similar transformations, see Ishiyama T. et al., J. Org. Chem., 60:7508 (2003)).

Methods for conversion of the boronic acid pinacol ester obtained by this method into other boronic acid derivatives such as boronic acids, boronates, or trifluoroborate salts are generally well known. As will be apparent to the skilled artisan, such organometallic derivatives may be utilized in cross-coupling reactions similar to those described above in the case of halogen containing derivatives of pyrrolo[3,4-b]pyridine. Such couplings can be effected utilizing suitable coupling partners, such as aromatic, heteroaromatic halides or olefinic reagents under conditions identical or evidently similar and/or related to the methods described above.

Other methods may utilize the reactivity of organometallic derivatives generated from halogen containing derivatives of pyrrolo[3,4-b]pyridine by any of the methods described above. For example, derivatives containing alkaline or alkaline earth metals (e.g., organolithium, organomagnesium or organozinc compounds) may be employed in direct couplings to a range of other electrophilic coupling partners such as, for example, activated olefins (MICHAEL-acceptors), aldehydes, nitriles, aromatic nitro compounds, carboxylic acid derivatives, oxiranes, aziridines, organic disulfides or organic halides. Such transformations are generally well known in the art (for reactions with aromatic nitro compounds, see, e.g., Sapountzis I., et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc., 124:9390 (2002)).

Protecting Groups

The term â€œprotecting groupâ€ refers to chemical moieties that block some or all reactive moieties of a compound and prevent such moieties from participating in chemical reactions until the protective group is removed, for example, those moieties listed and described in Greene T. W. and Wuts P. G. M., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis (3rd ed. 1999). It may be advantageous, where different protecting groups are employed, that each (different) protective group be removable by a different means. Protective groups that are cleaved under totally disparate reaction conditions allow differential removal of such protecting groups. For example, protective groups can be removed by acid, base, and hydrogenolysis. Groups such as trityl, dimethoxytrityl, acetal and tert-butyldimethylsilyl are acid labile and may be used to protect carboxy and hydroxy reactive moieties in the presence of amino groups protected with Cbz groups, which are removable by hydrogenolysis, and Fmoc groups, which are base labile. Carboxylic acid and hydroxy reactive moieties may be blocked with base labile groups such as, without limitation, methyl, ethyl, and acetyl in the presence of amines blocked with acid labile groups such as tert-butyl carbamate or with carbamates that are both acid and base stable but hydrolytically removable.

Carboxylic acid and hydroxy reactive moieties may also be blocked with hydrolytically removable protective groups such as the benzyl group, while amine groups capable of hydrogen bonding with acids may be blocked with base labile groups such as Fmoc. Carboxylic acid reactive moieties may be blocked with oxidatively-removable protective groups such as 2,4-dimethoxybenzyl, while co-existing amino groups may be blocked with fluoride labile silyl carbamates.

Allyl blocking groups are useful in the presence of acid- and base-protecting groups since the former are stable and can be subsequently removed by metal or pi-acid catalysts. For example, an allyl-blocked carboxylic acid can be deprotected with a palladium(0)-catalyzed reaction in the presence of acid labile t-butyl carbamate or base-labile acetate amine protecting groups. Yet another form of protecting group is a resin to which a compound or intermediate may be attached. As long as the residue is attached to the resin, that functional group is blocked and cannot react. Once released from the resin, the functional group is available to react.

Typical blocking/protecting groups include, but are not limited to the following moieties:

Methods of Inhibiting Kinases

In another aspect, the present invention provides methods of modulating protein kinase activity using the pyrrolo-pyridine kinase modulators of the present invention. The term â€œmodulating kinase activity,â€ as used herein, means that the activity of the protein kinase is increased or decreased when contacted with a pyrrolo-pyridine kinase modulator of the present invention relative to the activity in the absence of the pyrrolo-pyridine kinase modulator. Therefore, the present invention provides a method of modulating protein kinase activity by contacting the protein kinase with a pyrrolo-pyridine kinase modulator of the present invention (e.g., the compounds of any one of Formulae (I)-(XV)). In some embodiments, the compound of formula IV is contacted with the protein kinase.

In some embodiments, the pyrrolo-pyridine kinase modulator inhibits kinase activity. The term â€œinhibit,â€ as used herein in reference to kinase activity, means that the kinase activity is decreased when contacted with a pyrrolo-pyridine kinase modulator relative to the activity in the absence of the pyrrolo-pyridine kinase modulator. Therefore, the present invention further provides a method of inhibiting protein kinase activity by contacting the protein kinase with a pyrrolo-pyridine kinase modulator of the present invention.

In certain embodiments, the protein kinase is a protein tyrosine kinase. A protein tyrosine kinase, as used herein, refers to an enzyme that catalyzes the phosphorylation of tyrosine residues in proteins with a phosphate donors (e.g., a nucleotide phosphate donor such as ATP). Protein tyrosine kinases include, for example, Abelson tyrosine kinases (â€œAblâ€ ) (e.g., c-Abl and v-Abl), Ron receptor tyrosine kinases (â€œRONâ€ ), Met receptor tyrosine kinases (â€œMETâ€ ), Fms-like tyrosine kinases (â€œFLTâ€ ) (e.g., FLT3), src-family tyrosine kinases (e.g., lyn, CSK), and p21-activated kinase-4 (â€œPAKâ€ ), FLT3, aurora kinases, B-lymphoid tyrosine kinases (â€œBlkâ€ ), cyclin-dependent kinases (â€œCDKâ€ ) (e.g., CDK1 and CDK5), src-family related protein tyrosine kinases (e.g., Fyn kinase), glycogen synthase kinases (â€œGSKâ€ ) (e.g., GSK3Î± and GSK3Î²), lymphocyte protein tyrosine kinases (â€œLckâ€ ), ribosomal S6 kinases (e.g., Rsk1, Rsk2, and Rsk3), sperm tyrosine kinases (e.g., Yes), and subtypes and homologs thereof exhibiting tyrosine kinase activity. In certain embodiments, the protein tyrosine kinase is Abl, RON, MET, PAK, or FLT3. In other embodiments, the protein tyrosine kinase is a FLT3 or Abl family member.

In another embodiment, the kinase is a mutant kinase, such as a mutant Bcr-Abl kinase, FLT3 kinase or aurora kinases. Useful mutant Bcr-Abl kinases include those having at least one of the following clinically isolated mutations: M244V, L248V, G250E, G250A, Q252H, Q252R, Y253F, Y253H, E255K, E255V, D276G, F311L, T315I, T315N, T315A, F317V, F317L, M343T, M351T, E355G, F359A, F359V, V3791, F382L, L387M, H396P, H396R, S417Y, E459K and F486S. In some embodiments, the mutant Abl kinase has a T315I mutation. The numbering system denoting the position of the amino acid mutation above is the well known wild-type ABL numbering according to ABL exon Ia. See Deininger M. et al., Blood, 105(7):2640 (2005). The numbering system is reproduced in FIG. 1. In some embodiments, the mutant Bcr-Abl kinase includes at least one of the mutations listed above and has at least 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99%, or 100% sequence identity to the sequence of FIG. 1. In some embodiments, the mutant Bcr-Abl kinase includes at least one of the mutations listed above, has a sequence identity to FIG. 1 as discussed above, and includes at least 50, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450. 500, 550, 600, 650, 700, 750, 800, 850, 900, 950, 1000, 1050, or 1100 amino acids.

In some embodiments, the kinase is selected from Abelson tyrosine kinase, Ron receptor tyrosine kinase, Met receptor tyrosine kinase, Fms-like tyrosine kinase-3, Aurora kinases, p21-activated kinase-4, and 3-phosphoinositide-dependent kinase-1. In some embodiments, the compound of formula I is contacted with the kinase.

In some embodiments, the kinase is homologous to a known kinase (also referred to herein as a â€œhomologous kinaseâ€ ). Compounds and compositions useful for inhibiting the biological activity of homologous kinases may be initially screened, for example, in binding assays. Homologous enzymes comprise an amino acid sequence of the same length that is at least 50%, at least 60%, at least 70%, at least 80%, or at least 90% identical to the amino acid sequence of full length known kinase, or 70%, 80%, or 90% homology to the known kinase active domains. Homology may be determined using, for example, a PSI BLAST search, such as, but not limited to that described in Altschul et al., Nuc. Acids Rec., 25:3389-3402 (1997). In certain embodiments, at least 50%, or at least 70% of the sequence is aligned in this analysis. Other tools for performing the alignment include, for example, DbClustal and ESPript, which may be used to generate the PostScript version of the alignment. See Thompson et al., Nucleic Acids Research, 28:2919-26 (2000); Gouet, et al., Bioinformatics, 15:305-08 (1999). Homologs may, for example, have a BLAST E-value of 1Ã—10^âˆ’6over at least 100 amino acids (Altschul et al., Nucleic Acids Res., 25:3389-402 (1997) with FLT3, Abl, or another known kinase, or any functional domain of FLT3, Abl, or another known kinase.

Homology may also be determined by comparing the active site binding pocket of the enzyme with the active site binding pockets of a known kinase. For example, in homologous enzymes, at least 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, or 90% of the amino acids of the molecule or homolog have amino acid structural coordinates of a domain comparable in size to the kinase domain that have a root mean square deviation of the alpha carbon atoms of up to about 1.5 â„«, about 1.25 â„«, about 1 â„«, about 0.75 â„«, about 0.5 â„«, and or about 0.25 â„«.

The compounds and compositions of the present invention are useful for inhibiting kinase activity and also for inhibiting other enzymes that bind ATP. They are thus useful for the treatment of diseases and disorders that may be alleviated by inhibiting such ATP-binding enzyme activity. Methods of determining such ATP-binding enzymes include those known to those of skill in the art, those discussed herein relating to selecting homologous enzymes, and by the use of the database PROSITE, where enzymes containing signatures, sequence patterns, motifs, or profiles of protein families or domains may be identified.

The compounds of the present invention, and their derivatives, may also be used as kinase-binding agents. As binding agents, such compounds and derivatives may be bound to a stable resin as a tethered substrate for affinity chromatography applications. The compounds of this invention, and their derivatives, may also be modified (e.g., radiolabelled or affinity labeled, etc.) in order to utilize them in the investigation of enzyme or polypeptide characterization, structure, and/or function.

In an exemplary embodiment, the pyrrolo-pyridine kinase modulator of the present invention is a kinase inhibitor. In some embodiments, the kinase inhibitor has an IC₅₀of inhibition constant (K_i) of less than 1 micromolar. In another embodiment, the kinase inhibitor has an IC₅₀or inhibition constant (K_i) of less than 500 micromolar. In another embodiment, the kinase inhibitor has an IC₅₀or K_iof less than 10 micromolar. In another embodiment, the kinase inhibitor has an IC₅₀or K_iof less than 1 micromolar. In another embodiment, the kinase inhibitor has an IC₅₀or K_iof less than 500 nanomolar. In another embodiment, the kinase inhibitor has an IC₅₀or K_iof less than 10 nanomolar. In another embodiment, the kinase inhibitor has an IC₅₀or K_iof less than 1 nanomolar.

Methods of Treatment

In another aspect, the present invention provides methods of treating a disease mediated by kinase activity (kinase-mediated disease or disorder) in a subject (e.g., mammals, such as humans) in need of such treatment. By â€œkinase-mediatedâ€ or â€œkinase-associatedâ€ diseases is meant diseases in which the disease or symptom can be alleviated by inhibiting kinase activity (e.g., where the kinase is involved in signaling, mediation, modulation, or regulation of the disease process). By â€œdiseasesâ€ is meant diseases, or disease symptoms. The method includes administering to the subject an effective amount of a pyrrolo-pyridine kinase modulator of the present invention (e.g., the compounds of any one of Formulae (I)-(XV)).

Examples of kinase associated diseases include cancer (e.g., leukemia, tumors, and metastases), allergy, asthma, obesity, inflammation (e.g., inflammatory diseases such as inflammatory airways disease), hematological disorders, obstructive airways disease, asthma, autoimmune diseases, metabolic diseases, infection (e.g., bacterial, viral, yeast, fungal), CNS diseases, brain tumors, degenerative neural diseases, cardiovascular diseases, and diseases associated with angiogenesis, neovascularization, and vasculogenesis. In an exemplary embodiment, the compounds are useful for treating cancer, including leukemia, and other diseases or disorders involving abnormal cell proliferation, such as myeloproliferative disorders. In some embodiments, the compound of Formula I is administered to the subject.

More specific examples of cancers treated with the compounds of the present invention include breast cancer, lung cancer, melanoma, colorectal cancer, bladder cancer, ovarian cancer, prostate cancer, renal cancer, squamous cell cancer, glioblastoma, pancreatic cancer, Kaposi's sarcoma, multiple myeloma, and leukemia (e.g., myeloid, chronic myeloid, acute lymphoblastic, chronic lymphoblastic, Hodgkins, and other leukemias and hematological cancers).

Other specific examples of diseases or disorders for which treatment by the compounds or compositions of the invention are useful for treatment or prevention include, but are not limited to transplant rejection (e.g., kidney, liver, heart, lung, islet cells, pancreas, bone marrow, cornea, small bowel, skin allografts or xenografts and other transplants), graft vs. host disease, osteoarthritis, rheumatoid arthritis, multiple sclerosis, diabetes, diabetic retinopathy, inflammatory bowel disease (e.g., Crohn's disease, uLcerative colitis, and other bowel diseases), renal disease, cachexia, septic shock, lupus, myasthenia gravis, psoriasis, dermatitis, eczema, seborrhea, Alzheimer's disease, Parkinson's disease, stem cell protection during chemotherapy, ex vivo selection or ex vivo purging for autologous or allogeneic bone marrow transplantation, ocular disease, retinopathies (e.g., macular degeneration, diabetic retinopathy, and other retinopathies), corneal disease, glaucoma, infections (e.g., bacterial, viral, or fungal), heart disease, including, but not limited to, restenosis.

Assays

The compounds of the present invention may be easily assayed to determine their ability to modulate protein kinases, bind protein kinases, and/or prevent cell growth or proliferation. Some examples of useful assays are presented below.

Kinase Inhibition and Binding Assays

Inhibition of various kinases is measured by methods known to those of ordinary skill in the art, such as the various methods presented herein, and those discussed in the Upstate KinaseProfiler Assay Protocols June 2003 publication.

For example, where in vitro assays are performed, the kinase is typically diluted to the appropriate concentration to form a kinase solution. A kinase substrate and phosphate donor, such as ATP, is added to the kinase solution. The kinase is allowed to transfer a phosphate to the kinase substrate to form a phosphorylated substrate. The formation of a phosphorylated substrate may be detected directly by any appropriate means, such as radioactivity (e.g., [Î³-³²P-ATP]), or the use of detectable secondary antibodies (e.g., ELISA). Alternatively, the formation of a phosphorylated substrate may be detected using any appropriate technique, such as the detection of ATP concentration (e.g., Kinase-GloÂ® assay system (Promega)). Kinase inhibitors are identified by detecting the formation of a phosphorylated substrate in the presence and absence of a test compound (see Examples section below).

The ability of the compound to inhibit a kinase in a cell may also be assayed using methods well known in the art. For example, cells containing a kinase may be contacted with an activating agent (such as a growth factor) that activates the kinase. The amount of intracellular phosphorylated substrate formed in the absence and the presence of the test compound may be determined by lysing the cells and detecting the presence phosphorylated substrate by any appropriate method (e.g., ELISA). Where the amount of phosphorylated substrate produced in the presence of the test compound is decreased relative to the amount produced in the absence of the test compound, kinase inhibition is indicated. More detailed cellular kinase assays are discussed in the Examples section below.

To measure the binding of a compound to a kinase, any method known to those of ordinary skill in the art may be used. For example, a test kit manufactured by Discoverx (Fremont, Calif.), ED-Staurosporine NSIPâ„¢ Enzyme Binding Assay Kit (see U.S. Pat. No. 5,643,734) may be used. Kinase activity may also be assayed as in U.S. Pat. No. 6,589,950, issued Jul. 8, 2003.

Suitable kinase inhibitors may be selected from the compounds of the invention through protein crystallographic screening, as disclosed in, for example Antonysamy, et al., PCT Publication No. WO03087816A1, which is incorporate herein by reference in its entirety for all purposes.

The compounds of the present invention may be computationally screened to assay and visualize their ability to bind to and/or inhibit various kinases. The structure may be computationally screened with a plurality of compounds of the present invention to determine their ability to bind to a kinase at various sites. Such compounds can be used as targets or leads in medicinal chemistry efforts to identify, for example, inhibitors of potential therapeutic importance (Travis, Science, 262:1374 (1993). The three dimensional structures of such compounds may be superimposed on a three dimensional representation of kinases or an active site or binding pocket thereof to assess whether the compound fits spatially into the representation and hence the protein. In this screening, the quality of fit of such entities or compounds to the binding pocket may be judged either by shape complementarity or by estimated interaction energy (Meng et al., J. Comp. Chem., 13:505-24 (1992)).

The screening of compounds of the present invention that bind to and/or modulate kinases (e.g., inhibit or activate kinases) according to this invention generally involves consideration of two factors. First, the compound must be capable of physically and structurally associating, either covalently or non-covalently with kinases. For example, covalent interactions may be important for designing irreversible or suicide inhibitors of a protein. Non-covalent molecular interactions important in the association of kinases with the compound include hydrogen bonding, ionic interactions, van der Waals, and hydrophobic interactions. Second, the compound must be able to assume a conformation and orientation in relation to the binding pocket, that allows it to associate with kinases. Although certain portions of the compound will not directly participate in this association with kinases, those portions may still influence the overall conformation of the molecule and may have a significant impact on potency. Conformational requirements include the overall three-dimensional structure and orientation of the chemical group or compound in relation to all or a portion of the binding pocket, or the spacing between functional groups of a compound comprising several chemical groups that directly interact with kinases.

Docking programs described herein, such as, for example, DOCK, or GOLD, are used to identify compounds that bind to the active site and/or binding pocket. Compounds may be screened against more than one binding pocket of the protein structure, or more than one set of coordinates for the same protein, taking into account different molecular dynamic conformations of the protein. Consensus scoring may then be used to identify the compounds that are the best fit for the protein (Charifson P. S. et al., J. Med. Chem., 42:5100-9 (1999)). Data obtained from more than one protein molecule structure may also be scored according to the methods described in Klingler et al., U.S. Utility Application, filed May 3, 2002, entitled â€œComputer Systems and Methods for Virtual Screening of Compounds.â€ Compounds having the best fit are then obtained from the producer of the chemical library, or synthesized, and used in binding assays and bioassays.

Computer modeling techniques may be used to assess the potential modulating or binding effect of a chemical compound on kinases. If computer modeling indicates a strong interaction, the molecule may then be synthesized and tested for its ability to bind to kinases and affect (by inhibiting or activating) its activity.

Modulating or other binding compounds of kinases may be computationally evaluated by means of a series of steps in which chemical groups or fragments are screened and selected for their ability to associate with the individual binding pockets or other areas of kinases. This process may begin by visual inspection of, for example, the active site on the computer screen based on the kinases coordinates. Selected fragments or chemical groups may then be positioned in a variety of orientations, or docked, within an individual binding pocket of kinases (Blaney J. M. and Dixon J. S., Perspectives in Drug Discovery and Design, 1:301 (1993)). Manual docking may be accomplished using software such as Insight II (Accelrys, San Diego, Calif.) MOE (Chemical Computing Group, Inc., Montreal, Quebec, Canada); and SYBYL (Tripos, Inc., St. Louis, Mo., 1992), followed by energy minimization and/or molecular dynamics with standard molecular mechanics force fields, such as CHARMM (Brooks et al., J. Comp. Chem., 4:187-217 (1983)), AMBER (Weiner et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc., 106:765-84 (1984)) and C²MMFF (Merck Molecular Force Field; Accelrys, San Diego, Calif.). More automated docking may be accomplished by using programs such as DOCK (Kuntz et al., J. Mol. Biol., 161:269-88 (1982); DOCK is available from University of California, San Francisco, Calif.); AUTODOCK (Goodsell & Olsen, Proteins: Structure, Function, and Genetics, 8:195-202 (1990); AUTODOCK is available from Scripps Research Institute, La Jolla, Calif.); GOLD (Cambridge Crystallographic Data Centre (CCDC); Jones et al., J. Mol. Biol., 245:43-53 (1995)); and FLEXX (Tripos, St. Louis, Mo.; Rarey M. et al., J. Mol. Biol., 261:470-89 (1996). Other appropriate programs are described in, for example, Halperin et al.

During selection of compounds by the above methods, the efficiency with which that compound may bind to kinases may be tested and optimized by computational evaluation. For example, a compound that has been designed or selected to function as a kinases inhibitor may occupy a volume not overlapping the volume occupied by the active site residues when the native substrate is bound, however, those of ordinary skill in the art will recognize that there is some flexibility, allowing for rearrangement of the main chains and the side chains. In addition, one of ordinary skill may design compounds that could exploit protein rearrangement upon binding, such as, for example, resulting in an induced fit. An effective kinase inhibitor may demonstrate a relatively small difference in energy between its bound and free states (i.e., it must have a small deformation energy of binding and/or low conformational strain upon binding). Thus, the most efficient kinase inhibitors should, for example, be designed with a deformation energy of binding of not greater than 10 kcal/mol, not greater than 7 kcal/mol, not greater than 5 kcal/mol, or not greater than 2 kcal/mol. Kinase inhibitors may interact with the protein in more than one conformation that is similar in overall binding energy. In those cases, the deformation energy of binding is taken to be the difference between the energy of the free compound and the average energy of the conformations observed when the inhibitor binds to the enzyme.

Specific computer software is available in the art to evaluate compound deformation energy and electrostatic interaction. Examples of programs designed for such uses include: Gaussian 94, revision C (Frisch, Gaussian, Inc., Pittsburgh, Pa. Â©1995); AMBER, version 7. (Kollman, University of California at San Francisco, Â©2002); QUANTA/CHARMM (Accelrys, Inc., San Diego, Calif., Â©1995); Insight II/Discover (Accelrys, Inc., San Diego, Calif., Â©1995); DelPhi (Accelrys, Inc., San Diego, Calif., Â©1995); and AMSOL (University of Minnesota) (Quantum Chemistry Program Exchange, Indiana University). These programs may be implemented, for instance, using a computer workstation, as are well known in the art, for example, a LINUX, SGI or Sun workstation. Other hardware systems and software packages will be known to those skilled in the art.

Those of ordinary skill in the art may express kinase protein using methods known in the art, and the methods disclosed herein. The native and mutated kinase polypeptides described herein may be chemically synthesized in whole or part using techniques that are well known in the art (see, e.g., Creighton, Proteins. Structures and Molecular Principles (1983).

Gene expression systems may be used for the synthesis of native and mutated polypeptides. Expression vectors containing the native or mutated polypeptide coding sequence and appropriate transcriptional/translational control signals, that are known to those skilled in the art may be constructed. These methods include in vitro recombinant DNA techniques, synthetic techniques and in vivo recombination/genetic recombination. See, e.g., the techniques described in Sambrook et al., Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual (2001), and Ausubel et al., Current Protocols in Molecular Biology (1989).

Host-expression vector systems may be used to express kinase. These include, but are not limited to, microorganisms such as bacteria transformed with recombinant bacteriophage DNA, plasmid DNA or cosmid DNA expression vectors containing the coding sequence; yeast transformed with recombinant yeast expression vectors containing the coding sequence; insect cell systems infected with recombinant virus expression vectors (e.g., baculovirus) containing the coding sequence; plant cell systems infected with recombinant virus expression vectors (e.g., cauliflower mosaic virus, CaMV; tobacco mosaic virus, TMV) or transformed with recombinant plasmid expression vectors (e.g., Ti plasmid) containing the coding sequence; or animal cell systems. The protein may also be expressed in human gene therapy systems, including, for example, expressing the protein to augment the amount of the protein in an individual, or to express an engineered therapeutic protein. The expression elements of these systems vary in their strength and specificities.

Specifically designed vectors allow the shuttling of DNA between hosts such as bacteria-yeast or bacteria-animal cells. An appropriately constructed expression vector may contain: an origin of replication for autonomous replication in host cells, one or more selectable markers, a limited number of useful restriction enzyme sites, a potential for high copy number, and active promoters. A promoter is defined as a DNA sequence that directs RNA polymerase to bind to DNA and initiate RNA synthesis. A strong promoter is one that causes mRNAs to be initiated at high frequency.

The expression vector may also comprise various elements that affect transcription and translation, including, for example, constitutive and inducible promoters. These elements are often host and/or vector dependent. For example, when cloning in bacterial systems, inducible promoters such as the T7 promoter, pL of bacteriophage Î», plac, ptrp, ptac (ptrp-lac hybrid promoter) and the like may be used; when cloning in insect cell systems, promoters such as the baculovirus polyhedrin promoter may be used; when cloning in plant cell systems, promoters derived from the genome of plant cells (e.g., heat shock promoters; the promoter for the small subunit of RUBISCO; the promoter for the chlorophyll a/b binding protein) or from plant viruses (e.g., the ³⁵S RNA promoter of CaMV; the coat protein promoter of TMV) may be used; when cloning in mammalian cell systems, mammalian promoters (e.g., metallothionein promoter) or mammalian viral promoters, (e.g., adenovirus late promoter; vaccinia virus 7.5K promoter; SV40 promoter; bovine papilloma virus promoter; and Epstein-Barr virus promoter) may be used.

Various methods may be used to introduce the vector into host cells, for example, transformation, transfection, infection, protoplast fusion, and electroporation. The expression vector-containing cells are clonally propagated and individually analyzed to determine whether they produce the appropriate polypeptides. Various selection methods, including, for example, antibiotic resistance, may be used to identify host cells that have been transformed. Identification of polypeptide expressing host cell clones may be done by several means, including but not limited to immunological reactivity with anti-kinase antibodies, and the presence of host cell-associated activity.

Expression of cDNA may also be performed using in vitro produced synthetic mRNA. Synthetic mRNA can be efficiently translated in various cell-free systems, including but not limited to wheat germ extracts and reticulocyte extracts, as well as efficiently translated in cell-based systems, including, but not limited, to microinjection into frog oocytes.

To determine the cDNA sequence(s) that yields optimal levels of activity and/or protein, modified cDNA molecules are constructed. A non-limiting example of a modified cDNA is where the codon usage in the cDNA has been optimized for the host cell in which the cDNA will be expressed. Host cells are transformed with the cDNA molecules and the levels of kinase RNA and/or protein are measured.

Levels of kinase protein in host cells are quantitated by a variety of methods such as immunoaffinity and/or ligand affinity techniques, kinase-specific affinity beads or specific antibodies are used to isolate ³⁵S-methionine labeled or unlabeled protein. Labeled or unlabeled protein is analyzed by SDS-PAGE. Unlabeled protein is detected by Western blotting, ELISA or RIA employing specific antibodies.

Following expression of kinase in a recombinant host cell, polypeptides may be recovered to provide the protein in active form. Several purification procedures are available and suitable for use. Recombinant kinase may be purified from cell lysates or from conditioned culture media, by various combinations of, or individual application of, fractionation, or chromatography steps that are known in the art.

In addition, recombinant kinase can be separated from other cellular proteins by use of an immuno-affinity column made with monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies specific for full length nascent protein or polypeptide fragments thereof. Other affinity based purification techniques known in the art may also be used.

Alternatively, the polypeptides may be recovered from a host cell in an unfolded, inactive form, e.g., from inclusion bodies of bacteria. Proteins recovered in this form may be solubilized using a denaturant, e.g., guanidinium hydrochloride, and then refolded into an active form using methods known to those skilled in the art, such as dialysis.

Cell Growth Assays

A variety of cell growth assays are known in the art and are useful in identifying pyrrolo-pyridine compounds (i.e., â€œtest compoundsâ€ ) capable of inhibiting (e.g., reducing) cell growth and/or proliferation.

For example, a variety of cells are known to require specific kinases for growth and/or proliferation. The ability of such a cell to grow in the presence of a test compound may be assessed and compared to the growth in the absence of the test compound thereby identifying the anti-proliferative properties of the test compound. One common method of this type is to measure the degree of incorporation of label, such as tritiated thymidine, into the DNA of dividing cells. Alternatively, inhibition of cell proliferation may be assayed by determining the total metabolic activity of cells with a surrogate marker that correlates with cell number. Cells may be treated with a metabolic indicator in the presence and absence of the test compound. Viable cells metabolize the metabolic indicator thereby forming a detectable metabolic product. Where detectable metabolic product levels are decreased in the presence of the test compound relative to the absence of the test compound, inhibition of cell growth and/or proliferation is indicated. Exemplary metabolic indicators include, for example tetrazolium salts and AlamorBlueÂ® (see Examples section below).

Pharmaceutical Compositions and Administration

In another aspect, the present invention provides a pharmaceutical composition including a pyrrolo-pyridine kinase modulator in admixture with a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient. One of skill in the art will recognize that the pharmaceutical compositions include the pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the pyrrolo-pyridine kinase modulators described above.

In therapeutic and/or diagnostic applications, the compounds of the invention can be formulated for a variety of modes of administration, including systemic and topical or localized administration. Techniques and formulations generally may be found in Remington, The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, (20^thed. 2000).

The compounds according to the invention are effective over a wide dosage range. For example, in the treatment of adult humans, dosages from 0.01 to 1000 mg, from 0.5 to 100 mg, from 1 to 50 mg per day, and from 5 to 40 mg per day are examples of dosages that may be used. A most preferable dosage is 10 to 30 mg per day. The exact dosage will depend upon the route of administration, the form in which the compound is administered, the subject to be treated, the body weight of the subject to be treated, and the preference and experience of the attending physician.

Pharmaceutically acceptable salts are generally well known to those of ordinary skill in the art, and may include, by way of example but not limitation, acetate, benzenesulfonate, besylate, benzoate, bicarbonate, bitartrate, bromide, calcium edetate, carnsylate, carbonate, citrate, edetate, edisylate, estolate, esylate, fumarate, gluceptate, gluconate, glutamate, glycollylarsanilate, hexylresorcinate, hydrabamine, hydrobromide, hydrochloride, hydroxynaphthoate, iodide, isethionate, lactate, lactobionate, malate, maleate, mandelate, mesylate, mucate, napsylate, nitrate, pamoate (embonate), pantothenate, phosphate/diphosphate, polygalacturonate, salicylate, stearate, subacetate, succinate, sulfate, tannate, tartrate, or teoclate. Other pharmaceutically acceptable salts may be found in, for example, Remington, The Science and Practice of Pharmacy (20^thed. 2000). Preferred pharmaceutically acceptable salts include, for example, acetate, benzoate, bromide, carbonate, citrate, gluconate, hydrobromide, hydrochloride, maleate, mesylate, napsylate, pamoate (embonate), phosphate, salicylate, succinate, sulfate, or tartrate.

Depending on the specific conditions being treated, such agents may be formulated into liquid or solid dosage forms and administered systemically or locally. The agents may be delivered, for example, in a timed- or sustained-low release form as is known to those skilled in the art. Techniques for formulation and administration may be found in Remington, The Science and Practice of Pharmacy (20^thed. 2000). Suitable routes may include oral, buccal, by inhalation spray, sublingual, rectal, transdermal, vaginal, transmucosal, nasal or intestinal administration; parenteral delivery, including intramuscular, subcutaneous, intramedullary injections, as well as intrathecal, direct intraventricular, intravenous, intra-articullar, intra-sternal, intra-synovial, intra-hepatic, intralesional, intracranial, intraperitoneal, intranasal, or intraocular injections or other modes of delivery.

For injection, the agents of the invention may be formulated and diluted in aqueous solutions, such as in physiologically compatible buffers such as Hank's solution, Ringer's solution, or physiological saline buffer. For such transmucosal administration, penetrants appropriate to the barrier to be permeated are used in the formulation. Such penetrants are generally known in the art.

Use of pharmaceutically acceptable inert carriers to formulate the compounds herein disclosed for the practice of the invention into dosages suitable for systemic administration is within the scope of the invention. With proper choice of carrier and suitable manufacturing practice, the compositions of the present invention, in particular, those formulated as solutions, may be administered parenterally, such as by intravenous injection. The compounds can be formulated readily using pharmaceutically acceptable carriers well known in the art into dosages suitable for oral administration. Such carriers enable the compounds of the invention to be formulated as tablets, pills, capsules, liquids, gels, syrups, slurries, suspensions and the like, for oral ingestion by a subject (e.g., patient) to be treated.

For nasal or inhalation delivery, the agents of the invention may also be formulated by methods known to those of skill in the art, and may include, for example, but not limited to, examples of solubilizing, diluting, or dispersing substances such as, saline, preservatives, such as benzyl alcohol, absorption promoters, and fluorocarbons.

Pharmaceutical compositions suitable for use in the present invention include compositions wherein the active ingredients are contained in an effective amount to achieve its intended purpose. Determination of the effective amounts is well within the capability of those skilled in the art, especially in light of the detailed disclosure provided herein.

In addition to the active ingredients, these pharmaceutical compositions may contain suitable pharmaceutically acceptable carriers comprising excipients and auxiliaries which facilitate processing of the active compounds into preparations which can be used pharmaceutically. The preparations formulated for oral administration may be in the form of tablets, dragees, capsules, or solutions.

Pharmaceutical preparations for oral use can be obtained by combining the active compounds with solid excipients, optionally grinding a resulting mixture, and processing the mixture of granules, after adding suitable auxiliaries, if desired, to obtain tablets or dragee cores. Suitable excipients are, in particular, fillers such as sugars, including lactose, sucrose, mannitol, or sorbitol; cellulose preparations, for example, maize starch, wheat starch, rice starch, potato starch, gelatin, gum tragacanth, methyl cellulose, hydroxypropylmethyl-cellulose, sodium carboxymethyl-cellulose (CMC), and/or polyvinylpyrrolidone (PVP: povidone). If desired, disintegrating agents may be added, such as the cross-linked polyvinylpyrrolidone, agar, or alginic acid or a salt thereof such as sodium alginate.

Dragee cores are provided with suitable coatings. For this purpose, concentrated sugar solutions may be used, which may optionally contain gum arabic, talc, polyvinylpyrrolidone, carbopol gel, polyethylene glycol (PEG), and/or titanium dioxide, lacquer solutions, and suitable organic solvents or solvent mixtures. Dye-stuffs or pigments may be added to the tablets or dragee coatings for identification or to characterize different combinations of active compound doses.

Pharmaceutical preparations that can be used orally include push-fit capsules made of gelatin, as well as soft, sealed capsules made of gelatin, and a plasticizer, such as glycerol or sorbitol. The push-fit capsules can contain the active ingredients in admixture with filler such as lactose, binders such as starches, and/or lubricants such as talc or magnesium stearate and, optionally, stabilizers. In soft capsules, the active compounds may be dissolved or suspended in suitable liquids, such as fatty oils, liquid paraffin, or liquid polyethylene glycols (PEGs). In addition, stabilizers may be added.

Depending upon the particular condition, or disease state, to be treated or prevented, additional therapeutic agents, which are normally administered to treat or prevent that condition, may be administered together with the inhibitors of this invention. For example, chemotherapeutic agents or other anti-proliferative agents may be combined with the inhibitors of this invention to treat proliferative diseases and cancer. Examples of known chemotherapeutic agents include, but are not limited to, adriamycin, dexamethasone, vincristine, cyclophosphamide, fluorouracil, topotecan, taxol, interferons, and platinum derivatives.

Other examples of agents the inhibitors of this invention may also be combined with include, without limitation, anti-inflammatory agents such as corticosteroids, TNF blockers, IL-1 RA, azathioprine, cyclophosphamide, and sulfasalazine; immunomodulatory and immunosuppressive agents such as cyclosporin, tacrolimus, rapamycin, mycophenolate mofetil, interferons, corticosteroids, cyclophophamide, azathioprine, and sulfasalazine; neurotrophic factors such as acetylcholinesterase inhibitors, MAO inhibitors, interferons, anti-convulsants, ion channel blockers, riluzole, and anti-Parkinsonian agents; agents for treating cardiovascular disease such as beta-blockers, ACE inhibitors, diuretics, nitrates, calcium channel blockers, and statins; agents for treating liver disease such as corticosteroids, cholestyramine, interferons, and anti-viral agents; agents for treating blood disorders such as corticosteroids, anti-leukemic agents, and growth factors; agents for treating diabetes such as insulin, insulin analogues, alpha glucosidase inhibitors, biguanides, and insulin sensitizers; and agents for treating immunodeficiency disorders such as gamma globulin.

These additional agents may be administered separately, as part of a multiple dosage regimen, from the inhibitor-containing composition. Alternatively, these agents may be part of a single dosage form, mixed together with the inhibitor in a single composition.

The present invention is not to be limited in scope by the exemplified embodiments, which are intended as illustrations of single aspects of the invention. Indeed, various modifications of the invention in addition to those described herein will become apparent to those having skill in the art from the foregoing description. Such modifications are intended to fall within the scope of the invention. Moreover, any one or more features of any embodiment of the invention may be combined with any one or more other features of any other embodiment of the invention, without departing from the scope of the invention. For example, the pyrrolo-pyridine kinase modulators described in the Pyrrolo-pyridine Kinase Modulators section are equally applicable to the methods of treatment and methods of inhibiting kinases described herein. References cited throughout this application are examples of the level of skill in the art and are hereby incorporated by reference herein in their entirety for all purposes, whether previously specifically incorporated or not.

EXAMPLES

The following examples are offered to illustrate, but not to limit the claimed invention. The preparation of embodiments of the present invention is described in the following examples. Those of ordinary skill in the art will understand that the chemical reactions and synthesis methods provided may be modified to prepare many of the other compounds of the present invention. Where compounds of the present invention have not been exemplified, those of ordinary skill in the art will recognize that these compounds may be prepared by modifying synthesis methods presented herein, and by using synthesis methods known in the art. The compounds with assay results given are marked with AE.

Example 1Synthesis of CompoundsMethod 1

Step 1: Synthesis of 5-bromo-3-iodo-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine

Into a 500 mL round bottomed flask were added 5-bromo-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (10.11 g, 51.3 mmol) and 250 ml acetone. N-iodosuccinimide (NIS, 12.7 g, 56.4 mmol) was added, and the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour. The precipitate was collected and washed with cold acetone to afford 12.2 g (74%) of the title compound as a tan powder. ¹H-NMR (500 MHz, d₆-DMSO) Î´=12.35 (br.s, 1H), 8.29 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.84 (d, J=2.0 Hz 1H), 7.79 (s, 1H); MS: m/z 322.8/324.8 [MH⁺].

Step 2: Synthesis of 5-Bromo-3-iodo-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine

Into a 250 mL round bottomed flask were added 5-bromo-3-iodo-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (8.00 g, 40.6 mmol) and 120 mL dry THF. The solution was cooled in an ice bath at 0Â° C. and NaH (2.40 g, 60.0 mmol) was added in three portions. After 20 min, p-toluene-sulfonyl chloride (8.70 g, 45.63 mmol) was added, and the reaction mixture was allowed to warm to rt over 30 min. The reaction mixture was concentrated and hexanes was added to obtain a precipitate, which was collected and washed with ice cold 2M NaOH. The crude product was recrystallized from EtOAc/hexanes to afford 17.8 g (92%) of the title compound as a light tan powder. ¹H-NMR (500 MHz, d₆-DMSO) Î´ 8.49 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 8.21 (s, 1H), 7.99 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.98 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 2H), 7.42 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 2H), 2.32 (s, 3H); MS: m/z 476.8/478.8 [MH⁺].

Step 3: Synthesis of 5-Bromo-3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine

Into a 500 mL round bottomed flask were added 5-Bromo-3-iodo-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (11.80 g, 20.96 mmol), 2-methoxyphenyl boronic acid (3.76 g, 24.74 mmol), dichlorobis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(II) (0.756 g, 1.08 mmol), acetonitrile (100 mL) and 100 mL of 2M Na₂CO₃(aq). The flask was fitted with a reflux condenser and heated at 60Â° C. with rapid stirring under N₂for 8 h. The reaction mixture was filtered to obtain a grey-tan precipitate, which was dissolved in EtOAc and washed with water followed by brine. Concentration of this solution afforded 7.70 g (80%) of the title compound as a tan powder. ¹H-NMR (500 MHz, d₆-DMSO) Î´ 8.50 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.14 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 8.07 (s, 1H), 8.03 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 2H), 7.54 (dd, J=1.5, 7.5 Hz, 1H), 7.43 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 2H), 7.39 (m, 1H), 7.15 (d, J=7.5 Hz, 1H), 7.05 (t, J=7.0 Hz, 1H), 3.80 (s. 3H), 2.34 (s, 3H); MS: m/z 456.9/458.9 [MH⁺].

Step 4: Synthesis of 3-(2-Methoxy-phenyl)-5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine

Into a 5 mL Personal Chemistry microwave reaction vial were added 5-Bromo-3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (0.102 g, 0.220 mmol), Bis(pinacolato)diboron (0.123 g, 0.483 mmol), 1,1â€²-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocenepalladium(II)-dichloride dichloromethane adduct (9.1 mg, 0.01 mmol) and anhydrous sodium acetate (55 mg, 0.67 mmol) and anhydrous DMF (1 mL). The resulting mixture was irradiated in a Personal Chemistry Optimizer at 140Â° C. for 60 min and then diluted with EtOAc and extracted 4Ã— with water. The organic phase was treated with brine, dried (Na₂SO₄), filtered and concentrated. The crude product was purified by flash silica gel chromatography using a gradient of ethyl acetate in hexanes to afford 90.9 mg (81%) of the title compound a white powder. ¹H-NMR (500 MHz, CDCl₃) Î´ 8.79 (d, J=1.0 Hz, 1H), 8.32 (d, J=1.0 Hz, 1H), 8.11 (d, J=5.5 Hz, 2H), 7.94 (d, J=3.0 Hz, 1H), 7.50 (m, 1H), 7.35 (t, J=7.5 Hz, 1H), 7.25 (d, J=7.5 Hz, 2H), 7.05 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 1H), 7.01 (d, J=7.2 Hz, 1H), 3.85 (s, 3H), 2.35 (s, 3H), 1.31 (s, 12H); MS: m/z 505.1 [MH⁺].

Other compounds prepared by Method 1:

TABLE 1StructureMS: m/z 519 [MH⁺]. MS: m/z 503 [MH⁺]. MS: m/z 514 [MH⁺]. MS: m/z 465 [MH⁺]. MS: m/z 506 [MH⁺]. MS: m/z 511 [MH⁺]. MS: m/z 517 [MH⁺]. MS: m/z 519 [MH⁺]. MS: m/z 555 [MH⁺]. MS: m/z 559 [MH⁺]. MS: m/z 505 [MH⁺].*See Method 24 on synthesis of 2-(5-(pyridine-3-yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-3-yl)thiazole.

Method 2

Step 1: Synthesis of 5-[3-(2-Methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-nicotinamide

Into a 5 mL Personal Chemistry microwave reaction vial were added 3-(2-Methoxy-phenyl)-5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (0.136 g, 0.270 mmol), 5-Bromo-N,N-dimethyl-nicotinamide (0.0756 g, 0.332 mmol; preparation described below), 1,1â€²-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene-palladium(II)-dichloride dichloromethane adduct (16.2 mg, 0.01 mmol), acetonitrile (2 mL) and saturated aqueous NaHCO₃(2 mL). The vial was sealed, purged with N₂, and irradiated in a Personal Chemistry Optimizer at 90Â° C. for 15 min. The layers were separated, and the aqueous phase was extracted 3Ã— with EtOAc. The combined organic phase was treated with brine, dried (Na₂SO₄), filtered and concentrated. The crude product was dissolved in 3:1 MeOH/acetone (4 mL total) and treated with 500 Î¼L of 50% w/w KOH(aq) for 1 h. Glacial Acetic acid was added to obtain pH 7, then the reaction mixture was concentrated. The residue was partitioned between EtOAc and water, then the layers were separated, and the organic phase was washed 2Ã— with water. The organic phase was treated with brine, dried (Na₂SO₄), filtered and concentrated. Purification by flash silica gel chromatography using a gradient of ethyl acetate (containing 10% MeOH) and hexanes afforded the title compound as a tan powder (57 mg, 57%). ¹H-NMR (500 MHz, d₆-DMSO) Î´=11.96 (br. s, 1H), 8.95 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 8.56 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.52 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.24 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.13 (t, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.72 (d, J=3.0 Hz, 1H), 7.59 (dd, J=2.0, 5.5 Hz, 1H), 7.25 (dd, J=1, 7.5 Hz, 1H), 7.08 (d, J=7.5 Hz, 1H), 6.99 (t, J=7.5 Hz, 1H), 3.76 (s, 3H), 2.97 (s, 3H), 2.92 (s, 3H); MS: m/z 373.1 [MH⁺].

Preparation of intermediate: 5-Bromo-N,N-dimethyl-nicotinamide: Into a 100 mL round bottomed flask were added 5-bromonicotinoyl chloride (0.531 g, 2.41 mmol) and anhydrous pyridine (5 mL). A 2M solution of dimethylamine in THF (5 mL, 10.0 mmol) was added dropwise, and the reaction mixture was stirred at rt under N₂for 6 h after which it was concentrated under vacuum. The crude residue was partitioned between EtOAc and water. The layers were separated, and the organic phase was washed 3Ã— with water, then treated with brine, dried (Na₂SO₄), filtered and concentrated to afford 5-Bromo-N,N-dimethyl-nicotinamide as a brown oil (0.4951 g, 89%). MS: m/z 229/231 [MH⁺].

Other compounds prepared by Method 2 (Either silica gel chromatography or mass triggered reverse phase HPLC or both may be used for the purification of the following compounds):

TABLE 2StructureMS: m/z 345 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 359 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 364 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 378 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 420 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 433 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 415 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 399 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 378 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 428 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 442 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 401 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 430 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 429 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 372 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 398 [MH⁺ MS: m/z 442 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 414 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 427 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 413 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 455 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 469 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 484 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 453 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 358 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 332 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 318 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 318 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 335 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 331 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 290 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 317 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 408 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 485 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 492 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 465 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 456 [M + H⁺] MS: m/z 488 [M + H⁺] MS: m/z 387 [M + H⁺] MS: m/z 403 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 317 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 320 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 400 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 319 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 337 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 351 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 360 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 395 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 318 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 317 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 398 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 386 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 351 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 399 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 379 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 318 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 380 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 320 [MH MS: m/z 397 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 318 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 318 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 341 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 321.8 (M + H⁺) MS: m/z 318.0 (M + H⁺) MS: m/z 413.1 (M + H⁺ MS: m/z 424.1 (M + H⁺) MS: m/z 361.1 (M + H⁺) MS: m/z 318.0 (M + H⁺) MS: m/z 371.1 (M + H⁺) MS: m/z 357.1 (M + H⁺) MS: m/z 387.1 (M + H⁺) MS: m/z 320 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 478 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 493 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 520 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 447 [M + H⁺] MS: m/z 389 [M + H⁺] MS: m/z 373.1 (M + H⁺) MS: m/z 453.1 (M + H⁺) MS: m/z 427.1 (M + H⁺) MS: m/z 413.1 (M + H⁺) MS: m/z 469.1 (M + H⁺) MS: m/z 339 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 343 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 358 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 340 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 316 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 318 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 363 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 336 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 291 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 347 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 356 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 305 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 350 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 303 [MH⁺ MS: m/z 356 [MH⁺]. MS: m/z 334 [MH⁺]. MS: m/z 355 [MH⁺]. MS: m/z 332 [MH⁺]. MS: m/z 359 [MH+]. MS: m/z 334 [MH+]. MS: m/z 332 [MH+]. MS: m/z 331 [MH+]. MS: m/z 355 [MH+]. MS: m/z 351 [MH+]. MS: m/z 380 [MH+]. MS: m/z 350 [MH+]. MS: m/z 316 (M + H⁺) MS: m/z 463 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 512 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 512 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 300.3 [M + H⁺] MS: m/z 459 [M + H⁺] MS: m/z 387 [M + H⁺]*Suzuki coupling was carried out at 140Â° C. in microwave for 30 min. and no base treatment was need for the removal of the Ts group.

Method 3

Step 1: Synthesis of 5-[3-(2-Methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-nicotinic Acid Ethyl Ester

Into a 20 mL Personal Chemistry microwave reaction vial were added 3-(2-Methoxy-phenyl)-5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (0.995 g, 2.18 mmol), 5-Bromo-nicotinic acid ethyl ester (0.645 g, 2.33 mmol), 1,1â€²-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocenepalladium(II)-dichloride dichloromethane adduct (95.5 mg, 0.117 mmol), acetonitrile (10 mL) and saturated aqueous NaHCO₃(10 mL). The vial was sealed, purged with N₂, and irradiated in a Personal Chemistry Optimizer at 90Â° C. for 15 min. The layers were separated, and the aqueous phase was extracted 3Ã— with EtOAc. The combined organic phase was treated with brine, dried (Na₂SO₄), filtered and concentrated. Purification by flash silica gel chromatography using a gradient of ethyl acetate and hexanes afforded 5-[3-(2-Methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-nicotinic acid ethyl ester as a white powder (0.794 g, 69%). MS: m/z 528.1 [MH⁺].

Step 2: Synthesis of N-Isopropyl-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-nicotinamide

Into a 5 mL screw-cap vial were added 5-[3-(2-Methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-nicotinic acid ethyl ester (50.2 mg, 0.095 mmol) and isopropylamine (500 Î¼L). The vial was sealed and placed in heated block at 100Â° C. for 48 h. The reaction solution was concentrated and the residue was dissolved in 1:1 MeOH/acetone (2 mL total) and treated with 100 Î¼L of 50% w/w KOH(aq) for 1 h. Glacial Acetic acid was added to obtain pH 7, then the reaction mixture was concentrated. The residue was partitioned between EtOAc and water, then the layers were separated, and the organic phase was washed 2Ã— with water. The organic phase was treated with brine, dried (Na₂SO₄), filtered and concentrated. Purification by flash silica gel chromatography using a gradient of ethyl acetate (containing 10% MeOH) and hexanes afforded the title compound as a white powder (13 mg, 35%). ¹H-NMR (500 MHz, d₆-DMSO) Î´=11.96 (br. s, 1H), 9.05 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 8.94 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.64 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.51 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 8.46 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.30 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.76 (s, 1H), 7.61 (d, J=5.5 Hz, 1H), 7.29 (dd, J=2, 7.5 Hz, 1H), 7.12 (d, J=7.51H), 7.04 (d, J=7.5 Hz, 1H), 4.11 (m, 1H), 3.84 (s, 3H), 1.17 (s, 6H); MS: m/z 387.1 [MH⁺].

Other compounds prepared by Method 3:

TABLE 3StructureMS: m/z 373 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 401 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 385 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 416 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 387 [MH⁺]

Method 4

Step 1: Synthesis of 3-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-benzoic Acid

To a solution of 5-bromo-3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (1.01 g, 2.21 mmol) in a 1:1 acetonitrile/saturated aqueous NaHCO₃solution (20 mL total) was added (3-tert-butoxycarbonylphenyl)boronic acid (0.54 g, 2.43 mmol) and [1,1â€²-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene]dichloropalladium (II), complex with dichloromethane (1:1) (0.90 g, 0.11 mmol) in a microwave vial. The vial was capped, flushed with N₂, evacuated under vacuum, and subsequently heated in a microwave at 90Â° C. for 1800 seconds. The material was diluted with ethyl acetate and the organic layer was washed with H₂O then dried over Na₂SO₄. The solution was adsorbed onto silica gel and purified by flash chromatography with a gradient of ethyl acetate and hexanes, affording 3-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-5-yl]-benzoic acid tert-butyl ester as a white solid (1.07 g, 87% yield). ¹H NMR (500 MHz, CDCl₃) Î´ 8.68 (s, 1H), 8.17 (br s, 3H), 8.09 (s, 1H), 7.99 (m, 2H), 7.71 (d, J=6.5 Hz, 1H), 7.50 (m, 2H), 7.34 (t, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.32 (d, J=6.5 Hz, 2H), 7.06 (m, 2H), 3.88 (s, 3H), 2.39 (s, 3H), 1.60 (s, 9H). MS: m/e 555.1 (M+H⁺).

To 3-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-5-yl]-benzoic acid tert-butyl ester (1.07 g, 1.82 mmol) in a 1:1 MeOH/acetone solution (40 mL total) was added 4 mL of a 50% KOH (aq) solution. The reaction mixture was stirred for 20 hours at ambient temperature. Glacial acetic acid was added dropwise until the solution had a pH=6. The product was extracted into ethyl acetate and dried over Na₂SO₄. The material was adsorbed onto silica gel and purified by flash chromatography in an ethyl acetate and hexane gradient, affording 3-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-benzoic acid tert-butyl ester as a colorless oil that started to crystallize into a white solid (1.97 g, quantitative yield). ¹H NMR (500 MHz, CDCl₃) Î´ 11.34 (s, 1H), 8.50 (s, 2H), 8.21 (s, 1H), 8.05 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.75 (m, 2H), 7.55 (m, 2H), 7.40 (t, J=6.0 Hz, 1H), 7.10 (m, 2H), 3.88 (s, 3H), 1.25 (s, 9H). MS: m/e 401.1 (M+H⁺).

To a solution of 3-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-benzoic acid tert-butyl ester (1.97 g, 4.92 mmol) in acetic acid (4 mL) was added dropwise a premixed solution of hydrogen bromide (33% wt in acetic acid) (889 uL, 4.92 mmol) and mercaptoacetic acid (444 uL, 6.39 mmol). The sides of the flask were rinsed with additional acetic acid (3 mL) and the reaction solution was stirred at ambient temperature for 10 minutes whereupon the product began to precipitate out of solution. The reaction was stirred for an additional hour at ambient temperature. The precipitate was filtered and rinsed well with acetic acid and diethyl ether, affording the title compound as a bright yellow solid (448 mg, 67% yield). ¹H NMR (500 MHz, d₆-DMSO) Î´ 12.03 (br s, 1H), 8.58 (s, 1H), 8.21 (d, 2H), 7.99 (d, 1H), 7.94 (d, 1H), 7.76 (d, 1H), 7.61 (m, 2H), 7.31 (t, 1H), 7.14 (d, 1H), 7.06 (t, 1H), 3.83 (s, 3H). MS: m/e 345.1 (M+H⁺).

Step 2: N-(2-Dimethylamino-ethyl)-3-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N-methyl-benzamide

To a solution of 3-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-benzoic acid (21 mg, 0.06 mmol) in anhydrous DMF (1 mL) was added HATU (23 mg, 0.06 mmol) and N,N,Nâ€²-trimethylethylenediamine (7.9 Î¼L, 0.06 mmol). The reaction solution was stirred 16 hours at ambient temperature then diluted with DMSO (1 mL), filtered through a 0.45 um syringe filter, and purified by reverse phase chromatography in a mobile phase of H₂O and acetonitrile (with 0.1% formic acid as the modifier). Clean fractions were combined and lyophilized, affording the title compound as a white powder (14.0 mg, 54% yield). ¹H NMR (500 MHz, CD₃OD) Î´8.51 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.29 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.83 (br s, 1H), 7.81 (bs, 1H), 7.69 (s, 1H), 7.60 (m, 2H), 7.49 (m, 1H), 7.32 (t, J=7.5 Hz, 1H), 7.13 (d, 8.5 Hz, 1H), 7.07 (t, J=6.5 Hz, 1H), 3.90 (t, J=6.0 Hz, 2H), 3.86 (s, 3H), 3.33 (s, 3H), 3.17 (s, 3H), 2.91 (s, 3H), 2.80 (br s, 2H). MS: m/e 429.1 (M+H⁺).

Other compounds prepared by Method 4:

TABLE 4StructureMS: m/z 415 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 504 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 510 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 402 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 502 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 507 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 490 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 526 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 406 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 463 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 518 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 512 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 456 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 390 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 447 [MH⁺] MS: m/z 514 [MH⁺]

Method 5

Step 1: Synthesis of 2-Hydroxy-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-benzoic Acid Methyl Ester

To a solution of 3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (502 mg, 1.00 mmol) in 1.5 mL saturated aqueous NaHCO₃and 5.0 mL acetonitrile was added methyl 5-bromosalicylate (253 mg, 1.10 mmol) and [1,1â€²-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene]dichloropalladium (II), complex with dichloromethane (1:1) (41 mg, 0.05 mmol) in a microwave vial. The vial was capped, flushed with N₂, evacuated under vacuum, and subsequently heated in a microwave at 90Â° C. for 300 seconds. The material was diluted with ethyl acetate and the organic layer was washed with saturated NaHCO₃(aq) and brine then dried over Na₂SO₄. The material was filtered then adsorbed onto silica gel and purified by flash chromatography with a gradient of ethyl acetate and hexane, affording the title compound as a hydroscopic white solid (480 mg, 91% yield). ¹H NMR (500 MHz, CD₃OD) Î´8.55 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.06 (m, 4H), 7.96 (s, 1H), 7.77 (dd, J=2.5, 6.0 Hz, 1H), 7.52 (dd, J=2.0, 6.0 Hz, 1H), 7.40 (m, 3H), 7.16 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 7.08 (m, 2H), 3.98 (s, 3H), 3.87 (s, 3H), 2.39 (s, 3H). MS: m/z 529.1 (M+H⁺).

Step 2: Synthesis of N-(2-Dimethylamino-ethyl)-2-hydroxy-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N-methyl-benzamide

To a solution of 2-hydroxy-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-benzoic acid methyl ester (52 mg, 0.10 mmol) in pyridine (0.5 mL) was added an excess of N,N,Nâ€²-trimethylethylenediamine (0.5 mL). The reaction was stirred for 16 hours at 100Â° C. in a scintillation vial. There appeared to be Ëœ50% product formation and Ëœ50% hydrolysis of the methyl ester to the carboxylic acid. PS-carbodiimide resin (244 mg, 0.29 mmol, 1.21 mmol/g load capacity) and DMF (1 mL) were added to the reaction solution and heating was continued for 16 hours at 70Â° C. The resin was filtered off and rinsed well with THF and MeOH. The filtrate was concentrated down to a yellow oil and then redissolved in a 1:1 MeOH/acetone solution (4 mL total). The solution was treated with 200 uL of a 50% KOH (aq) solution and stirred at ambient temperature for 3 hours. Glacial acetic acid was added dropwise until the pH=7. The product was extracted into ethyl acetate, whereupon the organic layer was washed with H₂O, dried over Na₂SO₄, filtered, and concentrated under vacuum. The material was dissolved in MeOH and filtered through a 0.45 Î¼m syringe filter. The solution was purified by reverse phase chromatography using a gradient of H₂O and acetonitrile (with 0.1% formic acid as a modifier). Clean fractions were lyophilized, affording the title compound as a white powder (5.2 mg, 12% yield). ¹H NMR (500 MHz, d₆-DMSO) Î´ 11.80 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 8.49 (s, 1H), 8.19 (s, 1H), 8.10 (s, 1H), 7.74 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 7.63 (dd, J=2.0, 6.0 Hz, 1H), 7.51 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 7.43 (s, 1H), 7.33 (m, 1H), 7.17 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 7.09 (t, J=6.5 Hz, 1H), 7.01 (d, J=9.0 Hz, 1H), 3.85 (s, 3H), 3.01 (br s, 3H), 2.90 (br s, 2H), 2.59 (m, 2H), 2.36 (br s, 3H), 2.00 (br s, 3H). MS: m/z 445.1 (M+H⁺).

Other compounds prepared by method 5:

TABLE 5Structure

Method 6

Step 1: Synthesis of (3-(1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl)phenyl)(morpholino)methanone

A mixture of 5-bromo-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (3 g, 15 mmol), 3-(morpholine-4-carbonyl)phenylboronic acid (4 g, 18 mmol), sodium bicarbonate (4 g, 46 mmol), and tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(0) in dioxane/water (100 mL/20 mL) was stirred at 110Â° C. for 15 hours. The mixture was then poured into ice water and extracted with ethyl acetate (3Ã—). The organic layers were combined, dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated to dryness. Silica gel chromatography of the crude product afforded (3-(1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl)phenyl)(morpholino)methanone (3.86 g, 84% yield) as yellow solids. MS: m/z 308.1 (M+H⁺).

Step 2: Synthesis of (3-(3-iodo-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl)phenyl)(morpholino)methanone

To a solution of (3-(1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl)phenyl)(morpholino)methanone (550 mg, 1.79 mmol) in acetone (10 mL) was added NIS (604 mg, 2.68 mmol) and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 20 minutes. Acetone was removed by reduced pressure and the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography to afforded (3-(3-iodo-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl)phenyl)(morpholino)methanone (600 mg, 77% yield). MS: m/z 434.2 (M+H⁺).

Step 3: Synthesis of (3-(3-iodo-1-tosyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl)phenyl)(morpholino)methanone

A mixture of (3-(3-iodo-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl)phenyl)(morpholino)methanone (600 mg, 1.38 mmol), p-toluenesulfonyl chloride (528 mg, 2.77 mmol), potassium hydroxide (50% w/v in water, 0.387 mL, 3.45 mmol) and tetrabutylammonium hydroxide (40% w/v in water, 0.448 mL, 0.69 mmol) in toluene (5 mL) was stirred at room temperature for 15 hours. Water was added to the mixture and the aqueous mixture was extracted by ethyl acetate (3Ã—). The organic layers were combined, dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated to dryness. Silica gel chromatography of the crude product afforded (3-(3-iodo-1-tosyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl)phenyl)(morpholino)methanone (600 mg, 74% yield) as yellow solids. MS: m/z 588.1 (M+H⁺).

Step 4: Synthesis of (3-(3-(2-fluorophenyl)-1-tosyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl)phenyl)(morpholino)methanone

A mixture of (3-(3-iodo-1-tosyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl)phenyl)(morpholino)methanone (40 mg, 0.068 mmol), 2-fluorophenylboronic acid (18 mg, 0.128 mmol), [1,1â€²-Bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene]dichloropalladium(II) complex with dichloromethane (3.9 mg, 0.005 mmol) and sodium carbonate (2M aqueous solution, 0.102 mL, 0.204 mmol) in acetonitrile (1 mL) was heated in a Personal microwave at 90Â° C. for 30 min. The resulting mixture was diluted with water and extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic layers were combined, dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated to dryness to afford crude (3-(3-(2-fluorophenyl)-1-tosyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl)phenyl)(morpholino)methanone, which was used in step 5 without further purification.

Step 5: Synthesis of (3-(3-(2-fluorophenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl)phenyl)(morpholino)methanone

Crude (3-(3-(2-fluorophenyl)-1-tosyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl)phenyl)(morpholino)methanone from last step was dissolved in methanol (1 mL) and potassium hydroxide (50% w/v, 0.038 mL, 0.136 mmol) was added to the solution. The resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature for 30 minutes before being diluted with water and extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic layers were combined, dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated to dryness. The crude product was then dissolved in DMSO and purified by mass triggered reverse phase HPLC to afford pure (3-(3-(2-fluorophenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl)phenyl)(morpholino)methanone (5.6 mg, 21% yield from (3-(3-iodo-1-tosyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl)phenyl)(morpholino)methanone) as light brown syrup. ¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d6) Î´ 3.60 (m, br, 8H), 7.33 (m, 3H), 7.39 (m, 1H), 7.55 (t, J=7.5 Hz, 1H), 7.74 (m, 1H), 7.84 (m, 3H), 8.28 (m, 1H), 8.61 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 12.17 (s, 1H). MS: m/z 402.1 (M+H⁺).

Other compounds prepared by Method 6:

TABLE 6Structure

Method 7

Step 1: Synthesis of (3-(3-(2,6-dimethoxyphenyl)-1-tosyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl)phenyl)(morpholino)methanone

A mixture of (3-(3-iodo-1-tosyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl)phenyl)(morpholino)methanone (40 mg, 0.068 mmol), 2,6-dimethoxyphenylboronic acid (18.6 mg, 0.102 mmol), tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(0) (3.9 mg, 0.0034 mmol) and sodium carbonate (2M aqueous solution, 0.102 mL, 0.204 mmol) in acetonitrile (1 mL) was heated in a Personal microwave at 120Â° C. for 30 minutes. The resulting mixture was diluted with water and extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic layers were combined, dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated to dryness to afford crude (3-(3-(2,6-dimethoxyphenyl)-1-tosyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl)phenyl)(morpholino)methanone, which was used in step 2 without further purification.

Step 2: Synthesis of (3-(3-(2,6-dimethoxyphenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl)phenyl)(morpholino)methanone

Methanol (1 mL) was added to crude (3-(3-(2,6-dimethoxyphenyl)-1-tosyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl)phenyl)(morpholino)methanone from step 1 and potassium hydroxide (50% w/v, 0.038 mL, 0.34 mmol) was added to the resulting solution. The mixture was stirred for 30 minutes at room temperature before being diluted with water and extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic layers were combined, dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated to dryness. Silica gel chromatography afforded (3-(3-(2,6-dimethoxyphenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl)phenyl)(morpholino)methanone (7) (31% yield from (3-(3-iodo-1-tosyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl)phenyl)(morpholino)methanone) as light yellow solids. ¹H NMR (500 MHz, CD₃OD) Î´ 3.65 (m, br, 8H), 3.75 (s, 6H), 6.77 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 2H), 7.31 (t, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 7.39 (m, 1H), 7.46 (s, 1H), 7.55 (t, J=7.5 Hz, 1H), 7.67 (m, 1H), 7.74 (m, 1H), 7.91 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.45 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H). MS: m/z 444.1 (M+H⁺).

Other compounds prepared by Method 7:

TABLE 7Structure

Method 8

Step 1: Synthesis of 1-(5-bromo-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-3-yl)-ethanone

To a stirring solution of aluminum chloride (6.77 g, 50.75 mmol) suspended in anhydrous CH₂Cl₂(100 mL) under N₂was added 5-bromo-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (2.00 g, 10.15 mmol). The reaction solution was stirred for 1 hour at ambient temperature whereupon acetyl chloride (3.61 mL, 50.75 mmol) was added dropwise and the resulting solution was stirred for 5 more hours. The reaction was cooled to 0Â° C. in an ice bath and quenched carefully by addition of MeOH until the solution became clear. The reaction was concentrated under vacuum. H₂O was added and 1 N NaOH was added dropwise until the pH=4. The product was extracted into ethyl acetate and the organic layer was washed with a saturated solution of sodium potassium tartrate to remove any remaining aluminum salts. The organic layer was dried over Na₂SO₄and concentrated under vacuum. The material was redissolved in ethyl acetate and filtered through a bed of silica gel. The filtrate was concentrated to afford the title compound as an orange solid (2.25 g, 93% yield). ¹H NMR (500 MHz, d₆-DMSO) Î´ 12.70 (br s, 1H), 8.56 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 8.55 (s, 1H), 8.40 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 2.46 (s, 3H). MS: m/z 238.9/240.9 (M+H⁺).

Step 2: Synthesis of 1-(5-bromo-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-3-yl)-3-dimethylaminopropenone

To 1-(5-bromo-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-3-yl)-ethanone (2.25 g, 9.41 mmol) was added tert-butoxybis(dimethylamino)methane (5.83 mL, 28.23 mmol) (neat) and refluxed in an oil bath at 100Â° C. for 6.5 hours. The reaction was cooled and titrated with diethyl ether. The solid was filtered and dried under vacuum to afford the title compound as an orange powder (1.93 g, 70% yield). ¹H NMR (500 MHz, d₆-DMSO) Î´ 8.67 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 8.37 (s, 1H), 8.31 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.57 (d, J=12.5 Hz, 1H), 5.78 (d, J=12.0 Hz, 1H), 2.49 (s, 6H).

Step 3: Synthesis of 5-bromo-3-(2H-pyrazol-3-yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine

To a solution of 1-(5-bromo-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-3-yl)-3-dimethylaminopropenone (1.93 g, 6.54 mmol) in ethanol (5 mL) in a microwave vial was added anhydrous hydrazine (247 uL, 7.85 mmol). The reaction mixture was heated in a microwave at 80Â° C. for 2.5 hours. The reaction mixture was concentrated under vacuum to afford the title compound as a reddish brown powder (1.50 g, 87% yield). ¹H NMR (500 MHz, d₆-DMSO) Î´ 12.71 (s, 1H), 11.97 (s, 1H), 8.62 (s, 1H), 8.30 (s, 1H), 7.94 (s, 1H), 7.75 (s, 1H), 6.65 (s, 1H). MS: m/z 263.0 (M+H⁺).

Step 4: Synthesis of 5-bromo-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-3-[2-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-2H-pyrazol-3-yl]-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine

To a solution of 5-bromo-3-(2H-pyrazol-3-yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (1.51 g, 5.75 mmol) in toluene (5 mL) was added tetrabutylammonium hydroxide (40% wt in H₂O, 285 uL) and a 50% KOH (aq) solution (5.7 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred for 20 minutes at ambient temperature and para-toluenesulfonylchloride (2.17 g, 11.50 mmol) was added. The reaction was stirred at ambient temperature for 2.5 hours. The product was extracted into ethyl acetate and the organic layer was washed with H₂O then dried over Na₂SO₄. The material was concentrated under vacuum and adsorbed onto silica gel. Purification by flash chromatography on silica gel with a gradient of ethyl acetate and hexane afforded the title compound as a yellow solid (1.73 g, 53% yield). ¹H NMR (500 MHz, d₆-DMSO) Î´ 8.68 (s, 1H), 8.57 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 8.54 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 8.49 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 7.96 (d, J=9 Hz, 2H), 7.92 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 2H), 7.47 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 2H), 7.41 (d, J=8 Hz, 2H), 7.29 (d, J=3 Hz, 1H), 2.36 (s, 3H), 2.32 (s, 3H). MS: m/z 570.9/571.9 (M+H⁺).

Step 5: Synthesis of 5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-3-[2-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-2H-pyrazol-3-yl]-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine

To a solution of 5-bromo-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-3-[2-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-2H-pyrazol-3-yl]-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (1.73 g, 3.02 mmol) in DMF (7 mL) in a microwave vial was added bis(pinacolato)diboron (1.54 g, 6.04 mmol), [1,1â€²-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene]dichloropalladium (II), complex with dichloromethane (1:1) (86 mg, 0.11 mmol), and sodium acetate (0.74 g, 9.06 mmol). The vial was capped, flushed with N₂, evacuated under vacuum, and heated in a microwave at 140Â° C. for 3600 seconds. The product was extracted into ethyl acetate, washed with H₂O, dried over Na₂SO₄, filtered, and adsorbed onto silica gel. The crude material was purified immediately by flash chromatography using a gradient of ethyl acetate and hexane. The purification afforded the title compound as a white solid (0.72 g, 39% yield). ¹H NMR (500 MHz, CDCl₃) Î´ 8.81 (s, 1H), 8.73 (s, 1H), 8.16 (m, 1H), 8.07 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 2H), 8.04 (m, 2H), 7.038 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 2H), 7.24 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 2H), 6.67 (m, 1H), 2.41 (d, J=6.5 Hz, 3H), 2.36 (d, J=5.5 Hz, 3H), 1.39 (s, 12H). MS: m/z 619.1 (M+H⁺).

Step 6: Synthesis of 5-[3-(2H-pyrazol-3-yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-nicotinamide

To a solution of 5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-3-[2-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-2H-pyrazol-3-yl]-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (56 mg, 0.09 mmol) in a 1:1 acetonitrile/saturated aqueous NaHCO₃solution (2 mL total) in a microwave vial was added 5-bromonicotinamide (20 mg, 0.10 mmol) and [1,1â€²-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene]dichloropalladium (II), complex with dichloromethane (1:1) (3.7 mg, 0.004 mmol). The vial was capped, flushed with N₂, evacuated under vacuum, and heated in a microwave at 90Â° C. for 1800 seconds. The product was extracted into ethyl acetate and the organic layer was dried over Na₂SO₄. The solution was filtered and concentrated under vacuum. The residue was redissolved in a 1:1 MeOH/acetone solution (2 mL total) and treated with 200 uL of 50% KOH (aq) solution and stirred at ambient temperature for 1 hour. Citric acid (1 M) was added dropwise until pH=7 and the product was extracted into ethyl acetate. The organic layer was dried over Na₂SO₄, filtered, and adsorbed onto silica gel. The material was purified by flash chromatography using a gradient of ethyl acetate (containing 10% MeOH) and hexane then concentrated under vacuum. The residue was titrated with diethyl ether to afford the title compound as a beige solid (0.8 mg, 3% yield). ¹H NMR (500 MHz, d₆-DMSO) Î´ 12.67 (s, 1H), 11.87 (s, 1H), 8.95 (s, 1H), 8.62 (s, 1H), 8.50 (s, 1H), 8.25 (s, 1H), 7.89 (s, 1H), 7.63 (s, 1H), 7.41 (d, J=7.5 Hz, 1H), 7.05 (d, J=7.5 Hz, 1H). MS: m/z 305.0 (M+H⁺).

Other compounds prepared by Method 8:

TABLE 8Structure

Method 9

Step 1: Synthesis of (2-amino-5-bromo-phenyl)-cyclopentyl-methanol

To a solution of 2-Amino-5-bromo-pyridine-3-carbaldehyde (632 mg, 3.14 mmol) in anhydrous THF (20 mL) was methylmagnesium bromide 3M in diethyl ether (6.06 mL, 34.8 mmol) is added at âˆ’50Â° C. The reaction mixture was warmed to room temperature and stirred overnight. Saturated aqueous ammonium chloride was added to the mixture (15 mL), the organic layer separated and the aqueous phase extracted with EtOAc (3Ã—20 mL). Organic layers were dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated. The crude residue was purified by flash silica chromatography with a gradient of ethyl acetate in hexanes. (2-Amino-5-bromo-phenyl)-cyclopentyl-methanol (425.9 mg, 50% yield) was obtained as a yellow powder. MS: m/z 271/273 [MH⁺].

Step 2: Synthesis of (2-amino-5-bromo-pyridin-3-yl)-cyclopentyl-methanone

A mixture of (2-Amino-5-bromo-phenyl)-cyclopentyl-methanol (425.9 mg, 1.57 mmol) and manganese(IV) oxide (2.73 g, 31.4 mmol) in dichloroethane (12 mL) was heated at 50Â° C. for 20 hrs. The mixture was filtered over a pad of celite, the filtrate was then evaporated down to give (2-Amino-5-bromo-pyridin-3-yl)-cyclopentyl-methanone (363.2 mg, 86% yield) as a yellow powder. MS: m/z 269/271 [MH⁺].

Step 3: Synthesis of 5-bromo-3-(1-cyclopentyl-2-methoxy-vinyl)-pyridin-2-ylamine

To a suspension of methoxymethyltriphenylphosphonium chloride (2.03 g, 5.92 mmol) in THF (8 mL) cooled to 0Â° C., potassium(bistrimethylsilyl)amide was added (1.26 g, 6.32 mmol). The mixture was stirred at 0Â° C. for 30 minutes, and 2-amino-5-bromo-pyridin-3-yl)-cyclopentyl-methanone (363.2 mg, 1.35 mmol) in 5 mL of THF was added. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. The solution was filtered over a pad of silica gel, the filtrate was then evaporated, and the residue was purified on flash chromatography with a gradient of EtOAc in hexanes to give 5-bromo-3-(1-cyclopentyl-2-methoxy-vinyl)-pyridin-2-ylamine (116.9 mg, 29% yield) as a white solid. MS: m/z 297/299 [MH⁺].

Step 4: Synthesis of 5-bromo-3-cyclopentyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine

A mixture of 5-bromo-3-(1-cyclopentyl-2-methoxy-vinyl)-pyridin-2-ylamine (116.9 mg, 0.39 mmol) and perchloric acid (0.1 mL) in dioxane (1 mL) was heated at 80Â° C. for 2 hrs. Solvents were evaporated and the residue was washed with a solution of 2M sodium carbonate (5 mL). A precipitate was formed and filtered off. It was washed with water and dried to afford the product 5-bromo-3-cyclopentyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (69.8 mg, 67% yield) as a brown solid. MS: m/z 265/266 [MH⁺].

Step 5: Synthesis of 3-(3-cyclopentyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl)-phenol

A mixture of 5-bromo-3-cyclopentyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (31.8 mg, 0.12 mmol), 3-hydroxyphenylboronic acid (33.1 mg, 0.24 mmol) and 4.2 mg (5 mol %) of dichlorobis(triphenylphosphino)palladium(II) were placed in a vial and 0.8 ml of acetonitrile and 0.8 ml of a 2M aqueous solution of sodium carbonate were added and the mixture irradiated in a Personal ChemistryÂ® microwave reactor to 150Â° C. for 900 seconds. The resulting mixture was distributed between 15 mL of a saturated aqueous solution of sodium bicarbonate and 30 mL of dichloromethane. The organic phase was dried over sodium sulfate and evaporated. The crude was purified via silica gel chromatography using a gradient of ethyl acetate in hexanes to give 3-(3-Cyclopentyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl)phenol (4.5 mg, 14% yield) as off white powder. ¹H NMR (500 MHz, CD₃OD) Î´ 8.36 (s, 1H), 8.14 (d, 2 Hz, 1H), 7.29 (t, 8 Hz, 1H), 7.19 (s, 1H), 7.10 (d, 7 Hz, 1H), 7.06 (s, 1H), 6.79 (dd, 2 Hz, 8 Hz, 1H), 2.1 (m, 2H), 1.94 (m, 2H), 1.8 (m, 4H), 1.37 (m, 1H). MS: m/z 279.1 [MH⁺].

Method 10

Step 1: Synthesis of 5-[3-(4,5-dihydro-1H-imidazol-2-yl)-phenyl]-3-(2-methoxyphenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (723-zl-26a) and 2-{3-[3-(2-Methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenyl}-imidazolidin-2-ol

A mixture of the 3-(2-Methoxy-phenyl)-5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (43 mg, 0.085 mmol), 2-(3-Iodophenyl)-4,5-dihydro-1H-imidazole (34.7 mg, 0.128 mmol) and 1,1â€²-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocenepalladium(II)-dichloride dichlormethane adduct (3.1 mg, 4.2 Î¼mol) in 0.8 ml acetonitrile/0.8 ml 2N sodium carbonate irradiated in a Personal Chemistry Optimizer at 135Â° C. for 20 minutes. The crude reaction mixture was distributed between dichloromethane and a saturated aqueous solution of sodium bicarbonate. The aqueous phase was then extracted with dichloromethane and the combined organic phases were dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated. The crude product was then purified by flash silica gel chromatography using a gradient of ethyl acetate in hexanes to afford 5-[3-(4,5-Dihydro-1H-imidazol-2-yl)-phenyl]-3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (11.2 mg, MS: MS: m/z 369.1 [MH⁺]) and 2-{3-[3-(2-Methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenyl}-imidazolidin-2-ol (13.2 mg, m/z 387.1 [MH⁺]), both as green solid.

Method 11

Step 1: Synthesis of 5-[3-(2-Methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-2-morpholin-4-ylmethyl-phenol

A mixture of 3-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenol (14.2 mg, 0.045 mmol), morpholine (5.87 Î¼l, 0.067 mmol) and paraformaldehyde (2.7 mg, 0.09 mmol) in 400 Î¼l of methanol/toluene (3:7) was stirred at 60Â° C. for 1 hour, then 90Â° C. for 3 hours. The resulting light brown residue was purified by flash silica gel chromatography using a gradient of ethyl acetate in hexanes to afford 5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-2-morpholin-4-ylmethyl-phenol (11.7 mg, 63% yield) as white solid. ¹H NMR (500 MHz, CD₃OD) Î´ 8.44 (d, 1.5 Hz, 1H), 8.22 (d, 1.5 Hz, 1H), 7.65 (s, 1H), 7.56 (dd, 1.5 Hz, 7 Hz, 1H), 7.37 (d, 8 Hz, 1H), 7.32 (dt, 2 Hz, 7.8 Hz, 1H), 7.19 (dd, 2 Hz, 8 Hz, 1H), 7.17 (d, 1.5 Hz, 1H), 7.14 (d, 8 Hz, 1H), 7.06 (dt, 1 Hz, 7 Hz, 1H), 4.18 (s, 2H), 3.87 (s, 3H), 3.85 (br s, 4H), 3.09 (br s, 4H). MS: m/z 416.1 [MH⁺].

Other compounds prepared by Method 11:

TABLE 9Structure

Method 12

Step 1: Synthesis of methyl 3-(3-(2-methoxyphenyl)-1-tosyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl)benzimidate

HCl gas was bubbled through a suspension of 3-[3-(2-Methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-benzonitrile (287.8 mg, 0.60 mmol) in 3.5 mL of anhydrous MeOH. The mixture was then stirred for 5 hours at room temperature before ether (20 mL) was added. The precipitate was then collected by filtration and dried to afford methyl 3-(3-(2-methoxyphenyl)-1-tosyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl)benzimidate without further purification.

Step 2: Synthesis of (1-(imino(3-(3-(2-methoxyphenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl)phenyl)methyl)piperidin-4-yl)methanol

The imidate precipitate was then dissolved in MeOH to a total volume of 15.0 mL, it was then divided into 15 equal portions (ca. 0.04 mmol each) for reaction with 15 different amines. To this imidate solution was added the 4-hydroxymethylpiperidine (9.9 mg, 0.086 mmol, 2 eq) and triethylamine (60 Î¼l, 0.43 mmol, 10 eq.), the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 days. At the end of 2 days, NaOH (20 mg, 0.5 mmol) in 100 Î¼l water was added to each reaction mixture to hydrolyze the sulfonamide. The reaction was done 0Â° C. overnight. After removing the solvents, the crude product was purified on reverse phase HPLC to give 5.0 mg of [4-(imino-{3-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenyl}-methyl)-cyclohexyl]-methanol as a white solid. ¹H-NMR (500 MHz, CD₃OD) Î´ 8.54 (d, 2 Hz, 1H), 8.33 (d, 2.5 Hz, 1H), 8.00 (dt, 1.5 Hz, 9 Hz, 1H), 7.91 (br s, 1H), 7.35 (t, 7.8 Hz, 1H), 7.70 (s, 1H), 7.58 (m, 2H), 7.32 (dt, 1 Hz, 8.3 Hz, 1H), 7.12 (dd, 1 Hz, 8 Hz, 1H), 7.07 (dt, 1 Hz, 7.3 Hz, 1H), 3.86 (s, 3H), 3.48 (d, 6.5 Hz, 2H), 3.38 (m, 4H), 1.78 (m, 1H), 1.42 (m, 4H). MS: m/z 441.1 [MH⁺].

Other compounds prepared by Method 12:

TABLE 10Structure

Method 13

Step 1: Synthesis of 3-(2-Methoxy-phenyl)-5-(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine

A mixture of -(2-Methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-5-carbonitrile (24.9 mg, 0.10 mmol), sodium azide (78 mg, 1.2 mmol) and ammonium chloride (64.2 mg, 1.2 mmol) were placed in a vial and 2 ml of DMF were added. The mixture was irradiated in a Personal ChemistryÂ® microwave reactor at 150Â° C. for 900 sec, then 165Â° C. for 600 sec. The mixture was concentrated and purified via flash silica gel chromatography using a gradient of ethyl acetate in hexanes to give 3-(2-Methoxy-phenyl)-5-(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (28 mg, 95% yield) as a pale yellow solid. ¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d6) Î´ 11.95 (brs, 1H), 8.92 (d, 2 Hz, 1H), 8.59 (d, 2 Hz, 1H), 7.99 (br s, 1H), 7.74 (s, 1H), 7/59 (dd, 1.5 Hz, 7.5 Hz, 1H), 7.33 (t, 7.8 Hz, 1H), 7.16 (d, 8 Hz, 1H), 7.10 (t, 7.5 Hz, 1H), 3.84 (s, 3H). MS: m/z 293.1 [MH⁺].

Method 14

Step 1: Synthesis of [3-(2-Methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-(3,4,5-trimethoxy-phenyl)-methanol

A solution 1.5M n-BuLi in hexanes (160 Î¼L, 0.24 mmol) was added to a solution of the 5-bromo-3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (91.5 mg, 0.20 mmol) in 2 ml THF at âˆ’78Â° C. The mixture was stirred at âˆ’78Â° C. for 30 minutes before 3,4,5-trimethoxy-benzaldehyde (94.2 mg, 0.48 mmol) in 3 mL of THF was added. The mixture was stirred at âˆ’78Â° C. for 1 hour and then at 0Â° C. for 30 minutes, quenched with MeOH, and then concentrated. The crude residue was purified by silica gel chromatography using a gradient of ethyl acetate in hexanes to give [3-(2-Methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-(3,4,5-trimethoxy-phenyl)-methanol (32 mg, 38% yield) as a white solid. MS: m/z 420.1 [MH⁺].

Other compounds prepared by Method 14:

TABLE 11Structure

Method 15

Step 1: Synthesis of [2-(4-{5-[3-(2-Methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-pyridin-3-yl}-piperazin-1-yl)-ethyl]-dimethyl-amine

To a solution of 5-[3-(2-Methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-pyridine-3-carbaldehyde (24 mg, 0.050 mmol) and dimethyl-(2-piperazin-1-yl-ethyl)-amine (10 Î¼L, 0.065 mmol) in 1.5 ml dichloroethane was added 3 Î¼L of AcOH. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 30 minutes before sodium trioxyacetylborohydride (22 mg, 0.10 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for another 2 hours before being concentrated. The resulting residue was then dissolved in 2 ml of MeOH, to this was added 100 Î¼L of 5N NaOH, the mixture was stirred at 60Â° C. for 2 hours. Solvents were removed and the residue was purified by flash silica gel chromatography using ethyl acetate and then a solvent mixture (NH₄OH/MeOH/CH₂Cl₂/EtOAc=0.05/1/4/4) to afford [2-(4-{5-[3-(2-Methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-pyridin-3-yl}-piperazin-1-yl)-ethyl]-dimethyl-amine (4.70 mg, 20% yield) as a white solid. MS: m/z 471 [MH⁺].

Other compounds prepared by Method 15:

TABLE 12Structure

Method 16

Step 1: Synthesis of 5-[3-(2-Methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-2-methyl-1H-benzoimidazole

Intermediate Synthesis of 5-Bromo-2-isopropyl-1H-benzoimidazole

A mixture of 4-bromo-benzene-1,2-diamine di-HCl salts (1 g, 3.8 mmol) and isobutylaldehyde (0.71 mL, 7.7 mmol) in 10 mL of water was stirred at 100Â° C. for 15 hours. Solvents were removed to afford the crude 5-bromo-2-isopropyl-1H-benzoimidazole as a dark brown solid, which was used directly without further purification. MS: m/e 239.0/241.0 [MH⁺].

Synthesis of 5-Bromo-2-methyl-1H-benzoimidazole

A mixture of 4-bromo-benzene-1,2-diamine di-HCl salts (2 g, 3.8 mmol) and acetic acid (0.87 mL, 15.2 mmol) in 10 mL of water was heated at 100Â° C. for 15 hrs. Solvents were removed, the crude 5-bromo-2-methyl-1H-benzoimidazole was obtained as a dark brown solid, which was used directly without further purification. MS: m/e 239.0/241.0 [MH⁺].

Other compounds prepared by Method 16:

TABLE 13Structure a) Purification on silica gelwith a gradient of methanol/dichloromethaneb) Dichlorobis (triphenylphosphino)palladium (II) as catalyst

Method 17

Step 1: Synthesis of N-(5-bromo-3-iodo-pyridin-2-yl)-acetamide

To a solution of 2-amino-5-bromopyridine (12.7 g, 73.4 mmol) in DMF (150 ml) was added iodine (14.9 g, 58.7 mmol) and sodium periodate (6.3 g, 29.4 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at 90Â° C. for 20 hours, then diluted with water and extracted with ethyl acetate. The combined organic extracts were washed twice with a 1 M aqueous solution of sodium thiosulfate, dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate, and filtered over a pad of silica gel. Solvent was evaporated to give 16.5 g of a brown solid. The solid was dissolved in THF (150 ml) and cooled to 0Â° C. Pyridine (6.7 ml, 71.7 mmol) was added, followed by dropwise addition of acetyl chloride (5.1 ml, 71.7 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 20 hours then at 60Â° C. for 4 hours. Solvent was evaporated and the residue was partitioned between water (200 ml) and dichloromethane (250 ml). The aqueous layer was extracted three times with dichloromethane and the combined organic layers were dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate and filtered off. Purification by flash chromotography on silica gel with a gradient of ethyl acetate/hexanes afforded the title compound as an orange solid (7.76 g, 41% yield). ¹H NMR (DMSO-d₆): Î´ 10.17 (s, 1H), 8.55 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.54 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 2.01 (s, 3H); HPLC/MS m/z: 340.8, 342.8 [MH]⁺. Diacetylated material was also isolated as a light orange solid (7.0 g, 33% yield). ¹H NMR (DMSO-d₆): Î´ 8.78 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 8.74 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 2.17 (s, 6H); HPLC/MS m/z: 402.8, 404.8 [MNa]⁺.

The diacetylated material (7 g, 18.27 mmol) was dissolved in dichloromethane (180 ml) and treated with PS-trisamine (26 g, 3.53 mmol/g loading, Argonaut Technologies) for 17 hours. The resin was filtered off, washed with, dichloromethane and the solvent was evaporated to give 5.95 g of the title compound, contaminated with 10% of 2-amino-3-iodo-5-bromopyridine.

Step 2: Synthesis of N-(5-bromo-3-trimethylsilanylethynyl-pyridin-2-yl)-acetamide

To a suspension of N-(5-bromo-3-iodo-pyridin-2-yl)-acetamide (6.42 g, 18.83 mmol) in dichloromethane (90 ml) was added triethyl amine (3.15 ml, 22.6 mmol), then the mixture was cooled to 0Â° C. and dichlorobis(triphenylphosphino)palladium (II) (66 mg, 0.094 mmol) and copper(I) iodide (36 mg, 0.188 mmol) were added sequentially. Finally trimethylsilylacetylene (2.93 ml, 20.71 mmol) was added dropwise, and the ice bath was removed. After stirring at room temperature for 17 hours, the crude mixture was directly adsorbed on silica gel. Purification by flash chromatography on silica gel with a gradient of ethyl acetate/hexane afforded the title compound as light yellow solid (4.75 g, 81% yield). ¹H NMR (DMSO-d₆): Î´ 9.99 (s, 1H), 8.31 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 7.95 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 1.82 (s, 3H), 0.00 (s, 9H); HPLC/MS m/z: 311, 313 [MH]⁺.

Step 3: Synthesis of 5-bromo-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine

To a solution of N-(5-bromo-3-trimethylsilanylethynyl-pyridin-2-yl)-acetamide (4.75 g, 15.26 mmol) in THF (90 ml) was added dropwise a 1 M solution of tetra-n-butyl ammonium fluoride in THF (30.5 ml, 30.5 mmol). After stirring at reflux for 15 hours, the reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo and water was added. The aqueous layer was extracted three times with dichloromethane with, and the combined extracts were directly adsorbed on silica gel. Purification by flash chromotography on silica gel with a gradient of ethyl acetate/hexanes afforded 2.29 g of a beige solid. Recrystallization from ethyl acetate/hexanes provided the title compound as light beige flakes (1.33 g). Further purification of the filtrate on silica gel with a gradient of ethyl acetate/hexanes afforded more of the title compound as a crystalline powder (675 mg) for a combined yield of 2.01 g; 67%. ¹H NMR (DMSO-d₆): Î´ 11.89 (s, 1H), 8.24 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.17 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 7.53 (t, J=3.0 Hz, 1H), 6.42 (dd, J=1.0, 3.0 Hz, 1H); HPLC/MS m/z: 197 [MH]⁺.

Step 4: Synthesis of 5-bromo-3-iodo-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine

To a solution of 5-bromo-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (300 mg, 1.52 mmol) in acetone (10 ml) was added N-iodosuccinimide (377 mg, 1.67 mmol) in one portion. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 45 minutes. The resulting precipitate was filtered off, washed with a minimal amount of acetone, and dried in vacuo to give the title compound as a cream-colored solid (329 mg, 67% yield). ¹H NMR (DMSO-d₆): Î´ 12.36 (s, 1H), 8.30 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.85 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.80 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H); HPLC/MS m/z: 323.

Method 18

Step 1: Synthesis of 4-[3-(2-ethyl-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-2-(4-hydroxymethyl-piperidin-1-ylmethyl)-phenol

59.8 mg (0.19 mmol) of 4-[3-(2-ethyl-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenol was dissolved in a mixture of 0.6 ml of methanol and 2.4 ml of toluene. 11.4 mg (0.38 mmol) of paraformaldehyde and 32.3 mg (0.28 mmol) of 4-piperidinemethanol were added and the mixture heated to 90Â° C. for 20 hours.

The mixture was distributed between ethyl acetate and a saturated aqueous solution of ammonium chloride. The aqueous layer was extracted three times with ethyl acetate and the combine organic layers were washed with brine, dried over sodium sulfate and evaporated. The crude was purified by mass-triggered reverse-phase HPLC to afford 2 mg (4 Î¼mol, 2% yield) of 4-[3-(2-ethyl-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-2-(4-hydroxymethyl-piperidin-1-ylmethyl)-phenol as a beige solid. ¹H-NMR (d₄-methanol) Î´: 8.50 (m, 1H), 8.45 (s, 1H), 7.90 (d, J=2 Hz, 1H), 7.52 (m, 2H), 7.41 (s, 1H), 7.38 (d, J=7.3 Hz, 1H), 7.32-7.34 (m, 2H), 7.26 (t, J=7.3 Hz, 1H), 6.96 (d, J=8.8 Hz, 1H), 4.17 (s, 2H), 3.44 (d, J=5.9 Hz, 2H), 3.38 (d, J=12.2 Hz, 2H), 2.80 (t, J=11.2 Hz, 2H), 2.68 (q, J=7.3 Hz, 2H), 1.91 (d, J=13.2 Hz, 2H), 1.46 (m, 2H), 1.08 (t, J=7.8 Hz, 3H). MS: m/z 442 [MH⁺].

Method 19

Synthesis of 4-[3-(2-ethyl-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-pyridin-2-ol

26 mg (82 Î¼mol) of 3-(2-ethyl-phenyl)-5-(2-fluoro-pyridin-4-yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine was dissolved in a mixture of 3 ml of 1,4-dioxane, 1.5 Ll of water, and 0.5 mL of concentrated aqueous hydrochloric acid. The solution was stirred at room temperature for 16 hours and then at 100Â° C. for 3 hours.

Upon cooling the mixture was distributed between ethyl acetate and a saturated aqueous solution of sodium bicarbonate. The aqueous layer was extracted twice with ethyl acetate and the combined organic phases were subsequently washed with brine, dried over sodium sulfate and evaporated to afford 25 mg (79 Î¼mol, 96% yield) of 4-[3-(2-ethylphenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-pyridin-2-ol. ¹H-NMR (d₄-methanol) Î´: 8.52 (s, 1H), 7.97 (d, J=2 Hz, 1H), 7.44 (d, J=6.3 Hz, 1H), 7.40 (m, 1H), 7.32 (d, J=7.8 Hz, 1H), 7.25-7.28 (m, 2H), 7.18-7.22 (m, 1H), 6.69-6.71 (m, 2H), 2.59-2.63 (m, 2H), 1.02 (m, 3H). MS: m/z 316 [MH⁺].

TABLE 14Structure30% HBr was used instead of conc. HCl.

Method 20

Step 1: Synthesis of toluene-4-sulfonic acid 4-[5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-3-yl]-phenyl Ester

2.82 g (9.75 mmol) of 4-(5-bromo-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-3-yl)-phenol and 3.10 g of para-toluenesulfonyl chloride were dispersed in 400 ml of toluene at 45Â° C. 45 ml of 50% aqueous solution of KOH and 1.5 ml of 40% aqueous solution of tetra-n-butylammonium hydroxide were added and the resulting mixture stirred vigorously at ambient temperature for 6 h. The resulting mixture was diluted with 100 ml of a saturated aqueous solution of sodium bromide, the phases separated and the aqueous layer extracted three times with toluene. The combined organic phases were washed with a 2 M aqueous solution of sodium hydroxide, dried over sodium sulfate and evaporated. The crude was crystallized from ethanol containing 10% v/v of toluene to afford 3.22 g (5.29 mmol, 55% yield) of toluene-4-sulfonic acid 4-[5-bromo-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-3-yl]-phenyl ester as ivory crystalline needles.

1.50 g (2.51 mmol) of this material, 1.30 mg of bis(pinacolato)diboron, 680 mg of anhydrous sodium acetate, and 100 mg of [1,1â€²-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene]-palladium(II)-dichloride dichloromethane adduct were placed in SmithÂ® vial and the vial was flushed with nitrogen. 15 ml of anhydrous DMF was added and the mixture irradiated in a Personal Chemistry microwave reactor to 130Â° C. for 1 h. The mixture was then evaporated at 65Â° C. under reduced pressure and the resulting residue distributed between ether and saturated aqueous sodium bromide solution. The aqueous layer was extracted three times with ether, the organic phases combined, dried over sodium sulfate and filtered over celite. The filtrate was evaporated and dried in vacuum.

The residue was re-dissolved in 150 ml of ether and the resulting suspension washed three times with 80 ml of a saturated aqueous sodium bromide solution, dried over sodium sulfate and evaporated. The residue was stirred with 200 ml of hexanes until a beige suspension was obtained. The insoluble residue was filtered off and dried in vacuo to afford 1.00 g (1.55 mmol, 62%) of toluene-4-sulfonic acid 4-[5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-3-yl]-phenyl ester as a beige powder. ¹H-NMR (d₄-methanol): Î´9.19 (d, J=1.4 Hz, 1H), 8.95 (d, J=1.5 Hz, 1H), 8.57 (d, J=8.3 Hz, 2H), 8.57 (s, 1H), 8.26 (d, J=8.3 Hz, 2H), 8.16 (d, J=8.3 Hz, 2H), 7.96 (d, J=7.8 Hz, 2H), 7.88 (d, J=8.3 Hz, 2H), 7.64 (d, J=8.7 Hz, 2H), 2.99 (s, 3H), 2.89 (s, 3H), 1.89 (s, 12H).

Step 2: Synthesis of 4-[5-(1-methyl-1H-imidazol-2-yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-3-yl]-phenol

50 mg (80 Î¼mol) of toluene-4-sulfonic acid 4-[5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-3-yl]-phenyl ester and 7 mg of [1,1â€²-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene]palladium(II)-dichloride dichloromethane adduct were placed in a SmithÂ® vial. 1 ml of acetonitrile, 1 ml of a 2 M aqueous solution of sodium carbonate and 16 Î¼l of 2-bromo-1-methyl-1H-imidazole were added and the resulting mixture was irradiated in a Personal Chemistry microwave reactor to 165Â° C. for 20 min. The resulting mixture was diluted with 2 ml of DMSO and 1 ml of methanol and subsequently filtered over sodium sulfate and a 0.45 Î¼m PTFE syringe filter. The filtrate is directly purified via mass-triggered reverse phase HPLC to afford 12 mg (41 Î¼mol, 52% yield) of 4-[5-(1-methyl-1H-imidazol-2-yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-3-yl]phenol as a colorless solid. ¹H-NMR (d₆-DMSO): Î´ 11.97 (s, 1H), 9.40 (s, 1H), 8.53 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.40 (d, J=1.4 Hz, 1H), 8.14 (s, 1H), 7.77 (d, J=2.4 Hz, 1H), 7.54 (d, J=8.3 Hz, 2H), 7.30 (s, 1H), 7.02 (s, 1H), 6.86 (d, J=8.7 Hz, 2H), 3.78 (s, 3H); MS: m/z 291 [MH⁺].

Other compounds prepared by Method 20:

TABLE 15Structure

Method 21

Step 1: Synthesis of 5-bromo-3-iodo-1-triisopropylsilanyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine

2.30 g (11.67 mmol) of 5-bromo-3-iodo-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine was dissolved in 90 ml of anhydrous THF under nitrogen. An excess of sodium hydride was added at room temperature and subsequently 3 ml of tri-iso-propylsilyl chloride were added. The reaction mixture was allowed to stir at ambient temperature for 4 h.

The mixture was distributed between ethyl acetate and a saturated aqueous solution of ammonium chloride. The aqueous phase was extracted three times with ethyl acetate and the organic phases were combined, washed with brine, dried over sodium sulfate and evaporated. The crude material was purified by flash chromatography on silica gel using a gradient of ethyl acetate in hexanes to afford 3.493 g (7.235 mmol, 62% yield) of -bromo-3-iodo-1-triisopropylsilanyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine as a crystalline solid. ¹H-NMR (d₆-DMSO): Î´8.34 (d, J=1.9 Hz, 1H), 7.88 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.72 (s, 1H), 1.86 (m, 3H), 1.05 (d, J=7.8 Hz, 18H).

Step 2: Synthesis of 5-bromo-3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-triisopropylsilanyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine

1.01 g (2.10 mmol) of 5-bromo-3-iodo-1-triisopropylsilanyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine, 336 mg of 2-methoxyphenylboronic acid, and 75 mg of (1,1â€²-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene)palladium(II)-dichloride dichloromethane adduct were placed in a SmithÂ® vial and dissolved in a mixture of 15 ml of acetonitrile, 5 ml of toluene, and 7 ml of a saturated aqueous solution of sodium bicarbonate. The mixture was heated to 65Â° C. for 4 h and then cooled to room temperature. The crude was distributed between dichloromethane and water and the organic phase was dried over sodium sulfate and evaporated. The crude was then purified by flash chromatography on silica gel using a gradient of ethyl acetate in hexanes to afford 708 mg (1.53 mmol, 73%) of 5-bromo-3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-triisopropylsilanyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine as a yellow oil (containing about 20% of residual starting material as an inseparable mixture). ¹H-NMR (d₆-DMSO): Î´ 8.33 (d, J=2.4 Hz, 1H), 8.15 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.76 (s, 1H), 7.55 (dd, J=1.3 Hz, 7.3 Hz, 1H), 7.33 (ddd, J=1.9 Hz, 7.3 Hz, 1H), 7.15 (dd, J=1.0 Hz, 8.3 Hz 1H), 7.06 (dt, J=1.0 Hz, 7.3 Hz, 1H), 3.82 (s, 3H), 1.88 (m, 3H), 1.10 (d, 18H).

Step 3: Synthesis of [3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-5-yl]-methylphenyl-amine

30 mg of sodium-tert-butoxide and 12 mg of bis(tert-butylphosphino)palladium(0) were placed in a SmithÂ® vial and the vial flushed with nitrogen. 100 mg (0.22 mmol) of 5-bromo-3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-triisopropylsilanyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine in 1 ml of anhydrous 1,4-dioxane and 35 Î¼l of N-methylaniline were added and the resulting mixture heated to 130Â° C. for 15 h. The reaction mixture was then cooled to ambient temperature and 0.4 ml of a 1 M solution of tetra-n-butylammonium fluoride in THF added. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 h. 2 ml of methanol and amberlyst strongly acidic ion exchange resin loaded with sodium was added. After shaking at room temperature for 2 h the crude material is directly adsorbed onto silica gel and purified by flash chromatography on silica gel using a gradient of ethyl acetate in hexanes to afford 42 mg (0.14 mmol; 64% yield) of [3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-5-yl]-methyl-phenyl-amine as a brown residue. ¹H-NMR (d₆-DMSO): Î´11.88 (s, 1H), 8.11 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 7.75 (d, J=2.4 Hz, 1H), 7.70 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 7.48 (dd, J=1.5 Hz, 7.3 Hz, 1H), 7.26 (ddd, J=1.5 Hz, 8.3 Hz, 1H), 7.16 (t, J=7.9 Hz, 2H), 7.08 (d, J=8.3 Hz, 1H), 7.00 (t(d), J=0.9 Hz, 8.3 Hz, 1H), 6.72-6.68 (m, 3H), 3.76 (s, 3H), 3.29 (s, 3H); MS: m/z 330 [MH⁺].

Other examples prepared by Method 21:

TABLE 16Structure

Method 22

Step 1: Synthesis of 5-bromo-1-(2-methoxy-ethoxymethyl)-3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine

Under nitrogen 755 mg (2.49 mmol) of 5-bromo-3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine was dissolved in 30 ml of anhydrous THF. 200 mg of sodium hydride were added and the resulting mixture was stirred at ambient temperature for 4 h. 0.5 ml of (2-methoxy-ethoxy)methyl chloride was added and the resulting mixture stirred at room temperature for 72 h. 0.75 ml of (2-methoxy-ethoxy)methyl chloride and an excess of sodium hydride were added and the reaction mixture allowed to stir at ambient temperature for am additional 4 h. 250 mg of tetra-n-butylammonium iodide were added and the reaction mixture stirred for 2 h at room temperature. The reaction was then quenched by addition of methanol and distributed between a saturated aqueous solution of ammonium chloride and dichloromethane. The aqueous phase was extracted with pyridinepethane and the combined organic phases dried over sodium sulfate and evaporated. The crude was then purified by chromatography on silica gel using a gradient of ethyl acetate in hexanes to afford 922 mg (2.36 mmol, 95% yield) of 5-bromo-1-(2-methoxy-ethoxymethyl)-3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine as a yellow oil. ¹H-NMR (d₆-DMSO): Î´8.40 (d, J=1.9 Hz, 1H), 8.17 (d, J=1.9 Hz, 1H), 7.97 (s, 1H), 7.52 (dd, J=1.3 Hz, 7.3 Hz, 1H), 7.34 (dd, J=1.4 Hz, 8.7 Hz, 1H), 7.15 (d, J=8.2 Hz 1H), 7.06 (t, J=7.3 Hz, 1H), 5.71 (s, 2H), 3.83 (s, 3H), 3.57 (m, 2H), 3.41 (m, 2H), 3.20 (s, 3H); MS: m/z 315, 317 [MH⁺-MeOC₂H₄O].

Step 2: Synthesis of 1-(2-methoxy-ethoxymethyl)-3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-5-morpholin-4-yl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine

180 mg (0.5 mmol) of 5-bromo-1-(2-methoxy-ethoxymethyl)-3-(2-methoxyphenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine, 10 mg of bis(benzonitrile)palladium(II)-chloride, 11 mg of 2,5-bis-(2,6-di-iso-propylphenyl)imidazolium chloride, and 65 mg of potassium-tert-butoxide were placed in a SmithÂ® vial. The vial was flushed with nitrogen and 3 ml of anhydrous 1,4-dioxane and 70 Î¼l of morpholine were added. The resulting mixture was heated to 120Â° C. for 14 h. The mixture was cooled to room temperature, adsorbed onto silica gel, and purified by flash chromatography on silica gel using a gradient of ethyl acetate in hexanes to afford 65 mg (0.17 mmol, 33% yield) of 1-(2-methoxy-ethoxymethyl)-3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-5-morpholin-4-yl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine as a colorless oil. ¹H-NMR (CDCl₃): Î´8.17 (d, J=2.8 Hz, 1H), 7.63 (s, 1H), 7.59 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 7.54 (dd, J=1.6 Hz, 7.4 Hz, 1H), 7.31 (ddd, J=1.6 Hz, 7.4 Hz, 9 Hz, 1H), 7.07 (ddd, J=1.1 Hz, 7.4 Hz, 7.4 Hz, 1H), 7.03 (d(m), J=8.3 Hz, 1H), 5.71 (s, 2H), 3.87 (s, 3H), 3.68 (m, 2H), 3.49 (m, 2H), 3.35 (s, 3H); MS: m/z 398 [MH⁺].

Step 3: Synthesis of 3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-5-morpholin-4-yl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine

65 mg (0.17 mmol) of 1-(2-methoxy-ethoxymethyl)-3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-5-morpholin-4-yl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine was dissolved in a mixture of 3 ml of ethanol and 2 ml of water. 500 Î¼l of formic acid was added and the mixture heated to 65Â° C. for 16 h and then irradiated in the microwave to 150Â° C. for 40 min. The resulting mixture was neutralized by addition of sodium bicarbonate and water and the crude distributed between ethyl acetate and brine. The aqueous phase was extracted twice with ethyl acetate. The combined organic phases were dried over sodium sulfate and evaporated to afford 47 mg (0.15 mmol, 94% yield) of 3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-5-morpholin-4-yl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine. ¹H-NMR (d₆-DMSO): Î´11.58 (s, 1H), 8.11 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 7.59 (d, J=2.4 Hz, 1H), 7.51 (dd, J=1.4 Hz, 7.3 Hz, 1H), 7.46 (s, 1H), 7.27 (ddd, J=1.5 Hz, 8.8 Hz, 1H), 7.11 (d, J=8.3 Hz, 1H), 7.02 (dd(d), J=1.5 Hz, 7.3 Hz, 1H), 3.82 (s, 3H), 3.77 (m, 4H), 3.07 (m, 4H); MS: m/z 310 [MH⁺].

Method 23

Step 1: Synthesis of 5-iodo-3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine

337.3 mg (0.74 mmol) of 5-bromo-3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine, 11.3 mg (59 Î¼mol) of copper(I)-iodide, and 185 mg (1.24 mmol) of sodium iodide were placed in a SmithÂ® vial and the vial flushed with nitrogen. 6 ml of anhydrous toluene and 14 Î¼l (0.13 mmol) of N,Nâ€²-dimethylethylenediamine were added and the resulting suspension was heated to 120Â° C. for 16 h.

The mixture was cooled to room temperature and distributed between ethyl acetate and water. The aqueous layer was extracted three times with ethyl acetate. The combined organic phases were washed with brine, dried over sodium sulfate and evaporated. The crude was purified by flash chromatography on silica gel using a gradient of ethyl acetate in hexanes to afford 261 mg (0.52 mmol, 70% yield) of 5-iodo-3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine as a colorless solid.

Step 2: Synthesis of 3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-5-pyrrol-1-yl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine

40 mg (79 Î¼mol) of 5-iodo-3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine, 30 mg (0.14 mmol) of anhydrous potassium phosphate and 1.2 mg (6 Î¼mol) of copper(I)-iodide were placed in a SmithÂ® vial. The vial was flushed with nitrogen and 1 ml of anhydrous toluene, 6.7 Î¼l (95 Î¼mol) of pyrrole, and 2 Î¼l (10 Î¼mol) of rac-trans-N,Nâ€²-dimethyl-1,2-cyclohexanediamine were added. The resulting suspension was heated to 120Â° C. for 22 h. 1.2 mg (6 Î¼mol) of copper(I)-iodide and 2 Î¼l (10 Î¼mol) of rac-trans-N,Nâ€²dimethyl-1,2-cyclohexanediamine were added and the reaction mixture heated for another 20 h.

The resulting mixture was distributed between water and ethyl acetate, the phases separated, and the aqueous layer extracted three times with ethyl acetate. The combined organic phases were washed with brine, dried over sodium sulfate and evaporated. The crude material was purified by flash chromatography on silica gel using a gradient of ethyl acetate in hexanes to afford 27.9 mg (63 Î¼mol, 80% yield) of 3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-5-pyrrol-1-yl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine as a beige solid.

The material was dissolved in ethanol and 400 Î¼l of 50% aqueous potassium hydroxide solution added. The solution was heated in a Personal Chemistry OptimizerÂ® microwave reactor to 165Â° C. for 20 min. The crude was distributed between water and ethyl acetate, the phases separated, and the aqueous layer extracted three times with ethyl acetate. The combined organic phases were washed with brine, dried over sodium sulfate and evaporated to afford 20 mg (70 Î¼mol, 87% yield) of 3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-5-pyrrol-1-yl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine as a beige solid. ¹H-NMR (d₆-CDCl₃): (10.48 (s) [1H], 8.49 (s) [1H], 8.09 (d) [1H], 7.73 (s) [1H], 7.56 (d) [1H], 7.34 (t) [1H], 7.05-7.10 (m) [4H], 7.40 (d) [2H], 3.81 (s) [3H]. MS: m/z 290 (88%) [MH⁺].

Method 24

Step 1: Synthesis of 2-(5-bromo-1-tosyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-3-yl)thiazole

A mixture of 5-bromo-3-iodo-1-tosyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (1.66 g, 3.48 mmol), 2-tributylstannanyl-thiozole (1.3 g, 1.21 mL, 3.48 mmol) and tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (0) (116 mg, 0.1 mmol) in anhydrous dioxane was stirred under reflux conditions under nitrogen atmosphere for 3 days. The reaction mixture was cooled to room temperature, treated with activated carbon and filtered over Celite. The filtrate was concentrated, purified by silica gel chromatography and recrystallized in ethyl acetate to afford a mixture of 2-(5-bromo-1-tosyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-3-yl)thiazole (1.11 g, 73% yield). MS: m/z 434/436 (M+H⁺).

Step 2: Synthesis of 2-(5-(pyridine-3-yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-3-yl)thiazole

A mixture of 2-(5-bromo-1-tosyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-3-yl)thiazole (75 mg, 0.17 mmol), pyridine-3-ylboronic acid (27 mg, 0.22 mmol) 1,1â€²-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocenepalladium(II)-dichloride dichloromethane adduct (6.9 mg, 0.009 mmol), acetonitrile (1 mL) and saturated aqueous NaHCO₃(1 mL) were stirred in a sealed microwave tube at 140Â° C. for 30 minutes. The mixture was then cooled to room temperature, diluted with ethyl acetate, washed with brine and concentrated to dryness. Silica gel chromatography afforded 2-(5-(pyridine-3-yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-3-yl)thiazole (36 mg, 76% yield) as a white solid. ¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d6) Î´ 7.47 (m, 1H), 7.56 (d, J=3.5 Hz, 1H), 7.81 (d, J=3.5 Hz, 1H), 8.10 (m, 1H), 8.24 (s, 1H), 8.55 (dd, J=2.0, 5.0 Hz, 1H), 8.61 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.89 (m, 1H), 12.37 (s, 1H). MS: m/z 279.0 (M+H⁺)

Other compounds prepared by method 24:

TABLE 17Structure

Method 25

Step 1: Synthesis of 5-(3,5-dimethyl-isoxazol-4-yl)-3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine

To 5-bromo-3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (40 mg, 0.087 mmol), 3,5-dimethyl-isoxazole-4-boronic acid (16 mg, 0.114 mmol) and [1,1â€²-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene]dichloropalladium (II), complex with dichloromethane (1:1) (4 mg, 0.0044 mmol) in a Smith process vial was added 0.6 mL of a 1:1 mixture of acetonitrile, and a 2 M solution of sodium carbonate in water. The reaction was run in a Personal ChemistryÂ® microwave reactor at 165Â° C. for 1200 s. The reaction mixture was diluted with 1:1 methanol/dichloromethane, filtered, and the filtrate was adsorbed on silica gel. Purification on silica gel with a gradient of MeOH/CH2Cl2 afforded 5-(3,5-dimethylisoxazol-4-yl)-3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine as beige crystals (20 mg, 71% yield). ¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d6) Î´ 2.23 (s, 3H), 2.41 (s, 3H), 3.81 (s, 3H), 7.01 (dt, J=1.0, 7.0 Hz, 1H), 7.11 (dd, J=1.0, 8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.28 (dt, J=1.5, 7.0 Hz, 1H), 7.51 (dd, J=2.0, 8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.73 (d, J=3.0 Hz, 1H), 7.90 (d, J=1.5 Hz, 1H), 8.22 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 11.9 (s, 1H). MS: m/z 320 (M+H⁺).

Other compounds prepared by method 25:

TABLE 18Structure a) Dichlorobis (triphenylphosphino)palladium (II) as catalystb) Obtained from 1-(5-bromo-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-3-yl)-ethanone

Method 26

Step 1: Synthesis of 3-(3-furan-3-yl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-5-yl)-phenol

To toluene-4-sulfonic acid 3-[3-iodo-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-5-yl]-phenyl ester (50 mg, 0.077 mmol, prepared method 6), furan-3-boronic acid (11 mg, 0.1 mmol) and dichlorobis (triphenylphosphino)palladium (ii) (3 mg, 0.0046 mmol) in a Smith process vial was added 0.6 mL of a 1:1 mixture of acetonitrile, and a 2 M solution of sodium carbonate in water. The reaction was run in a Personal ChemistryÂ® microwave reactor at 165Â° C. for 1200 s. The mixture was diluted with DMF (ca. 5 mL) and filtered with a syringe filter (0.45 micron). The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo and redissolved in DMSO. Purification by reverse phase chromatography using a gradient of H₂O and acetonitrile (with 0.1% formic acid as a modifier) afforded 3-(3-furan-3-yl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-5-yl)-phenol as an off-white solid (6 mg, 56% yield). ¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d6) Î´ 6.70 (dd, J=2.5, 8.0 Hz, 1H), 6.92 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.07 (t, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.13 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.21 (t, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.67 (t, J=1.5 Hz, 1H), 7.77 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 8.25 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.27 (s, 1H), 8.41 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 9.5 (broad s, 1H), 11.8 (s, 1H). MS: m/z 277 (M+H⁺).

Other compounds prepared by Method 26:

TABLE 19Structure a) 10 wt % Pd/C as catalystb) [1,1â€²-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene]dichloropalladium (II), complex with dichloromethane (1:1) as catalystc) Purification on silica gel with a gradient of methanol/dichloromethane

Method 27

Step 1: Synthesis of 3-[3-(3-fluoro-4-hydroxyphenyl)-3-yl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-5-yl)-phenol

To toluene-4-sulfonic acid 3-[3-iodo-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-5-yl]-phenyl ester (50 mg, 0.077 mmol), 3-fluoro-4-benzyloxyphenyl boronic acid (24 mg, 0.1 mmol) and [1,1â€²-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene]dichloropalladium (II), complex with dichloromethane (1:1) (3 mg, 0.0046 mmol) in a Smith process vial was added 0.6 mL of a 1:1 mixture of acetonitrile, and a 2 M solution of sodium carbonate in water. The reaction was run in a Personal ChemistryÂ® microwave reactor at 165Â° C. for 1200 s. Water was added, followed by a saturated aqueous solution of NH₄Cl to pH 6. Aqueous layer was extracted with EtOAc three times. The crude organics were concentrated and dissolved in 4 mL of (1:1) EtOH/aqueous KOH (50% wt). The mixture was stirred at 100Â° C. for 21 h, then diluted with water and acidified to pH 4 with aqueous 1N HCl. The resulting precipitate was filtered, washed with water, and dried in vacuum. The grey solid was suspended in 1N aqueous HCl (2 mL) and stirred at reflux for 17 h. 1 N Aqueous NaOH was added to pH 4, the mixture was concentrated in vacuo and diluted with MeOH. Salts were filtered, and the filtrate was adsorbed on silica gel. Purification on silica gel with a gradient of methanol/dichloromethane afforded 3-[3-(3-fluoro-4-hydroxyphenyl)-3-yl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-5-yl)-phenol as a yellow solid (5 mg, 20% yield). ¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d6) Î´ 6.75 (dd, J=2.5, 7.5 Hz, 1H), 7.03 (dd, J=9.0, 10.0 Hz, 1H), 7.09 (t, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.16 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.27 (t, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.41 (dd, J=1.5, 8.5 Hz, 1H), 7.51 (dd, J=1.5, 13.0 Hz, 1H), 7.82 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.30 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.47 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 9.54 (s, 1H), 9.80 (broad s, 1H), 11.9 (s, 1H). MS: m/e 321 (M+H⁺).

Method 28

Step 1: Synthesis of 1-{2-hydroxy-3-[5-(3-hydroxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-3-yl]-4-methoxy-phenyl}-ethanone

To 3-[3-(2,6-dimethoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-5-yl]-phenol (12 mg, 0.0346 mmol) was added 0.5 mL of 33 wt % bromine in AcOH. The mixture was stirred at 70Â° C. for 6 h, then it was treated with 1.2 mL 50 wt % of aqueous KOH and it was further stirred at room temperature for 3 days, then at 80Â° C. for 3 hours. The mixture was acidified to pH4 with 1N aqueous HCl and extracted with EtOAc three times. The extracts were combined and adsorbed on silica gel. Purification on silica gel with a gradient of methanol/dichloromethane afforded 1-{2-hydroxy-3-[5-(3-hydroxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-3-yl]-4-methoxy-phenyl}-ethanone as a white solid (2.6 mg, 20% yield). ¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d6) Î´ 2.65 (s, 3H), 3.85 (s, 3H), 6.72 (dd, J=2.5, 8.5 Hz, 1H), 6.83 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 6.99 (t, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.05 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.23 (t, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.54 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 7.73 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.00 (d, J=9.0 Hz, 1H), 8.44 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 9.49 (s, 1H), 11.9 (s, 1H), 13.0 (s, 1H). MS: m/z 375 (M+H⁺).

Method 29

Step 1: Synthesis of 2-[5-(3-hydroxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-3-yl]-benzene-1,3-diol

To a suspension of 3-[3-(2,6-dimethoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-5-yl]-phenol (23 mg, 0.066 mmol) in dichloromethane (1 mL) at âˆ’78Â° C. was added 1 M boron tribromide solution in dichloromethane (0.23 mL, 0.23 mmol) dropwise. The reaction mixture was warmed up to room temperature over 4 h, then quenched with water and neutralized to pH8 with a saturated solution of aqueous sodium bicarbonate. The mixture was extracted with EtOAc three times and the extracts were combined and adsorbed on silica gel. Purification on silica gel with a gradient of methanol/dichloromethane afforded 2-[5-(3-hydroxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-3-yl]-benzene-1,3-diol as a beige solid (17 mg, 81% yield). ¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d6) Î´ 6.43 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 6.73 (dd, J=2.5, 7.5 Hz, 1H), 6.91 (t, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.00 (t, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.05 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.24 (t, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.46 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 7.85 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.42 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 9.10 (broad s, 2H), 9.49 (broad s, 1H), 11.7 (s, 1H). MS: m/z 319 (M+H⁺).

Method 30

Step 1: Synthesis of 3-[3-(2H-pyrazol-3-yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-5-yl]-phenol

To a suspension of 1-(5-bromo-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-3-yl)-3-dimethylaminopropenone (30 mg, 0.102 mmol) in EtOH was added hydrazine (5 uL, 0.122 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at 80Â° C. for 3 h, then concentrated in vacuo. To the crude was added 3-hydroxyphenyl boronic acid (18 mg, 0.132 mmol) and dichlorobis (triphenylphosphino)palladium (ii) (4 mg, 0.006 mmol), and 1 mL of a 1:1 mixture of acetonitrile, and a 2 M solution of sodium carbonate in water. The reaction was run in a Personal ChemistryÂ® microwave reactor at 150Â° C. for 600 s. The reaction mixture was diluted with methanol (ca. 6 mL), filtered, and the filtrate was adsorbed on silica gel. Purification on silica gel with a gradient of MeOH/CH2Cl2 afforded a beige solid that was further purified by reverse phase chromatography using a gradient of H₂O and acetonitrile (with 0.1% formic acid as a modifier) to give 3-[3-(2H-pyrazol-3-yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-5-yl]-phenol as white solid (9.6 mg, 34% yield). ¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d6) Î´ 6.61 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 6.71 (dd, J=2.5, 8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.03 (s, 1H), 7.08 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.22 (t, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.65 (broad s, 1H), 7.84 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 8.43 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.53 (broad s, 1H), 9.51 (broad s, 1H), 11.8 (broad s, 1H). MS: m/z 277 (M+H⁺).

Other compounds prepared by method 30:

TABLE 20Structure a) From methylhydrazineb) From guanidine hydrochloride and sodium carbonate

Method 31

Step 1: Synthesis of 3-(3-phenylethynyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-5-yl)-phenol

To a solution of toluene-4-sulfonic acid 3-[3-iodo-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-5-yl]-phenyl ester (60 mg, 0.093 mmol, prepared as exemplified in Method 6) in dichloromethane (0.5 mL) under nitrogen atmosphere was added successively triethylamine (16 uL, 0.112 mmol), copper (I) iodide (0.6 mg, 0.00315 mmol), dichlorobis (triphenylphosphino)palladium (ii) (0.9 mg, 0.00128 mmol), and phenyl acetylene (11 uL, 0.102 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 h, then adsorbed directly on silica gel. Purification on silica gel with a gradient of MeOH/CH2Cl2 afforded 46 mg of an off-white solid that further suspended in 2 ml of EtOH and 2 mL of aqueous KOH (50 wt %). The reaction mixture was stirred at 80Â° C. for 4 h, then acidified to pH 4 with 1 N aqueous HCl. The milky solution was extracted with EtOAc three times, and the extracts were combined and adsorbed on silica gel. Purification on silica gel with a gradient of MeOH/CH2Cl2 afforded 3-(3-phenylethynyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-5-yl)-phenol as a beige solid (12 mg, 41% yield). ¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d6) Î´ 6.77 (dd, J=2.5, 7.5 Hz, 1H), 7.10 (t, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.17 (d, J=6.0 Hz, 1H), 7.28 (t, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.37-7.43 (m, 3H), 7.58 (d, J=7.0 Hz, 1H), 7.97 (s, 1H), 8.18 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 8.54 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 9.55 (s, 1H), 12.2 (broad s, 1H). MS: m/e 311 (M+H⁺).

Method 32

Step 1: Synthesis of 3-[3-(2-pyridin-2-yl-vinyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-5-yl]-phenol

To toluene-4-sulfonic acid 3-[3-iodo-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-5-yl]-phenyl ester (50 mg, 0.077 mmol), tri-ortho-tolylphosphine (10 mg, 0.031 mmol), palladium (II) acetate (2 mg, 0.0077 mmol) was added DMF (0.5 mL), triethylamine (32 uL, 0.232 mmol), and 2-vinylpyridine (42 uL, 0.388 mmol). The vial was flushed with nitrogen, and the reaction was run in a Personal ChemistryÂ® microwave reactor at 150Â° C. for 900 s. Water was added and the mixture was neutralized to pH 6 with 1 N aqueous HCl, then extracted with EtOAc three times. The extracts were combined and concentrated in vacuo. The crude was treated with 1 mL of EtOH and 1 mL of aqueous KOH (50 wt %). The reaction mixture was stirred at 80Â° C. for 15 h. The mixture was neutralized to pH 7 with 1 N aqueous HCl, and the resulting precipitate was filtered, washed with water, dried in vacuo, and adsorbed on silica gel. Purification on silica gel with a gradient of MeOH/CH2Cl2 afforded 3-[3-(2-pyridin-2-yl-vinyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-5-yl]-phenol as a yellow solid (17 mg, 35% yield). ¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d6) Î´ 6.78 (dd, J=2.0, 8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.13 (s, 1H), 7.15-7.20 (m, 2H), 7.26 (d, J=16.0 Hz, 1H), 7.29 (t, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.57 (d, J=7.5 Hz, 1H), 7.73 (dt, J=2.0, 8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.90 (d, J=16.0 Hz, 1H), 7.93 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.50 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.52 (d, J=5.0 Hz, 1H), 8.54 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 9.56 (s, 1H), 12.1 (s, 1H). MS: m/z 314 (M+H⁺).

Other compounds prepared by method 32:

TABLE 21Structure

Method 33

Step 1: Synthesis of 3-[3-(2-pyridin-2-yl-ethyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-5-yl]-phenol

A suspension of 3-[3-(2-pyridin-2-yl-vinyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-5-yl]-phenol (10 mg, 0.032 mmol) and 10 wt % Pd/C (1.7 mg, 0.0016 mmol) in 0.9 ml of a (1:1:1) mixture of MeOH/CH2Cl2/DMF was stirred for 2 days under H₂atmosphere. The mixture was adsorbed directly on silica gel. Purification on silica gel with a gradient of MeOH/CH2Cl2 afforded 3-[3-(2-pyridin-2-yl-ethyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-5-yl]-phenol as a yellow solid (6 mg, 60% yield). ¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d6) Î´ 3.22 (t, J=7.5 Hz, 2H), 3.37 (t, J=7.5 Hz, 2H), 6.77 (d, J=7.5 Hz, 1H), 7.07 (s, 1H), 7.11 (d, J=7.0 Hz, 1H), 7.27 (m, 2H), 7.82 (m, 1H), 7.93 (d, J=7.0 Hz, 1H), 8.21 (s, 1H), 8.43 (m, 2H), 8.79 (d, J=5.5 Hz, 1H), 9.54 (broad s, 1H), 11.53 (s, 1H). MS: m/z 316 (M+H⁺).

Method 34

Step 1: Synthesis of 3-[3-(3-fluoro-benzyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-5-yl]-phenol

To a solution of toluene-4-sulfonic acid 3-[3-iodo-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-5-yl]-phenyl ester (50 mg, 0.077 mmol, prepared as exemplified in method 6) in THF (2 mL) at âˆ’90Â° C. under nitrogen atmosphere was added a solution of tBuLi in pentane (1.7 M, 90 uL) dropwise. After stirring for 5 min, 3-fluoro-benzaldehyde (40 uL, 0.38 mmol) was added and the reaction mixture was slowly warmed up to 10Â° C. over 2 h, then quenched with a saturated solution of ammonium chloride and extracted with EtOAc three times. The extracts were combined and adsorbed on silica gel. Purification on silica gel with a gradient of MeOH/CH2Cl2 afforded 26 mg of toluene-4-sulfonic acid 3-[3-[(3-fluorophenyl)-hydroxy-methyl]-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-5-yl]-phenyl ester. The material was dissolved in dichloromethane (0.3 mL) under nitrogen atmosphere. Triethylsilane (24 uL, 0.149 mmol) was added, followed by boron trifluoride etherate (7 Î¼L, 0.149 mmol) dropwise. After stirring for 15 h, the reaction was quenched with a saturated solution of sodium bicarbonate and extracted with dichloromethane three times. The extracts were combined and concentrated under vacuum. The crude was treated with 2 mL of EtOH and 2 mL of aqueous KOH (50 wt %). The reaction mixture was stirred at 70Â° C. for 1 h. The mixture was acidified to pH 4 with 1 N aqueous HCl, and extracted with EtOAc three times. The extracts were combined and adsorbed on silica gel. Purification on silica gel with a gradient of MeOH/CH₂Cl₂afforded 3-[3-(3-fluoro-benzyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-5-yl]-phenol as a beige solid (8 mg, 66% yield). ¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d6) Î´ 4.11 (s, 3H), 6.74 (dd, J=2.5, 8.5 Hz, 1H), 6.97 (dt, J=2.0, 8.5 Hz, 1H), 7.00 (s, 1H), 7.05 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.13 (d, J=10.5 Hz, 1H), 7.17 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.25 (t, J=7.5 Hz, 1H), 7.30 (q, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.40 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 8.07 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.42 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 9.56 (broad s, 1H), 11.6 (s, 1H). MS: m/z 319 (M+H⁺).

Other compounds prepared by Method 34:

TABLE 22Structure

Method 35

Step 1: Synthesis of 3-(3-cyclohex-1-enyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-5-yl)-phenol

To a solution of 5-bromo-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (100 mg, 0.507 mmol) in MeOH (1 mL) was added cyclohexanone (52 uL, 1.015 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at 80Â° C. for 16 h then concentrated in vacuo. To the residue was added 3-hydroxyphenyl boronic acid (91 mg, 0.66 mmol), dichlorobis (triphenylphosphino)palladium (II) (18 mg, 0.025 mmol), and 2 mL of a 1:1 mixture of acetonitrile, and a 2 M solution of sodium carbonate in water. The reaction was run in a Personal ChemistryÂ® microwave reactor at 150Â° C. for 600 s. The reaction mixture was diluted with methanol, filtered, and the filtrate was adsorbed on silica gel. Purification on silica gel with a gradient of MeOH/CH₂Cl₂afforded 3-(3-cyclohex-1-enyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-5-yl)-phenol as an off-white solid (12.6 mg, 12% yield). ¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d6) Î´ 1.64 (m, 2H), 1.74 (m, 2H), 2.23 (m, 2H), 2.42 (m, 2H), 6.27 (m, 1H), 6.74 (dd, J=2.0, 8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.05 (s, 1H), 7.11 (d, J=7.5 Hz, 1H), 7.26 (t, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.50 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.26 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.42 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 9.51 (broad s, 1H), 11.7 (s, 1H). MS: m/z 291 (M+H⁺).

Other compounds prepared by Method 35:

TABLE 23Structure

Method 36

Step 1: Synthesis of 3-(3-cyclohexyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-5-yl)-phenol

A suspension of 3-(3-cyclohex-1-enyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-5-yl)-phenol (6.7 mg, 0.023 mmol) and 10 wt % Pd/C (3 mg) in methanol (0.9 ml) was stirred for 24 h under H₂atmosphere. The reaction mixture was filtered through a silica plug, the solvent was evaporated to give 3-(3-cyclohexyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-5-yl)-phenol as a white solid (2.5 mg, 37% yield). ¹H NMR (500 MHz, MeOH-d4) Î´ 1.35 (m, 1H), 1.54 (m, 4H), 1.80 (m, 1H), 1.88 (m, 2H), 2.10 (m, 2H), 2.87 (m, 1H), 6.79 (dd, J=2.5, 8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.06 (t, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.10 (d, J=7.5 Hz, 1H), 7.16 (s, 1H), 7.29 (t, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 8.14 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.35 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 9.51 (broad s, 1H), 11.7 (s, 1H). MS: m/e 293 (M+H⁺).

Other compounds prepared by method 36:

TABLE 24Structure

Method 37

Step 1: Synthesis of 3-(3-phenylsulfanyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-5-yl)-phenol

To toluene-4-sulfonic acid 3-[3-iodo-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-5-yl]-phenyl ester (50 mg, 0.077 mmol), copper(I) iodide (1.5 mg, 0.004 mmol), and potassium carbonate (16 mg, 0.155 mmol) under nitrogen atmosphere was added isopropanol (0.2 mL), benzenethiol (8 Î¼L, 0.077 mmol), and ethylene glycol (9 uL, 0.155 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at 80Â° C. for 24 h. A (1:1) mixture of 2 M aqueous KOH and MeOh (1 mL) was added, and the reaction mixture was further stirred at 50Â° C. for 3 h. The mixture was acidified to pH5 with 1N aqueous HCl and extracted with EtOAc twice. Extracts were combined and concentrated under vacuum. Purification by reverse phase chromatography using a gradient of H₂O and acetonitrile (with 0.1% formic acid as a modifier) afforded 3-(3-phenylsulfanyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-5-yl)-phenol as a white solid (4.3 mg, 17% yield). ¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d6) Î´ 6.74 (dd, J=2.5, 9.0 Hz, 1H), 6.98 (t, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.08 (m, 4H), 7.23 (m, 3H), 7.85 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 7.98 (s, 1H), 8.56 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 9.55 (broad s, 1H), 12.4 (broad s, 1H). MS: m/z 319 (M+H⁺).

Other examples prepared by Method 37:

TABLE 25Structure

Method 38

Step 1: Synthesis of (5-bromo-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-3-yl)-phenyl-methanone

To a suspension of AlCl₃(338 mg, 2.54 mmol) in dichloromethane (10 mL) was added 5-bromo-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (100 mg, 0.507 mmol). After stirring for 45 min, benzoyl chloride (0.3 mL, 2.54 mmol) was added and the reaction mixture was stirred for 3 h, before quenching with MeOH at 0Â° C. The mixture was concentrated in vacuum, the pH was changed to 4 by addition of 1N aqueous NaOH, and the aqueous layer was extracted twice with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried over MgSO₄, filtered and adsorbed on silica gel. Purification on silica gel with a gradient of EtOAc/hexanes afforded (5-bromo-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-3-yl)-phenyl-methanone as a white solid (61 mg, 40% yield).

Step 2: Synthesis of [5-(3-hydroxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-3-yl]-phenyl-methanone

To (5-bromo-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-3-yl)-phenyl-methanone (50 mg, 0.167 mmol), 3-hydroxyphenyl boronic acid (30 mg, 0.217 mmol), and dichlorobis (triphenylphosphino)palladium (II) (6 mg, 0.0083 mmol) in a Smith process vial was added 1 mL of a 1:1 mixture of acetonitrile, and a 2 M solution of sodium carbonate in water. The reaction was run in a Personal ChemistryÂ® microwave reactor at 150Â° C. for 1200 s. The mixture was diluted with DMF (ca. 5 mL) and filtered on a silica plug. The filtrate was adsorbed on silica gel. Purification on silica gel with a gradient of MeOH/dichloromethane afforded [5-(3-hydroxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-3-yl]-phenyl-methanone as a yellow solid (37 mg, 71% yield). ¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d6) Î´ 6.80 (dd, J=2.0, 7.5 Hz, 1H), 7.10 (t, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.14 (d, J=9.0 Hz, 1H), 7.31 (t, J=7.5 Hz, 1H), 7.57 (t, J=7.5 Hz, 2H), 7.65 (t, J=7.5 Hz, 1H), 7.84 (d, J=7.0 Hz, 2H), 8.14 (s, 1H), 8.61 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.68 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 9.65 (broad s, 1H). MS: m/z 315 (M+H⁺).

Method 39

Step 1: Synthesis of 3-(2H-pyrazol-3-yl)-5-pyridin-3-yl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine

To 5-bromo-3-(2H-pyrazol-3-yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (30 mg, 0.114 mmol), 3-pyridyl boronic acid pinacol ester (30 mg, 0.148 mmol), and dichlorobis (triphenylphosphino)palladium (II) (4 mg, 0.0057 mmol) in a Smith process vial was added 1 mL of a 1:1 mixture of acetonitrile, and a 2 M solution of sodium carbonate in water. The reaction was run in a Personal ChemistryÂ® microwave reactor at 150Â° C. for 900 s. The mixture was diluted with DMF (ca. 5 mL), filtered on a silica plug, and solvent was evaporated. Purification by reverse phase chromatography using a gradient of H₂O and acetonitrile (with 0.1% formic acid as a modifier) afforded the formate salt of 3-(2H-pyrazol-3-yl)-5-pyridin-3-yl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine as a white solid (4.5 mg, 13% yield). ¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d6) Î´ 6.61 (broad s, 1H), 6.73 (broad s, 1H), 7.53 (dd, J=5.5, 7.0 Hz, 1H), 7.71 (broad s, 1H), 7.94 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 8.18 (broad s, 1H), 8.60 (m, 2H), 8.68 (broad s, 1H), 8.98 (broad s, 1H), 12.0 (broad s, 1H), 12.7 (broad s, 1H). MS: m/z 262 (M+H⁺).

Other compounds prepared by method 39:

TABLE 26Structure

Method 40

Step 1: Synthesis of 3-(2-ethyl-phenyl)-5-pyridin-3-yl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine

To 5-bromo-3-iodo-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (15 mg, 0.0314 mmol, prepared as described in method 1), 2-ethylphenyl boronic acid (5.2 mg, 0.034 mmol), and dichlorobis (triphenylphosphino)palladium (II) (1.3 mg, 0.0002 mmol) in a Smith process vial was added 0.5 mL of a 1:1 mixture of acetonitrile, and a 2 M solution of sodium carbonate in water. The reaction mixture was stirred for 6 h, then 3-pyridyl boronic acid pinacol ester (8.4 mg, 0.041 mmol) and dichlorobis (triphenylphosphino)palladium (II) (1.3 mg, 0.0002 mmol) were added and the reaction was run in a Personal ChemistryÂ® microwave reactor at 150Â° C. for 900 s. The mixture was diluted with DMF (2 mL), filtered on a silica plug, and solvent was evaporated. Purification by reverse phase chromatography using a gradient of H₂O and acetonitrile (with 0.1% formic acid as a modifier) afforded 3-(2-ethyl-phenyl)-5-pyridin-3-yl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine as a solid (5.8 mg, 61% yield). ¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d6) Î´ 1.05 (t, J=7.5 Hz, 3H), 2.66 (q, J=7.5 Hz, 2H), 7.27 (t, J=7.0 Hz, 1H), 7.31 (t, J=7.0 Hz, 1H), 7.38 (d, J=7.5 Hz, 2H), 7.45 (dd, J=5.5, 8.5 Hz, 1H), 7.60 (s, 1H), 7.98 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.10 (dd, J=1.5, 8.0 Hz, 1H), 8.54 (d, J=5.0 Hz, 1H), 8.60 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.90 (s, 1H), 12.0 (s, 1H). MS: m/z 300 (M+H⁺).

Other compounds prepared by Method 40:

TABLE 27Structure a, b, c 2,3-Dihydro-benzofuran-7-bronic acid, benzo[1,3]dioxole-4-boronic acid and 2,2-difluoro-benzo[1,3]dioxole-4-boronic acid were prepared according to the procedures described below.

Synthesis of 1,3-Dibromo-2-(2-bromo-ethoxy)-benzene

1,2-Dibromoethane (5.0 ml, 58 mmol) was added to a solution of sodium hydroxide (2.5 g, 63 mmol) and 2,6-dibromophenol (14.5 g, 57.6 mmol) in 45 ml of water. The mixture was stirred under reflux for 20 hours and then extracted with ether. The combined organic layers was dried over Na₂SO₄, filtered and concentrated to give colorless oil. Silica gel chromatography using a gradient of ethyl acetate in hexanes to afforded 1,3-dibromo-2-(2-bromo-ethoxy)-benzene (11.55 g, 57% yield) as a colorless oil.

Synthesis of 7-Bromo-2,3-dihydro-benzofuran

A solution of 2.5M n-BuLi (13.0 ml, 32.5 mmol) was added to a solution of 1,3-dibromo-2-(2-bromo-ethoxy)-benzene (11.5, 32.0 mmol) in 115 ml of THF and 28 ml of hexane at âˆ’78Â° C. over 30 mins. The reaction was continued at âˆ’78Â° C. for 30 minutes, then warmed to 0Â° C. The mixture was poured into water (100 ml) and the aqueous phase was extracted with ether. The combined organic layers were dried over Na₂SO₄, filtered, and concentrated to give a pale yellow oil. Silica gel chromatography using a gradient of ethyl acetate in hexanes to give 7-bromo-2,3-dihydro-benzofuran as colorless needles (5.00 g, 78%). ¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d6) Î´ 7.27 (dd, 1 Hz, 8 Hz, 1H), 7.20 (dd, 1 Hz, 7.5 Hz, 1H), 6.75 (t, 7.8 Hz, 1H), 4.59 (t, 9 Hz, 2H), 3.28 (t, 8.8 Hz, 2H).

Synthesis of 2,3-Dihydro-benzofuran-7-bronic Acid

A solution of 1.7M t-BuLi (6.5 ml, 11.1 mmol) in pentane was added to a solution of 7-bromo-2,3-dihydro-benzofuran (2.00 g, 10.1 mmol) in 15 ml of THF at âˆ’78Â° C. over 15 minutes. The mixture was stirred at âˆ’78Â° C. for 30 minutes before trimethyl boroate (1.34 ml, 12.0 mmol) was added. The mixture was slowly warmed to 0Â° C. and water (100 ml) added. The organic layer was separated and the aqueous phase was extracted with ether. The combined organic layers was dried over Na₂SO₄, filtered and concentrated to give a white sticky residue. The crude product was then washed with water and then 20% EtOAc in hexanes to afford 2,3-dihydro-benzofuran-7-bronic acid (1.48 g, 90% yield) as a white solid.

Similarly, benzo[1,3]dioxole-4-boronic acid and 2,2-difluoro-benzo[1,3]dioxole-4-boronic acid were prepared.

Method 41

Step 1: Synthesis of 2-bromo-1-(5-bromo-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-3-yl)-ethanone

To a suspension of AlCl₃(338 mg, 2.54 mmol) in dichloromethane (10 mL) was added 5-bromo-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (100 mg, 0.507 mmol). After stirring for 30 min, bromoacetyl chloride (0.21 mL, 2.54 mmol) was added and the reaction mixture was stirred for 2 h, before quenching with MeOH at 0Â° C. The mixture was concentrated in vacuo, the pH was changed to 7 by addition of a saturated solution of aqueous sodium bicarbonate, and the aqueous layer was extracted twice with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried over MgSO₄and filtered through a plug of silica gel. Solvent was evaporated to dryness to give 2-bromo-1-(5-bromo-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-3-yl)-ethanone as a light yellow solid (160 mg, quantitative). ¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d6) Î´ 4.70 (s, 2H), 8.44 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.55 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 8.68 (d, J=3.5 Hz, 1H), 12.9 (s, 1H). MS: m/z 316 (M+H⁺).

Step 2: Synthesis of 4-(5-bromo-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-3-yl)-thiazol-2-ylamine

A solution of 2-bromo-1-(5-bromo-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-3-yl)-ethanone as a light yellow solid (80 mg, 0.251 mmol) and thiourea (21 mg, 0.276 mmol) in EtOH (1 mL) was stirred at 80Â° C. for 1.5 h. The resulting precipitate was filtered, washed with MeOH, and dried in vacuo to give 4-(5-bromo-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-3-yl)-thiazol-2-ylamine hydrobromide salt as a beige solid (66 mg, 70% yield). ¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d6) Î´ 7.11 (s, 1H), 8.00 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 8.39 (t, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 8.52 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 12.4 (s, 1H). MS: m/z 295 (M+H⁺).

Step 3: Synthesis of 4-[5-(1H-indol-5-yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-3-yl]-thiazol-2-ylamine

To 4-(5-bromo-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-3-yl)-thiazol-2-ylamine hydrobromide salt (20 mg, 0.053 mmol), 5-indolyl boronic acid (13 mg, 0.08 mmol), and [1,1â€²-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene]dichloropalladium (II), complex with dichloromethane (1:1) (2 mg, 0.0026 mmol) in a Smith process vial was added 0.5 mL of a 1:1 mixture of acetonitrile, and a 2 M solution of sodium carbonate in water. The reaction was run in a Personal ChemistryÂ® microwave reactor at 150Â° C. for 1200 s. The mixture was diluted with DMF (3 mL), filtered on a silica plug, and solvent was evaporated. Purification by reverse phase chromatography using a gradient of H₂O and acetonitrile (with 0.1% formic acid as a modifier) afforded the formate salt of 4-[5-(1H-indol-5-yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-3-yl]-thiazol-2-ylamine as an off-white solid (8.5 mg, 42% yield). ¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d6) Î´ 6.44 (m, 1H), 6.82 (s, 1H), 6.91 (s, 2H), 7.32 (t, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 7.41 (m, 2H), 7.67 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 7.81 (s, 1H), 8.14 (s, 1H), 8.46 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.49 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 11.0 (s, 1H), 11.7 (s, 1H). MS: m/z 332 (M+H⁺).

Method 42

Step 1: Synthesis of (2-Amino-5-bromo-pyridin-3-yl)-(6-fluoro-pyridin-3-yl)methanone

To a solution of 5-bromo-2-fluoropyridine (5.6 ml, 54.2 mmol) in THF (50 ml) at 0Â° C. under nitrogen was added dropwise a 2 M solution of iso-propylmagnesium chloride in THF (27 ml) over a period of 10 minutes. The ice bath was removed and the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 hours. The resulting slurry was added dropwise via cannula to a solution of 2-amino-5-bromo-N-methoxy-N-methyl-nicotinamide hydrochloride (3.0 g, 11.5 mmol) in THF (50 ml) at room temperature under nitrogen over a period of 30 minutes. After stirring for 3 hours, the reaction was quenched by addition of a saturated aqueous solution of ammonium chloride (50 ml) at 0Â° C. and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for another 20 minutes. Water was added and the mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate (three times). The combined organic layers were dried over sodium sulfate, then filtered and concentrated. Crystallization from methanol (ca. 60 ml) afforded the title compound as dark yellow crystals (1.48 g, 49% yield). ¹H NMR (DMSO-d₆): Î´ 8.49 (s, 1H), 8.34 (d, J=1.5 Hz, 1H), 8.23 (dt, J=2.5, 8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.81 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 7.74 (broad s, 2H), 7.36 (dd, J=2.0, 8.0 Hz, 1H); MS: m/z 295.9, 297.9 [MH]⁺.

Step 2: Synthesis of 5-bromo-3-[1-(6-fluoro-pyridin-3-yl)-2-methoxy-vinyl]-pyridin-2-ylamine

To a suspension of (methoxymethyl)triphenylphosphonium chloride (1.16 g, 3.38 mmol) in THF (4 ml) at 0Â° C. under nitrogen was added dropwise a 1M solution of lithium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide in THF (3.4 ml, 3.4 mmol). The resulting dark red mixture was stirred at 0Â° C. for 10 minutes to generate the ylide reagent. To a solution of (2-amino-5-bromo-pyridin-3-yl)-(6-fluoro-pyridin-3-yl)-methanone (400 mg, 1.35 mmol) in THF (6 ml) was added dropwise a 1 M solution of tert-butylmagnesium chloride in THF (1.35 ml) at 0Â° C. under nitrogen. The reaction mixture was stirred at 0Â° C. for 5 minutes, then the ylide reagent was added dropwise in 5 minutes. The reaction mixture was allowed to warm up to room temperature in 45 minutes before quenching with a saturated aqueous solution of ammonium chloride (50 ml) at 0Â° C. The mixture was stirred vigorously for 1.5 hours at room temperature. Water was added, followed by extracting ethyl acetate (three times). The combined organic layers were washed with brine, and directly adsorbed on silica gel. Purification on silica gel with a gradient of ethyl acetate/hexane afforded the title compound (single isomer) as a dark foam (220 mg, 50% yield). ¹H NMR (DMSO-d₆): Î´ 8.15 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 8.00 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 7.78 (dt, J=2.5, 8.5 Hz, 1H), 7.48 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 7.10 (dd, J=3.0, 8.5 Hz, 1H), 6.61 (s, 1H), 5.73 (broad s, 2H), 3.80 (s, 3H); MS: m/z 324, 326 [MH]⁺.

Step 3: Synthesis of 5-(5-bromo-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-3-yl)-pyridin-2-ol

To a solution of 5-bromo-3-[1-(6-fluoro-pyridin-3-yl)-2-methoxy-vinyl]-pyridin-2-ylamine (220 mg, 0.678 mmol) in 1,4-dioxane (3 ml) in a Smith process vial was added 0.3 ml of 70% aqueous perchloric acid. The reaction was irradiated in a Personal ChemistryÂ® microwave to 150Â° C. for 300 s. The reaction mixture was diluted with water and neutralized to pH 7 by addition of an aqueous solution of sodium hydroxide. The resulting precipitate was filtered, washed with water, and dried in vacuo to yield the title compound as a beige solid (152 mg, 77% yield). ¹H NMR (DMSO-d₆): Î´ 12.1 (broad s, 1H), 11.7 (broad s, 1H), 8.32 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 8.30 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 7.83 (dd, J=2.5, 11.5 Hz, 1H), 7.82 (s, 2H), 7.67 (s, 1H), 6.43 (d, J=11.5 Hz, 1H); MS: m/z 290 [MH]⁺.

Step 4: Synthesis of 5-[5-(3,4-dimethoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-3-yl]-pyridin-2-ol

To 5-(5-bromo-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-3-yl)-pyridin-2-ol, 3,4-dimethoxy-phenyl boronic acid (1.3 equiv.) and dichlorobis (triphenylphosphino)palladium (ii) (6 mol %) in a Smith process vial was added a 3:2:1 mixture of acetonitrile, water, and a 2 M solution of sodium carbonate in water to achieve an overall concentration of the starting material of 0.10 M. The reaction was run in a Personal ChemistryÂ® microwave reactor at 165Â° C. for 1200 s. Water was added and the mixture extracted three times with ethyl acetate. Purification on silica gel with a gradient of MeOH/CH2Cl2 afforded 5-[5-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-3-yl]-pyridin-2-ol as an off-white solid (34% yield). ¹H NMR (DMSO-d₆): Î´ 11.86 (broad s, 1H), 11.67 (broad s, 1H), 8.52 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.22 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.89 (dd, J=2.5, 10 Hz, 1H), 7.75 (s, 1H), 7.73 (s, 1H), 7.29 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.23 (dd, J=2.0, 8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.04 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 6.44 (d, J=9.0 Hz, 1H), 3.85 (s, 3H), 3.79 (s, 3H); MS: m/z 348.1 [MH]⁺.

Other compounds prepared by method 42:

TABLE 28Structure

From 5-bromo-3-(6-chloro-pyridin-3-yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine, which was prepared by one of the following ways.

Synthesis of 5-bromo-3-(6-chloro-pyridin-3-yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine from 5-(5-bromo-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-3-yl)-pyridin-2-ol

5-(5-bromo-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-3-yl)-pyridin-2-ol (152 mg, 0.524 mmol) was heated in 2 ml of phosphorus oxychloride in a capped vial. The reaction mixture was stirred at 110Â° C. for 2 hours, then poured onto ice and neutralized to pH 4 with a 1 N aqueous solution of sodium hydroxide. The precipitate was filtered off, washed with water, and dried in vacuo. The resulting solid was heated in methanol for 30 min, then filtered cold, washed with methanol, and dried in vacuo to yield the title compound as a beige solid (117 mg, 72% yield). ¹H NMR (DMSO-d₆): Î´ 12.4 (broad s, 1H), 8.80 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 8.53 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.36 (d, J=1.5 Hz, 1H), 8.23 (dd, J=2.0, 8.0 Hz, 1H), 8.16 (s, 1H), 7.54 (d, J=7.5 Hz, 1H); MS: m/z 307.9, 309.9 [MH]⁺.

Synthesis of 5-bromo-3-(6-chloro-pyridin-3-yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine from 5-bromo-3-[1-(6-fluoro-pyridin-3-yl)-2-methoxy-vinyl]-pyridin-2-ylamine

5-bromo-3-[1-(6-fluoro-pyridin-3-yl)-2-methoxy-vinyl]-pyridin-2-ylamine (375 mg, 1.16 mmol) was treated with a 4 M solution of HCl in 1,4-dioxane (5 ml). The reaction mixture was stirred at 110Â° C. in a sealed tube for 16 hours, then poured onto ice and neutralized to pH 6 with a 1 N aqueous solution of sodium hydroxide. The precipitate was filtered off, washed with water, and dried in vacuo to give 333 mg of a beige solid. The solid was heated with 2 ml of phosphorus oxychloride in a capped vial. The reaction mixture was stirred at 110Â° C. for 2 hours, then poured onto ice and neutralized to pH 2-3 with a 1 N aqueous solution of sodium hydroxide. The precipitate was filtered off, washed with water, and dried in vacuo. Purification on silica gel using a gradient of methanol in dichloromethane afforded the title compound as a beige solid (241 mg, 67% yield).

Method 43

Step 1: Synthesis of [2-amino-5-(3,4-dimethoxy-phenyl)-pyridin-3-yl]-(6-amino-pyridin-3-yl)-methanone

A solution of (2-amino-5-bromo-pyridin-3-yl)-(6-fluoro-pyridin-3-yl)-methanone (120 mg, 0.405 mmol), ammonium chloride (5 equiv.), and triethyl amine (5 eq.) in absolute ethanol (0.2 M) was sealed in a Smith process vial. The reaction was heated in a Personal ChemistryÂ® microwave reactor to 200Â° C. for 25 minutes. The mixture was diluted with water, and the resulting yellow precipitate was filtered off, washed with water, and dried in vacuo. The crude product was mixed with 3,4-dimethoxyphenyl boronic acid (1.3 equiv.), 6 mol % of dichlorbis(triphenylphosphino) palladium (II) and a 3:2:1 mixture of acetonitrile, water, and a 2 M aqueous solution of sodium carbonate (0.11 M). The reaction was run in a Personal ChemistryÂ® microwave reactor at 165Â° C. for 1200 s. Water was added and the mixture was extracted three times with ethyl acetate. Purification was accomplished by flash chromatography on silica gel with a gradient of ethyl acetate/hexanes and afforded [2-amino-5-(3,4-dimethoxy-phenyl)-pyridin-3-yl]-(6-amino-pyridin-3-yl)-methanone as a yellow solid (37 mg, 31% yield). ¹H NMR (DMSO-d₆): Î´ 8.50 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 8.29 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.86 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.75 (dd, J=2.0, 8.5 Hz, 1H), 7.15 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.06 (m, 3H), 6.98 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 6.92 (broad s, 2H), 6.50 (d, J=9.0 Hz, 1H), 3.80 (s, 3H), 3.75 (s, 3H). HPLC/MS m/z: 351 [MH⁺].

Step 2: Synthesis of 5-[5-(3,4-dimethoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-3-yl]-pyridin-2-ylamine

To a suspension of (methoxymethyl)triphenylphosphonium chloride (166 mg, 0.485 mmol) in THF (1 ml) at 0Â° C. under nitrogen was added potassium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide (97 mg, 0.485 mmol). The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 30 min, then it was added to [2-amino-5-(3,4-dimethoxy-phenyl)-pyridin-3-yl]-(6-amino-pyridin-3-yl)-methanone (34 mg, 0.097 mmol) in one portion. The reaction mixture was stirred for 2 hours, then quenched with wet methanol and concentrated in vacuo. The crude was diluted with 2 ml of 1,4-dioxane and treated with 0.1 ml of aqueous 70% perchloric acid. The mixture was stirred at 80Â° C. for 19 hours, diluted with THF/methanol (1:1), and treated with 2.0 g of PS-trisamine (Argonaut Technologies, 4 equivalents per equivalent of acid used) for 30 minutes. The resin was filtered off and washed with THF/MeOH (1:1). Purification was accomplished by flash chromotography on silica gel with a gradient of methanol/dichloromethane afforded 5-[5-(3,4-dimethoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-3-yl]-pyridin-2-ylamine as a yellow solid (9.7 mg, 29% yield). ¹H NMR (DMSO-d₆): Î´ 11.8 (s, 1H), 8.51 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.31 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.25 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.77 (dd, J=2.0, 10.0 Hz, 1H), 7.70 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 7.28 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.24 (dd, J=2.0, 7.5 Hz, 1H), 7.04 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 6.55 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 5.90 (broad s, 2H), 3.86 (s, 3H), 3.79 (s, 3H). HPLC/MS m/z: 347.1 [MH]⁺.

Method 44

Step 1: Synthesis of (2-amino-5-bromo-pyridin-3-yl)-[6-(2-methoxy-ethylamino)pyridin-3-yl]-methanone

A solution of (2-amino-5-bromo-pyridin-3-yl)-(6-fluoro-pyridin-3-yl)-methanone, 2-methoxyethylamine (1 equiv.) and triethylamine (1.2 equiv.) in absolute EtOH (0.17 M) was sealed in a Smith process vial. The reaction was run in a Personal ChemistryÂ® microwave reactor at 160Â° C. for 900 s. The mixture was diluted with water, and the resulting precipitate was filtered off, washed with water, and dried in vacuo to give (2-amino-5-bromo-pyridin-3-yl)-[6-(2-methoxy-ethylamino)-pyridin-3-yl]-methanone as a yellow solid (86% yield). ¹H NMR (DMSO-d₆): Î´ 8.28 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 8.23 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 7.75 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 7.69 (dd, J=2.0, 9.0 Hz, 1H), 7.64 (broad s, 1H), 7.12 (broad s, 2H), 6.59 (d, J=9.5 Hz, 1H), 3.51 (t, J=4.5 Hz, 2H), 3.47 (t, J=4.5 Hz, 2H), 3.26 (s, 3H); HPLC/MS m/z: 351, 353 [MH]⁺.

Step 2: Synthesis of [2-amino-5-(3,4-dimethoxy-phenyl)-pyridin-3-yl]-[6-(2-methoxy-ethylamino)-pyridin-3-yl]-methanone

To (2-amino-5-bromo-pyridin-3-yl)-[6-(2-methoxy-ethylamino)-pyridin-3-yl]-methanone, 3,4-dimethoxyphenylboronic acid (1.3 equiv.) and dichlorobis (triphenylphosphino)palladium (ii) (6 mol %) in a Smith process vial was added a 3:2:1 mixture of acetonitrile, water, and a 2 m solution of sodium carbonate in water to achieve an overall concentration of the starting material of 0.10 m. The reaction was run in a Personal ChemistryÂ® microwave reactor at 165Â° C. for 1200 s. Water was added and the mixture extracted three times with ethyl acetate. Purification on silica gel with a gradient of MeOH/CH2Cl2 afforded [2-amino-5-(3,4-dimethoxy-phenyl)-pyridin-3-yl]-[6-(2-methoxy-ethylamino)-pyridin-3-yl]-methanone as a yellow solid (74% yield). ¹H NMR (DMSO-d₆): Î´ 8.49 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.33 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 7.85 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.73 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 7.58 (broad s, 1H), 7.14 (s, 1H), 7.05 (m, 3H), 6.98 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 6.59 (d, J=9.0 Hz, 1H), 3.79 (s, 3H), 3.75 (s, 3H), 3.50 (broad t, J=5.0 Hz, 2H), 3.46 (t, J=5.0 Hz, 2H), 3.26 (s, 3H); HPLC/MS m/z: 409.2 [MH]⁺.

Step 3: Synthesis of {5-[5-(3,4-dimethoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-3-yl]-pyridin-2-yl}-(2-methoxy-ethyl)-amine

To a suspension of (methoxymethyl)triphenylphosphonium chloride (7-10 equiv.) in THF (0.45 M) at 0Â° C. under nitrogen was added potassium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide (1 equivalent to phosphonium chloride). The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 30 minutes. The resulting mixture was added to [2-amino-5-(3,4-dimethoxy-phenyl)-pyridin-3-yl]-[6-(2-methoxy-ethylamino)-pyridin-3-yl]-methanone dissolved in THF (0.1-0.2 M) in one portion. The reaction mixture was stirred for 1-16 hours, then diluted with methanol and adsorbed on silica gel. Purification by flash chromatography on silica gel with a gradient of methanol/dichloromethane afforded the corresponding vinyl ether that was used in the next reaction.

The vinyl ether was dissolved in 1,4-dioxane (0.1 M) and treated with 2.6 equivalents of 70% aqueous perchloric acid. The mixture was stirred at 80-100Â° C. for 19-24 hours, diluted with THF/MeOH (1:1), and treated with PS-trisamine (Argonaut Technologies, 10 equivalents per equivalent of acid used) for 30 minutes. The resin was filtered off and washed with THF/MeOH (1:1). Purification by flash chromatography on silica gel with a gradient of methanol/dichloromethane afforded {5-[5-(3,4-dimethoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-3-yl]-pyridin-2-yl}-(2-methoxy-ethyl)-amine as a white solid (65% yield). ¹H NMR (DMSO-d₆): using the compound prepared according to example 83 as a starting material. ¹H-NMR Î´ 11.8 (s, 1H), 8.51 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.39 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 8.26 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.77 (dd, J=2.5, 9.0 Hz, 1H), 7.70 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 7.29 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.25 (dd, J=2.0, 8.5 Hz, 1H), 7.04 (d, J=9.0 Hz, 1H), 6.62 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 6.55 (t, J=5.5 Hz, 1H), 3.86 (s, 3H), 3.79 (s, 3H), 3.47 (m, 4H), 3.28 (s, 3H). HPLC/MS m/z: 405.2 [MH]⁺.

The following one-pot procedure was used in some cases:

A solution of (2-amino-5-bromo-pyridin-3-yl)-(6-fluoro-pyridin-3-yl)-methanone, 1.1 equivalents of isobutylamine and 1.2 equivalents (or 2.3 equivalents for amines in salt form) of triethyl amine are dissolved in absolute ethanol (overall concentration of the starting material: 0.22 M) and sealed in a Smith process vial. The reaction was run in a Personal ChemistryÂ® microwave reactor at 150Â° C. for 900 s. The solvent was evaporated and the crude mixed with 1.3 equivalents of 3,4-dimethoxyphenylboronic acid, 6 mol % of dichlorobis (triphenylphosphinol) palladium (II) and a 3:2:1 mixture of acetonitrile, water, and an aqueous 2 M solution of sodium carbonate (overall concentration of starting material: 0.18 M). The reaction was run in a Personal ChemistryÂ® microwave reactor at 165Â° C. for 1200 s. Water was added and the mixture extracted three times with ethyl acetate Purification by flash chromatography on silica gel with a gradient of ethyl acetate/hexane to afforded [2-Amino-5-(3,4-dimethoxy-phenyl)-pyridin-3-yl]-(6-isobutylamino-pyridin-3-yl)-methanone as a yellow solid (71% yield). ¹H NMR (DMSO-d₆): , 8.49 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.32 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 7.86 (d, J=3.0 Hz, 1H), 7.72 (d, J=9.0 Hz, 1H), 7.57 (broad s, 1H), 7.14 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.06 (dd, J=2.0, 8.5 Hz, 1H), 7.03 (broad s, 2H), 6.98 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 6.56 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 3.79 (s, 3H), 3.75 (s, 3H), 3.15 (broad s, 2H), 1.83 (m, 1H), 0.89 (d, J=6.5 Hz, 6H); HPLC/MS m/z: 407.2 [MH]⁺.

Other compounds prepared by Method 44:

TABLE 29Structure a) Compounds synthesized by the one-pot procedure.

Method 45

Step 1: Synthesis of 5-{5-[3-methoxy-4-(4-methoxy-benzyloxy)-phenyl]-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-3-yl}-pyridin-2-ol

To the 5-(5-bromo-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-3-yl)-pyridin-2-ol, 4-(4-methoxyphenylmethoxy)-3-methoxyphenylboronic acid (1.3 equiv.), and 6 mol % of dichlorobis(triphenylphosphino)palladium (II) in a Smith process vial was added a 3:2:1 mixture of acetonitrile, water and a 2 M aqueous solution of sodium carbonate (0.10 M). The reaction was run in a Personal ChemistryÂ® microwave reactor at 165Â° C. for 1200 s. Water was added and the mixture was extracted three times with ethyl acetate Purification on silica gel with a gradient or methanol/dichloromethane by flash chromatography afforded 5-{5-[3-methoxy-4-(4-methoxy-benzyloxy)-phenyl]-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-3-yl}-pyridin-2-ol as a tan solid (46% yield). ¹H NMR (DMSO-d₆): Î´ 11.86 (broad s, 1H), 11.67 (broad s, 1H), 8.51 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 8.22 (s, 1H), 7.89 (dd, J=2.5, 9.5 Hz, 1H), 7.75 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 7.72 (s, 1H), 7.38 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 2H), 7.30 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.20 (dd, J=2.0, 8.5 Hz, 1H), 7.11 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 6.94 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 2H), 6.44 (d, J=9.5 Hz, 1H), 5.03 (s, 2H), 3.85 (s, 3H), 3.75 (s, 3H); HPLC/MS m/z: 454.1 [MH]⁺.

Step 2: Synthesis of 5-(5-(4-hydroxy-3-methoxyphenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-3-yl)pyridin-2-ol

To a suspension of 5-{5-[3-methoxy-4-(4-methoxy-benzyloxy)-phenyl]-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-3-yl}-pyridin-2-ol (25 mg, 0.055 mmol) in 1.5 ml of dichloromethane was added 78 mg of PS-thiophenol resin (Argonaut Technologies, 1.41 mmolÂ·g^âˆ’1), followed by TFA (0.3 ml). The clear suspension was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour, then the resin was filtered off, washed with ethyl acetate, then methanol. The filtrate was evaporated and the residue was taken up in 2 ml of ethyl acetate and saturated aqueous solution of sodium bicarbonate. The resulting precipitate was filtered off, washed with water, then ethyl acetate and dried in vacuo to afford 5-(5-(4-hydroxy-3-methoxyphenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-3-yl)pyridin-2-ol as a light beige solid (15 mg, 80% yield). ¹H NMR (DMSO-d₆): Î´ 11.83 (broad s, 1H), 11.67 (broad s, 1H), 9.05 (s, 1H), 8.49 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.18 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.88 (dd, J=3.0, 9.5 Hz, 1H), 7.74 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 7.71 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.26 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.12 (dd, J=2.0, 8.5 Hz, 1H), 6.87 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 6.44 (d, J=9.0 Hz, 1H), 3.86 (s, 3H); HPLC/MS m/z: 334.1 [MH]⁺.

Method 46

Step 1: Synthesis of 3-[1-(6-fluoro-pyridin-3-yl)-2-methoxy-vinyl]-5-[3-methoxy-4-(4-methoxy-benzyloxy)-phenyl]-pyridin-2-ylamine

5-Bromo-3-[1-(6-fluoro-pyridin-3-yl)-2-methoxy-vinyl]-pyridin-2-ylamine was subjected to method 20, Step 1 to yield 3-[1-(6-fluoro-pyridin-3-yl)-2-methoxy-vinyl]-5-[3-methoxy-4-(4-methoxy-benzyloxy)-phenyl]-pyridin-2-ylamine as a yellow solid (70% yield). ¹H NMR (DMSO-d₆): Î´ 8.27 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 8.20 (s, 1H), 7.83 (dt, J=2.5, 8.5 Hz, 1H), 7.61 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.36 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 2H), 7.18 (s, 1H), 7.10 (m, 2H), 7.07 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 6.94 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 2H), 6.63 (s, 1H), 5.53 (broad s, 2H), 5.00 (s, 2H), 3.82 (s, 3H), 3.81 (s, 3H), 3.75 (s, 3H); HPLC/MS m/z: 488.2 [MH]⁺.

Step 2: Synthesis of 2-Methoxy-4-{3-[6-(2-morpholin-4-yl-ethylamino)-pyridin-3-yl]-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl}-phenol

A solution of 3-[1-(6-fluoro-pyridin-3-yl)-2-methoxy-vinyl]-5-[3-methoxy-4-(4-methoxy-benzyloxy)-phenyl]-pyridin-2-ylamine (50 mg, 0.102 mmol) and 2-morpholin-4-yl-ethylamine (0.6 ml, 4.59 mmol) in anhydrous N-methylpyrrolidone (0.5 ml) was sealed in a Smith process vial. The reaction was run in a Personal ChemistryÂ® microwave reactor at 250Â° C. for 1200 s. The mixture was diluted with a saturated aqueous solution of ammonium chloride (20 ml), the resulting precipitate was filtered off, washed with a saturated aqueous solution of ammonium chloride and water, then dried in vacuo. The solid was transferred to a Smith process vial and dissolved in dioxane (1 ml). Aqueous perchloric acid (70%, 0.1 ml) was added and the reaction was run in a Personal ChemistryÂ® microwave reactor at 150Â° C. for 300 s. The mixture was diluted with (1:1) THF/methanol (10 ml) and treated with 2.0 g of PS-trisamine (Argonaut Technologies, 3.53 mmolÂ·g^âˆ’1) for 1 hour. The resin was filtered off, washed with (1:1) THF/methanol, and the filtrate evaporated to give 75 mg of a dark oil. Purification on mass-triggered preparative HPLC provided 2-Methoxy-4-{3-[6-(2-morpholin-4-yl-ethylamino)-pyridin-3-yl]-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl}-phenol as an off-white fluffy solid (10.7 mg, 21% yield, 0.75 equiv. formate salt). ¹H NMR (DMSO-d₆): Î´ 11.70 (s, 1H), 8.98 (s, 1H), 8.42 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 8.32 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.16 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.08 (s, 0.75H, formate), 7.71 (dd, J=2.5, 9.0 Hz, 1H), 7.63 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 7.19 (d, J=1.5 Hz, 1H), 7.07 (dd, J=2.0, 8.0 Hz, 1H), 6.80 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 6.53 (d, J=9.5 Hz, 1H), 6.32 (t, J=5.5 Hz, 1H), 3.81 (s, 3H), 3.52 (t, J=4.5 Hz, 4H), 3.33 (m, 2H), 2.44 (m, 2H), 2.36 (broad s, 4H); HPLC/MS m/z: 446.2 [MH]⁺.

Method 47

Step 1: Synthesis of trans-4-[5-(5-bromo-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-3-yl)-pyridin-2-ylamino]-cyclohexanol

A solution of 5-bromo-3-(6-chloro-pyridin-3-yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (100 mg, 0.324 mmol), trans 4-aminocyclohexanol (485 mg, 4.21 mmol), and triethyl amine hydrochloride (134 mg, 0.974 mmol) in anhydrous N-methylpyrrolidone (1 ml) was sealed in a Smith process vial. The reaction was run in a Personal ChemistryÂ® microwave reactor at 250Â° C. for 1 hour. The mixture was diluted with water (40 ml), and the resulting precipitate was filtered off, washed with water, and dried in vacuo. Purification by flash chromatography on silica gel with a gradient of methanol/dichloromethane afforded trans-4-[5-(5-bromo5-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-3-yl)-pyridin-2-ylamino]-cyclohexanol as a white solid (82 mg, 66% yield). ¹H NMR (DMSO-d₆): Î´ 12.00 (s, 1H), 8.32 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 8.21-8.32 (m, 2H), 7.75 (d, J=11.5, 1H), 7.67 (dt, J=2.5, 9.0 Hz, 1H), 6.51 (d, J=9.0 Hz, 1H), 6.36 (d, J=7.0 Hz, 1H), 4.55 (d, J=5.0 Hz, 1H), 3.64 (m, 1H), 3.42 (m, 1H), 1.95 (m, 2H), 1.82 (m, 2H), 1.22 (m, 4H); HPLC/MS m/z: 387.0, 389.1 [MH]⁺.

Step 2: Synthesis of trans-4-{3-[6-(4-hydroxy-cyclohexylamino)-pyridin-3-yl]-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl}-2-methoxy-phenol

To trans-4-[5-(5-bromo-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-3-yl)-pyridin-2-ylamino]-cyclohexanol (52 mg, 0.134 mmol), 4-(4-methoxyphenylmethoxy)-3-methoxyphenylboronic acid (65 mg, 0.174 mmol), and (6 mg. 6 mol %) dichlorobis(triphenylphosphino)palladium(II) in a Smith process vial was added a 3:2:1 mixture of acetonitrile water and a 2 M aqueous solution of sodium carbonate 0.9 ml. The reaction was run in a Personal ChemistryÂ® microwave reactor at 165Â° C. for 1200 s. Methanol was added and the mixture was adsorbed on silica gel. Purification by flash chromatography on silica gel with a gradient of methanol/dichloromethane afforded 57 mg of a dark foam. The dark foam was dissolved in dichloromethane (3 ml) and PS-thiophenol resin (150 mg, Argonaut Technologies, 1.41 mmol/g loading) was added, followed by TFA (0.6 ml). The clear suspension was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour, then the resin was filtered off, washed with ethyl acetate, then methanol. The filtrates were evaporated and the residue was treated with saturated aqueous solution of sodium bicarbonate to basic pH and extracted with ethyl acetate. Purification by flash chromotography on silica gel with a gradient of methanol/dichloromethane afforded trans-4-{3-[6-(4-hydroxy-cyclohexylamino)-pyridin-3-yl]-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl}-2-methoxy-phenol as a white solid (18 mg, 41% yield). ¹H NMR (DMSO-d₆): Î´ 11.75 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 9.03 (s, 1H), 8.47 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 8.37 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 8.22 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.73 (dd, J=2.5, 9.0, 1H), 7.66 (d, J=3.0 Hz, 1H), 7.25 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.12 (dd, J=2.0, 8.0 Hz, 1H), 6.86 (d, J=7.5 Hz, 1H), 6.53 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 6.31 (d, J=7.0 Hz, 1H), 4.55 (d, J=4.5 Hz, 1H), 3.86 (s, 3H), 3.65 (m, 1H), 3.43 (m, 1H), 1.95 (m, 2H), 1.82 (m, 2H), 1.21 (m, 4H); HPLC/MS m/z: 431.2 [MH]⁺.

Method 48

Step 1: Synthesis of 2-amino-5-bromonicotinic Acid

25.00 g (0.181 mol) of 2-aminonicotinic acid were dispersed in 100 ml of glacial acetic acid. To this suspension was added a solution of 12.0 ml (0.23 mol) of bromine in 50 ml of glacial acetic acid. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 20 hours. The precipitate formed was filtered off and washed with 100 ml of glacial acetic acid in several portions until the filtrate remained colorless. The crude was dried by suction and crystallized from boiling methanol to afford 38.63 g (0.178 mol, 98% yield) of 2-amino-5-bromonicotinic acid as slightly greenish to off-white crystalline needles. ¹H-NMR (d₆-DMSO) Î´: 8.45 [1H] d, 8.34 [1H] d.; MS: m/z 217 [MH⁺].

Step 2: Synthesis of N-methoxy-N-methyl-2-amino-5-bromonicotinamide

a) Isolated as the Free Base

2-amino-5-bromonicotinic acid (4.000 g, 18.43 mmol), N,O-dimethylhydroxylamine hydrochloride (4.550 g, 46.6 mmol) and PyBOP (1-benzotriazolyloxy-tris(pyrrolidino)phosphonium hexafluorophosphate) (15.00 g, 28.82 mmol) were placed in a nitrogen flushed flask. 150 ml of acetonitrile and 25 ml of di-iso-propylethylamine were added and the mixture was heated to 95Â° C. for 20 hours. The solvent was then evaporated and the residue distributed between 200 ml of chloroform and 100 ml of a 10% solution of citric acid in water. The organic phase was separated and washed with 100 ml of 1 M aqueous sodium hydroxide and dried over sodium sulfate. The solvent was evaporated and the crude material purified by chromatography on silica gel using a non-linear gradient of ethyl acetate and hexane affording 2.193 g (8.436 mmol, 46% yield) of N-methoxy-N-methyl-2-amino-5-bromonicotinamide as an off-white solid. ¹H-NMR (d₆-DMSO) Î´: 8.10 [1H] d, 7.71 [1H] d, 6.35 [2H] s, 3.55 [3H] s, 3.24 [3H] s.; MS: m/z 260 [MH⁺].

b) Isolated as the Hydrochloride Salt

In a nitrogen flushed flask 3.00 g (30.76 mmol) of N,O-dimethylhydroxylamine hydrochloride and 3.53 g (16.27 mmol) of 2-amino-5-bromonicotinic acid are dissolved in a mixture of 350 ml of dichloromethane, and 30 ml of N-methylmorpholine. 12.70 g (24.40 mmol) of PyBOP (1-benzotriazolyloxy-tris(pyrrolidino)phosphonium hexafluorophosphate) is added and the reaction mixture stirred at room temperature for 5 hours. The mixture is then washed with 150 ml of a 2 M solution of sodium hydroxide in water and then twice with 100 ml of a 10% aqueous citric acid solution and dried over sodium sulfate. The solvent is evaporated and the resulting oil is dissolved in 300 ml of ether. The precipitate formed is filtered off and discarded. The clear filtrate is concentrated to about half its volume and diluted with 30-60 ml of dichloromethane. The resulting solution is stirred vigorously and a 1 M solution of hydrogen chloride in anhydrous ether is added until formation of the resulting precipitate is complete. The precipitate is filtered off, washed with ether and dried by suction to afford 3.15 g (12.04 mmol, 74% yield) of N-methoxy-N-methyl-2-amino-5-bromonicotinamide hydrochloride as an off-white to beige-brown powder. ¹H-NMR (d₆-DMSO) Î´: 8.24 [1H] d, 7.97 [1H] d, 3.56 [3H] s, 3.26 [3H] s. MS: m/z 260 [MH⁺]

The hydrochloride can be conveniently converted into the free base by distributing this product between ethyl acetate and 2 M aqueous sodium hydroxide, washing the aqueous layer three times with ethyl acetate, then drying the combined organic phases over sodium sulfate and evaporation and drying of the residue under vacuum.

Step 3: (2-amino-5-bromo-3-pyridyl)-phenylketone

1.00 g (3.38 mmol) of N-methoxy-N-methyl-2-amino-5-bromonicotinamide hydrochloride was suspended in 50 ml of anhydrous THF under nitrogen. The suspension was cooled to âˆ’50Â° C. and 13.5 ml of a 1.0 M solution of phenylmagnesium bromide in ether was added rapidly to afford an orange solution. The mixture was stirred, and slowly warmed to room temperature. The resulting yellow-orange solution was distributed between 75 ml of al 0% aqueous citric acid solution and 200 ml of ethyl acetate. The organic phase was separated and washed with 75 ml of a 10% aqueous citric acid solution and 75 ml of saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate solution. The organic phase was then dried over sodium sulfate and evaporated to afford 985 mg of a yellow crystalline solid. ¹H-NMR (d₆-DMSO) Î´: 8.34 [1H] d, 7.72 [2H] s, 7.70 [1H] d, 7.65 [1H] t(m), 7.63 [2H] d(m), 7.56 [2H] t(m). MS: m/z 277 [MH⁺].

Step 4: Synthesis of 5-bromo-3-(2-methoxy-1-phenylvinyl)-2-pyridylamine

2.600 g (8.77 mmol) of N-methoxy-N-methyl-2-amino-5-bromonicotinamide hydrochloride was suspended in 50 ml of anhydrous THF under nitrogen. The suspension was cooled to âˆ’50Â° C. and 32 ml of a 1.0 M solution of phenylmagnesium bromide in ether was added rapidly to afford an orange solution. The mixture was stirred, allowing to slowly warm to room temperature. After 1.5 hours the resulting solution was distributed between 50 ml of 10% aqueous citric acid solution and 400 ml of ethyl acetate. The organic phase was separated and washed with 50 ml of saturated aqueous sodium bromide solution. The organic phase was then dried over sodium sulfate and evaporated to afford 2.676 g of (2-amino-5-bromo-pyridin-3-yl)-phenyl-methanone as a yellow solid. The isolated solid was dissolved in 50 ml of anhydrous THF under nitrogen and added at room temperature to a solution obtained as follows: At 0Â° C. 3.836 g (19.23 mmol) of potassium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide was dissolved in 100 ml of anhydrous THF under nitrogen. At 0Â° C. 7.214 g (21.04 mmol) of methoxymethyltriphenylphosphonium chloride was added and the resulting mixture stirred at room temperature for 75 minutes.

Upon addition of (2-amino-5-bromo-pyridin-3-yl)-phenyl-methanone to the solution, the resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature for 75 minutes. The reaction mixture was then quenched by addition of a saturated aqueous solution of ammonium chloride and distributed between 100 ml of water and 250 ml of ethyl acetate. The aqueous phase was extracted three times with 100 ml of ethyl acetate, each. The combined organic phases were dried over sodium sulfate and evaporated. The crude material was purified by flash chromatography on silica gel using an ethyl acetate/hexane mixture and a non-linear gradient to afford 1.718 g (5.630 mmol, 64% yield over 2 steps) of 5-bromo-3-(2-methoxy-1-phenylvinyl)-2-pyridylamine. ¹H-NMR (d₆-DMSO) (E)-isomer Î´: 8.00 [1H] d, 7.44 [1H] d, 7.34 [2H] d(m), 7.29 [2H] t(m), 7.18 [1H] t(m), 6.51 [1H] s, 5.50 [2H] s, 3.78 [3H] s; (Z)-isomer Î´: 7.97 [Î±] d, 7.28 [1H] d, 7.27 [2H] t(m), 7.17 [1H] t(m), 7.14 [Î±] d(m), 6.95 [1H] s, 5.60 [2H] s, 3.73 [3H] s. MS: m/z 305 [MH⁺].

Step 5: 5-bromo-3-phenylpyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine

1.093 g (3.582 mmol) of 5-bromo-3-(2-methoxy-1-phenylvinyl)-2-pyridylamine was dissolved in 60 ml of anhydrous 1,4-dioxane. 800 Î¼l of 70% aqueous perchloric acid was added and the mixture heated to 100Â° C. for 13 hours. The mixture was then cooled to room temperature and 3 ml of triethylamine was added and the mixture evaporated to dryness. The resulting crude was crystallized from hot ethanol to afford 763 mg (2.79 mmol, 78% yield) of 5-bromo-3-phenylpyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine as a beige-brown to brown crystalline solid. ¹H-NMR (d₆-DMSO) Î´: 12.19 [1H] s, 8.44 [Î±] d, 8.34 [1H] d, 7.97 [Î±]d, 7.72 [2H] d(m), 7.45 [2H] t, 7.27 [1H] t(m). MS: m/z 273 [MH⁺].

Step 6: Synthesis of 5-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)-3-phenylmethylpyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine

A vial was charged with 50 mg (0.18 mmol) of 5-bromo-3-phenylpyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine, 43 mg (0.24 mmol) of 3,4-dimethoxyphenylboronic acid and 6.5 mg (9.31 mol, 5 mol %) of dichlorobis(triphenylphosphino)palladium(II). To this mixture was added 1 ml of acetonitrile and 1 ml of a 2 M aqueous solution of sodium carbonate. The vial was sealed and irradiated in a Personal ChemistryÂ® microwave reactor with a temperature setting of 165Â° C. for 20 minutes. The resulting mixture was distributed between 75 ml of dichloromethane and 20 ml of a saturated aqueous solution of sodium bicarbonate in water. The organic phase was dried over sodium sulfate and evaporated. The residue obtained was recrystallized from a hot mixture of acetonitrile and ethanol to afford 20 mg (61 Î¼mol, 34% yield) of 5-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)-3-phenylmethylpyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine as a colorless crystalline solid. ¹H-NMR (d₆-DMSO) Î´: 11.97 [1H] s, 8.55 [1H] d, 8.38 [1H] d, 7.90 [1H] d, 7.79 [2H] d, 7.45 [2H] t, 7.30 [1H] d, 7.26 [2H] t(m), 7.06 [1H] d, 3.87 [3H] s, 3.81 [3H] s. MS, m/z: 331 [MH⁺].

Other compounds prepared by Method 48:

TABLE 30Structure

Method 49

Step 1: Synthesis of 5-bromo-3-[4-(tetrahydro-pyran-2-yloxy)-phenyl]-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine

1.092 g (3.77 mmol) of 5-bromo-3-[4-hydroxyphenyl]-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine and 200 mg of para-toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate were dissolved in 180 ml of dichloromethane. 10 ml of dihydro-1H-pyran was added and the mixture was heated to reflux for 4 hours. The mixture was then cooled to room temperature and an excess of triethylamine was added. The mixture was evaporated and 2.50 g (13.11 mmol) of para-toluenesulfonyl chloride was added. The mixture was dissolved in 150 ml of THF and the resulting solution was cooled to 0Â° C. An excess of sodium hydride powder was added until further addition did not result in the formation of more hydrogen gas and the mixture was stirred for 16 hours at room temperature. The resulting mixture was cooled to 0Â° C. and another 2.5 g (13.11 mmol) of para-toluenesulfonyl chloride along with more sodium hydride was added. The mixture was then quenched by addition of a saturated aqueous solution of ammonium chloride and distributed between 500 ml of ether and water. The organic phase was washed three times with a saturated aqueous solution of sodium bicarbonate, dried over sodium sulfate and evaporated. The crude product was purified by flash chromatography on silica gel using a gradient of ethyl acetate in hexanes to afford 1.163 g (2.21 mmol, 58% yield) of 5-bromo-3-[4-(tetrahydro-pyran-2-yloxy)-phenyl]-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine as a pale yellow or pink solid. ¹H-NMR (d₆-DMSO) Î´: 8.53 [1H] d, 8.46 [1H] d, 8.20 [1H] s, 8.03 [2H] d(m), 7.71 [2H] d(m), 7.43 [2H] d, 7.14 [2H] d(m), 5.54 [1H] t, 3.78 [1H] m, 3.57 [1H] m, 2.35 [3H] s, 1.95-1.74 [2H] (m), 1.68-1.52 [4H] (m). MS, m/z: 527 [MH⁺].

Step 2: Synthesis of 4-[5-bromo-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-3-yl]-phenol

575 g (1.09 mmol) of 5-bromo-3-[4-(tetrahydro-pyran-2-yloxy)-phenyl]-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine was dissolved in 250 ml of dichloromethane. To this solution was added 2.50 g (3.53 mmol) of PS-thiophenol (Argonaut Technologies) and 1.5 ml of a 2 M solution of hydrochloric acid in ether. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 hours before the resin was filtered off, washing extensively with dichloromethane. The filtrate was evaporated to afford 389 mg (877 Î¼mol, 81%) of 4-[5-bromo-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-3-yl]-phenol as a pale yellow solid. ¹H-NMR (d₆-DMSO) Î´: 9.67 [1H] s, 8.52 [1H] d, 8.43 [1H] d, 8.11 [1H] s, 8.03 [2H] d, 7.58 [2H] d(m), 7.43 [2H] d, 6.89 [2H] d(m), 2.35 [3H] s. MS, m/z: 443 [MH⁺].

Step 3: Synthesis of 5-bromo-3-[4-(3-piperidin-1-yl-propoxy)-phenyl]-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine Hydrochloride

200 mg (0.45 mmol) of 4-[5-bromo-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-3-yl]-phenol and 1.20 g (2.80 mmol) of PS-triphenylphosphine (2.33 mmolÂ·g^âˆ’1, Argonaut Technologies) were dissolved in 30 ml of anhydrous toluene. 325 mg (2.27 mmol) of 3-(1-piperidinyl)propanol and 300 Î¼l (1.52 mmol) of di-iso-propylazodicarboxylate were added at room temperature and the mixture stirred for 72 hours.

The resin was filtered off and washed repeatedly with dichloromethane and ether. The filtrates were combined and evaporated. The residual beige oil was dissolved in 20 ml of methanol together with an excess of potassium hydroxide. The mixture was stirred for 48 hours at room temperature. The resulting suspension was distributed between dichloromethane and a saturated solution of sodium bicarbonate in water. The phases were separated and the aqueous layer was extracted twice with dichloromethane. The combined organic phases were dried over sodium sulfate and evaporated. The crude was purified by flash chromatography on an amine functionalized silica gel (ISCO RediSepÂ® amine column) using a gradient of ethyl acetate in hexanes. The isolated material was dispersed in 75 ml of ether and the insoluble part filtered off. To the clear filtrate was added an excess of a 2 M solution of hydrochloric acid in ether. The precipitate was filtered off and dried in vacuo to afford 133 mg (0.30 mmol, 66% yield) of 5-bromo-3-[4-(3-piperidin-1-yl-propoxy)-phenyl]-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine hydrochloride as a yellow solid. ¹H-NMR (d₆-DMSO) Î´: 12.17 [1H] (d), 10.68 [1H] s, br, 8.39 [1H] d, 8.33 [1H] d, 7.87 [1H] d, 7.65 [2H] d, 7.03 [2H] d, 4.10 [2H] t, 8.46 [2H] d, 3.18 [2H] m, 2.89 [2H] m, 2.24 [2H] m, 1.89-1.76 [4H] (m), 1.71 [1H] m, 1.39 [1H] m. MS, m/z: 414 [MH⁺].

Step 4: Synthesis of 2-methoxy-4-{3-[4-(3-piperidin-1-yl-propoxy)-phenyl]-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl}-phenol

100 mg (0.24 mmol) of 5-bromo-3-[4-(3-piperidin-1-yl-propoxy)-phenyl]-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine hydrochloride, 120 mg (0.33 mmol) of 2-[3-Methoxy-4-(4-methoxy-benzyloxy)-phenyl]-4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolane and 10 mg (5 mol %) of dichlorobis(triphenylphosphino)palladium(II) were placed in a vial and 1.5 ml of acetonitrile and 1.5 ml of a 2 M aqueous solution of sodium carbonate were added. The mixture was irradiated in a Personal ChemistryÂ® microwave reactor to 165Â° C. for 1200 sec. The resulting mixture was distributed between dichloromethane and a saturated aqueous solution of sodium bicarbonate. The aqueous layer was extracted three times with dichloromethane and the combined organic phases were dried over sodium sulfate and evaporated. The crude product was purified by flash chromatography on amine functionalized silica gel (ISCO RediSepÂ® amine column) using a gradient of ethyl acetate in hexanes. The resulting intermediate was dissolved in 30 ml of dichloromethane and 750 mg (1.06 mmol) of PS-thiophenol (Argonaut Technologies) was added. To this was added 1.5 ml of trifluoroacetic acid and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 hours. The resin was filtered off and washed with dichloromethane. The filtrate was washed with a saturated aqueous solution of sodium bicarbonate, dried over sodium sulfate and evaporated. The residue was triturated with 20 ml of dichloromethane and dried by suction to afford 9 mg (20 mmol, 8% yield) of 2-methoxy-4-{3-[4-(3-piperidin-1-yl-propoxy)-phenyl]-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl}-phenol as a beige powder. ¹H-NMR (d₆-DMSO) Î´: 11.83 [1H] d, 9.06 [1H] s, 8.50 [1H] d, 8.28 [1H] d, 7.76 [1H], 7.67 [2H] d(m), 7.25 [1H] d, 7.12 [1H] dd, 7.01 [2H] d(m), 6.88 [1H] d, 4.02 [2H] t, 3.87 [3H] s, 2.39 [2H] t, 2.34 [4H] (m), br, 1.88 [2H] t, 1.50 [4H] qui, 1.38 [2H] (m). MS, m/z: 458 [MH⁺].

Method 50

Step 1: Synthesis of 4-{5-[3-methoxy-4-hydroxy-phenyl]-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyrazin-3-yl}-phenol

145 mg (0.44 mmol) of 5-bromo-3-[4-hydroxyphenyl]-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine, 240 mg (0.65 mmol) of 2-[3-Methoxy-4-(4-methoxy-benzyloxy)-phenyl]-4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolane and 25 mg (8 mol %) of dichlorobis(triphenylphosphino) palladium(II) were placed in a vial and 1.5 ml of acetonitrile and 1.5 ml of a 2 M aqueous solution of sodium carbonate were added. The mixture was irradiated in a Personal ChemistryÂ® microwave reactor to 165Â° C. for 1200 sec. The resulting mixture was distributed between dichloromethane and a saturated aqueous solution of sodium bicarbonate. The aqueous layer was extracted twice with dichloromethane and the combined organic phases were dried over sodium sulfate and evaporated. The crude was purified by flash chromatography on silica gel using a gradient of ethyl acetate in hexanes. The resulting intermediate was dissolved in 70 ml of dichloromethane and 2.00 g (2.82 mmol) of PS-thiophenol (Argonaut Technologies) was added. To this was added 1 ml of trifluoroacetic acid and the mixture stirred at room temperature for 1 hour. The resin was filtered off and washed with dichloromethane. The filtrate was washed with a saturated aqueous solution of sodium bicarbonate. The phases were separated and the aqueous layer extracted twice with ethyl acetate. All organic phases were combined, dried over sodium sulfate and evaporated. The residue was heated up with acetonitrile, cooled down to room temperature and the supernatant was removed. The residue was dried in vacuo to afford 72 mg (0.22 mmol, 50% yield) of 4-{5-[3-methoxy-4-hydroxy-phenyl]-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyrazin-3-yl}-phenol as a beige powder. ¹H-NMR (d₆-DMSO) Î´: 11.77 [1H] d, 9.37 [1H] s, br, 9.06 [1H] s, br, 8.49 [1H] d, 8.27 [1H] d, 7.69 [1H] d, 7.56 [2H] d(m), 7.25 [1H] d, 7.12 [1H] dd, 6.88 [1H] d, 6.86 [2H] d(m), 3.87 [3H] s. MS, m/z: 333 [MH⁺].

Method 51

Step 1: Synthesis of 5-bromo-3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine

To a flame-dried 100 ml round bottomed flask were added 2-amino-5-bromo-N-methoxy-N-methyl-nicotinamide (661 mg, 2.54 mmol) and anhydrous THF (15 ml). The solution was stirred at âˆ’55Â° C. for 5 minutes under nitrogen, then a 0.5 M solution of 2-methoxyphenyl magnesium bromide in THF (18 ml, 9.0 mmol) was added dropwise over 3 minutes. The resulting solution was allowed to warm to room temperature over 2 hours then quenched by addition of 1 M citric acid. (25 ml). Ethyl acetate (50 ml) was added, and the layers were separated. The aqueous fraction was extracted three times with ethyl acetate, and the combined organic fractions were washed with brine, dried (Na₂SO₄), filtered and concentrated to give a sticky yellow solid. Recrystallization from ethanol provided 619.5 mg (79%) of (2-amino-5-bromo-pyridin-3-yl)-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-methanone as yellow needles. MS m/z: 308 [MH]⁺.

Step 2: Synthesis of 5-bromo-3-[2-methoxy-1-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-vinyl]-pyridin-2-ylamine

Into a 50 ml flame-dried round bottomed flask were added potassium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide (832 mg, 39.2 mmol) and anhydrous THF (10 ml). The slurry was cooled to 0Â° C. for 5 minutes under nitrogen, then (methoxymethyl)triphenylphosphonium chloride (1.53 g, 4.47 mmol) was added. The resulting red-orange solution was stirred at room temperature for 45 min, then a solution of (2-amino-5-bromo-pyridin-3-yl)-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-methanone (601 mg, 1.95 mmol in 10 ml THF) was added all at once. The reaction was stirred under nitrogen for 4 hours then quenched by addition of a saturated aqueous solution of ammonium chloride (25 ml). Ethyl acetate (100 ml) was added, and the layers were separated. The aqueous fraction was extracted three times with ethyl acetate, and the combined organic fractions were washed with brine, dried (Na₂SO₄), filtered and concentrated to give a brown, sticky oil. Purification by flash chromatography on silica gel using a gradient of ethyl acetate in hexanes gave 554 mg (84%) of 5-bromo-3-[2-methoxy-1-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-vinyl]-pyridin-2-ylamine as a mixture of E- and Z-isomers.

Step 3: Synthesis of 5-bromo-3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine

A 50 ml round bottomed flask was charged with 403 mg of 5-bromo-3-[2-methoxy-1-(4-methoxy-phenyl)-vinyl]-pyridin-2-ylamine (1.2 mmol; combined E- and Z-isomers), 1,4-dioxane (5 ml), and 70% aqueous perchloric acid (250 Î¼l). The flask was fitted with a reflux condenser and nitrogen inlet adapter and heated in an oil bath to 100Â° C. for 8 hours. The reaction mixture was concentrated, then treated with 15 ml of a saturated aqueous solution of sodium bicarbonate followed by ethyl acetate (20 ml). The layers were separated, and the aqueous fraction was extracted twice with ethyl acetate. The combined organic fractions were washed with brine, dried (Na₂SO₄), filtered, and concentrated. The residue was triturated with ether to afford 300 mg (82%) of 5-bromo-3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine as a tan powder. ¹H-NMR (d₆-DMSO) Î´=12.16 (br. s, 1H), 8.36 (d, 1H), 8.18 (d, 1H), 7.82 (d, 1H), 7.58 (d, 1H), 7.36 (t, 1H), 7.19 (d, 1H), 7.10 (t, 1H), 3.88 (s, 3H); MS m/z: 303 [MH]⁺.

Step 4: Synthesis of 5-[3-methoxy-4-(4-methoxy-benzyloxy)-phenyl]-3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine

2-[3-Methoxy-4-(4-methoxy-benzyloxy)-phenyl]-4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolane was prepared as follows. To a flame-dried 50 ml round bottomed flask were added 2-methoxy-4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-phenol (1.00 g, 4.00 mmol) and anhydrous DMF (20 ml). Sodium hydride (251 mg, 6.29 mmol; 60% dispersion in mineral oil) was added in three portions, and the suspension was stirred under nitrogen for 30 minutes para-Methoxy benzyl chloride (655 Î¼l, 3.62 mmol) and tetrabutyl ammonium iodide (10 mg, 0.03 mmol) were added, and the reaction mixture was stirred for an additional 16 hours. The reaction mixture was concentrated, then cooled in an ice-bath, and 50 ml of 1 M citric acid was added followed by 100 ml ethyl acetate. The layers were separated, and the aqueous phase was extracted three times with ethyl acetate. The combined organic fractions were washed with brine, dried (Na₂SO₄), filtered and concentrated to give a tan powder. Trituration with diethyl ether gave 1.34 g (91%) of 2-[3-Methoxy-4-(4-methoxy-benzyloxy)-phenyl]-4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolane as a tan powder. ¹H-NMR (CDCl₃) Î´=7.35 (m, 2H), 7.29 (s, 1H), 7.26 (s, 1H), 6.89 (m, 3H), 5.11 (s, 2H), 3.91 (s, 3H), 3.80 (s, 3H), 1.33 (s, 12H); MS m/z: 393 [M+Na]⁺.

A Personal ChemistryÂ® microwave vial (2-5 ml size) was charged with 5-bromo-3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (98 mg, 0.33 mmol), 2-[3-methoxy-4-(4-methoxy-benzyloxy)-phenyl]-4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolane (148 mg, 0.400 mmol), 6.5 mg (9.3 Î¼mol, 5 mol %) of dichlorobis(triphenylphosphino)palladium(II), 1 ml of acetonitrile and 1 ml of a 2 M aqueous solution of sodium carbonate. The vial was sealed, evacuated and purged three times with nitrogen, then irradiated in a Personal ChemistryÂ® microwave reactor with a temperature setting of 150Â° C. for 30 minutes. Ethyl acetate (50 ml) was added, and the layers were separated. The aqueous fraction was extracted three times with ethyl acetate, and the combined organic fractions were washed with brine, dried (Na₂SO₄), filtered and concentrated. Purification by flash chromatography on silica gel using a gradient of ethyl acetate in hexanes gave 75 mg (50%) of 5-[3-methoxy-4-(4-methoxy-benzyloxy)-phenyl]-3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine as a light yellow solid. ¹H-NMR (d₆-DMSO) Î´=12.12 (br.s, 1H), 8.51 (d, 1H), 8.11 (d, 1H), 7.70 (d, 1H), 7.57 (dd, 1H), 7.38 (d, 2H), 7.27 (t, 1H), 7.25 (d, 1H), 7.18 (dd, 1H), 7.11 (m, 2H), 7.02 (t, 1H), 6.95 (d, 2H), 5.03 (s, 2H), 3.85 (s, 3H), 3.82 (s, 3H), 3.75 (s, 3H); MS m/z: 467 [MH]⁺.

Other compounds prepared by Method 51:

TABLE 31Structure *obtained from 7-Bromo-4,5-dihydro-3H-benzo[b]oxepin-2-one (obtained via Baeyer-Villiger reaction).

Method 52

Step 1: Synthesis of 2-Methoxy-4-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenol

To a 50 ml round bottomed flask were added 5-[3-methoxy-4-(4-methoxy-benzyloxy)-phenyl]-3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (48 mg, 0.10 mmol), methylene chloride (2.5 ml) and 396 mg (0.28 mmol) PS-thiophenol (1.41 mmolÂ·g^âˆ’1; Argonaut Technologies). Trifluoroacetic acid (500 Î¼l) was added and the suspension was shaken in a orbital shaker for 1 hour. The yellow reaction mixture was filtered, and the resin was washed three times with dichloromethane and ether, then twice with dichloromethane. The combined filtrate was concentrated to obtain a yellow residue, which was distributed between ethyl acetate and saturated aqueous solution of sodium bicarbonate. The layers were separated, and the aqueous phase was extracted three times with ethyl acetate. The combined organic fractions were washed with brine, dried (Na₂SO₄), filtered and concentrated. Purification by flash chromatography on silica gel using a gradient of ethyl acetate and hexanes gave 31 mg (86%) of 2-methoxy-4-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenol as a light yellow powder. ¹H-NMR (d₆-DMSO) Î´=11.87 (br.s, 1H), 9.04 (br.s, 1H), 8.48 (d, 1H), 8.07 (d, 1H), 7.68 (dd, 1H), 7.57 (dd, 1H), 7.27 (t, 1H), 7.20 (d, 1H), 7.13 (d, 1H), 7.08 (dd, 1H), 7.02 (t, 1H), 6.85 (d, 1H), 3.85 (s, 3H), 3.82 (s, 3H); MS m/z: 347 [MH]⁺.

Other compounds prepared by Method 52:

TABLE 32Structure *(2-amino-5-bromopyridin-3-yl)(2-(trifluoromethoxy)phenyl)methanone and (2-amino-5-bromopyridin-3-yl)(2-(methylthio)phenyl)methanone needed in these cases were prepared by the method illustrated below.

Synthesis of (2-amino-5-bromo-pyridin-3-yl)-(2-trifluoromethoxy-phenyl)-methanone

To a flame-dried 100 ml round bottomed flask was added 1-bromo-2-(trifluoromethoxy)benzene (2.39 g, 9.9 mmol). The flask was fitted with a rubber septum, purged with nitrogen then charged with anhydrous THF (20 ml). The solution was cooled to âˆ’78Â° C. for 10 min, then a 2.5 M solution of n-butyl lithium in hexanes (3.9 ml, 9.8 mmol) was added dropwise over 3 minutes. The resulting solution was stirred at âˆ’78Â° C. for 40 minutes under nitrogen, then a solution of 739 mg (2.84 mmol) of 2-amino-5-bromo-N-methoxy-N-methyl-nicotinamide in 5 ml of THF was added dropwise over 3 minutes. The resulting red solution was allowed to warm to room temperature over 5 hours, then the reaction was quenched by addition of 10 ml of a saturated aqueous solution of ammonium chloride. Ethyl acetate (50 ml) was added, and the layers were separated. The aqueous fraction was extracted three times with ethyl acetate, and the combined organic fractions were washed with brine, dried (Na₂SO₄), filtered and concentrated. Purification by flash chromatography on silica gel using a gradient of ethyl acetate in hexanes gave 530 mg (52%) of (2-amino-5-bromo-pyridin-3-yl)-(2-trifluoromethoxy-phenyl)-methanone as a yellow-orange solid. ¹H-NMR (CDCl₃) Î´=8.29 (d, 1H), 7.60 (m, 2H,), 7.45 (t, 1H), 7.42 (m, 3H), 1.79 (br. s, 2H); MS m/z: 361 [MH]⁺.

Method 53

Step 1: Synthesis of 3-(2-Methoxy-phenyl)-5-[3-methoxy-4-(2-pyrrolidin-1-yl-ethoxy)-phenyl]-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine

To an 8 ml borosilicate reaction vial were added 150 mg (0.350 mmol) of PS-triphenylphosphine (2.33 mmolÂ·g^âˆ’1; Argonaut Technologies) and anhydrous methylene chloride (5 ml). The vial was fitted with a rubber septum and the suspension was stirred for 5 minutes in an ice-bath (0Â° C.). Diisopropyl azodicarboxylate (68 Î¼L, 0.35 mmol) was added dropwise, and the mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature over 20 minutes. To the reaction vial was added 2-pyrrolidin-1-yl-ethanol (54 mg, 0.47 mmol) and 2-methoxy-4-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]phenol (60 mg, 0.17 mmol), and the suspension was stirred at room temperature for 8 hours. The yellow reaction mixture was filtered, and the resin was washed three times with DCM and ether, then twice with DCM. The combined filtrate was concentrated to obtain a yellow residue, which was purified by flash chromatography on amine functionalized silica gel (ISCO RediSepÂ® amine column) using a gradient of ethyl acetate in hexanes to afford 12 mg (8%) of 3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-5-[3-methoxy-4-(2-pyrrolidin-1-yl-ethoxy)-phenyl]-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine as a light yellow powder. ¹H-NMR (d₆-DMSO) Î´=11.87 (br.s, 1H), 8.51 (d, 1H), 8.18 (s, 1H), 8.11 (d, 1H), 7.70 (d, 1H), 7.57 (dd, 1H), 7.27 (m, 1H), 7.24 (d, 1H), 7.17 (dd, 1H), 7.12 (dd, 1H), 7.06 (s, 1H), 7.04 (m, 1H), 4.08 (t, 2H), 3.85 (s, 3H), 3.83 (s, 3H), 2.82 (t, 2H), 2.55 (m, 4H), 1.69 (m, 4H); MS m/z: 444 [MH]⁺.

Other compounds prepared according to Method 53:

TABLE 33Structure

The purification of the compounds in above table was accomplished using reverse phase HPLC (C18; 5-95% gradient solvent A: 0.1% formic acid aq. containing 5% ACN, solvent B: 0.1% formic acid in ACN, with mass-triggered collection).

Method 54

Step 1: Synthesis of 3-(2-Methoxy-phenyl)-5-(1H-pyrrol-2-yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine

To a Personal ChemistryÂ® microwave vial (2-5 ml size) were added 5-bromo-3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (96 mg, 0.32 mmol), 1-N-(BOC)pyrrole-2-boronic acid (103 mg, 0.487 mmol) and 12 mg (5 mol %) of dichloro[1,1â€²-bis(diphenylphoshino)ferrocene]palladium(II) dichloromethane adduct, 1 ml of acetonitrile and 1 ml of a 2 M aqueous solution of sodium carbonate. The vial was sealed, evacuated and purged three times with nitrogen, then irradiated in a Personal ChemistryÂ® microwave reactor with a temperature setting of 150Â° C. for 15 minutes. Ethyl acetate (50 ml) was added, and the layers were separated. The aqueous fraction was extracted three times with ethyl acetate, and the combined organic fractions were washed with brine, dried (Na₂SO₄), filtered and concentrated. Purification by flash chromatography on silica gel using a gradient of ethyl acetate in hexanes gave 28.1 mg (30%) of 3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-5-(1H-pyrrol-2-yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine as a tan solid. ¹H-NMR (d₆-DMSO) Î´=11.78 (br.s, 1H), 11.32 (br. s, 1H), 8.56 (d, 1H), 8.20 (d, 1H), 7.66 (d, 1H), 7.59 (dd, 1H), 7.29 (dd, 1H), 7.12 (d, 1H), 7.07 (t, 1H), 6.83 (m, 1H), 6.49 (m, 1H), 6.10 (m, 1H), 3.82 (s, 3H); MS m/z: 290 [MH]⁺.

Other compounds prepared according to Method 54:

TABLE 34Structure

Method 55

Step 1: Synthesis of 3,4-bis(2-methoxyethoxy)phenylboronic Acid

6.51 g (0.0300 mol) of 4-bromoveratrole is dissolved in 50 ml of dichloromethane. To this suspension is added 37.6 g (0.150 mol) of boron tribromide at 0Â° C. The mixture was stirred for 3 hours at room temperature. Solvents were removed under reduced pressure. The resulting brown oil was dissolved in ethyl acetate and filtered through a pad of silica gel. The filtrate was concentrated to afford 5.45 g of 4-bromo catechol as a light brown oil.

1.89 g (10.0 mmol) of this oil is dissolved in 50 ml of anhydrous DMF and 576 mg (24.0 mmol) of sodium hydride was added. To the resulting solution was added 5.56 g (40.0 mmol) of bromoethyl methyl ether at 0Â° C. over 25 minutes. The mixture was stirred overnight from 0Â° C. to room temperature. 5 ml of water was added to quench the reaction. After removal of the solvent, the black oily residue was adsorbed on celite, and the resulting solid washed with ethyl acetate. The filtrate was then concentrated to give 3,4-bis(2-methoxyethoxy)bromobenzene as a yellowish solid.

The solid was dissolved in anhydrous THF and the resulting solution cooled to âˆ’78Â° C. To the solution was added 4.8 ml of a 2.5 M solution of n-butyl lithium in hexanes at âˆ’78Â° C. over 10 minutes. The mixture was then stirred for 30 minutes at âˆ’78Â° C. 2.77 ml (12 mmol) of tri-iso-propyl borate was then added. The reaction was stirred for another 30 minutes at âˆ’78Â° C. and then warmed to 0Â° C. over 2 hours. The mixture was then cooled to âˆ’20Â° C. and 10 ml of aqueous 2 N hydrochloric acid was added to the mixture. After stirring for 20 minutes, the reaction mixture was transferred to a separating funnel and extracted three times with 100 ml of ethyl acetate. The combined organic layers were dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated to afford 2.85 g of a brown oil. The oil was triturated with ether to afford 625 mg (2.44 mmol; 8% overall yield) of 3,4-bis(2-methoxyethoxy)phenylboronic acid as a colorless powder. ¹H-NMR (d₄-methanol) Î´: 7.36 [2H] m, 7.23 [2H] m, 6.98 [1H] d (7.5 Hz), 6.94 [1H] d (8.5 Hz), 4.16 [4H] m, 3.75 [4H] m, 3.43 [3H] s, 3.42 [3H] s. MS m/z: 271.1 [MH⁺], 293.1 [MNa⁺].

Step 2: Synthesis of 5-[3,4-Bis-(2-methoxy-ethoxy)-phenyl]-3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine

A vial is charged with 81.0 mg (0.300 mmol) of 3,4-bis(2-methoxyethoxy)phenylboronic acid, 60.6 mg (0.200 mmol) of 5-bromo-3-(2-methoxyphenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine and 8.3 mg (5 mol %) of bis(triphenylphosphino)palladium(II)-dichloride. 1.5 ml of acetonitrile and 1.5 ml of a 2 M aqueous solution of sodium carbonate were added and the mixture irradiated in a Personal ChemistryÂ® microwave reactor to 150Â° C. for 15 minutes. The mixture was extracted with three times with 15 ml of ethyl acetate. The combined organic layers were dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate and concentrated. The dark brown residue (187 mg) was purified by flash chromatography on silicon using a gradient of ethyl acetate in hexane to give 57 mg of 5-[3,4-bis-(2-methoxy-ethoxy)-phenyl]-3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine as a colorless powder. ¹H-NMR (d₄-methanol) Î´: 8.41 [1H] d (2.0 Hz), 8.17 [1H] d (2.0 Hz), 7.63 [1H] s, 7.56 [1H] dd (1.5 Hz, 7.5 Hz), 7.30 [1H] m, 7.26 [1H] d (2.5 Hz), 7.20 [1H] dd (2.3 Hz, 8.3 Hz), 7.11 [1H] d (8 Hz), 7.08 [1H] d (8.5 Hz), 7.05 [1H] dt (1 Hz, 7.5 Hz) 4.24 [2H] m, 4.19 [2H] m, 3.77 [4H] m, 3.44 [3H] s, 3.43 [3H] s. MS m/z: 449.2 [MH⁺], 471.1.1 [MNa⁺].

Method 56

Step 1: Synthesis of 3,4-bis(2-morpholinoethoxy)phenylboronic Acid

864 mg (36.0 mmol) of sodium hydride was added to a suspension of 900 mg (5.0 mmol) of 4-bromocatechol and 3.72 g (20.0 mmol) of 2-chloroethylmorpholine hydrochloride in 50 ml of anhydrous DMF at 0Â° C. over 25 minutes. The mixture was stirred for 3 days at room temperature. 5 ml water was added to quench the reaction. After removal of the solvent, the black oily residue was adsorbed onto celite and the resulting solid washed with ethyl acetate. The filtrate was then concentrated to give 0.75 g (1.81 mmol; 36% yield) of 3,4-bis(2-morpholinoethoxy)bromobenzene as a hygroscopic yellow solid. ¹H-NMR (CD₃OD) Î´: 8.42 [1H] d (2.0 Hz), 8.18 [1H] d (1.5 Hz), 7.64 [1H] s, 7.56 [1H] dd (1.5 Hz, 7.5 Hz), 7.30 [1H] dt (1.5 Hz, 7.5 Hz), 7.25 [1H] d (2.5 Hz), 7.19 [1H] dd (2.5 Hz, 8.5 Hz), 7.12 [1H] d (8.5 Hz), 7.08 [1H] d (8.5 Hz), 7.05 [1H] dt (1 Hz, 7.5 Hz) 4.25 [2H] t (5.75 Hz), 4.20 [2H] t (5.5 Hz), 3.72 [8H] m, 2.84 [4H] m, 2.66 [8H] m. MS: 559.2 [MH⁺].

2.4 ml of a 2.5 M solution of n-butyl lithium in hexanes was added at âˆ’78Â° C. to a solution of 2.08 g (5.0 mmol) 3,4-bis(2-morpholinoethoxy)bromobenzene in THF over 10 minutes. The mixture was stirred for 30 minutes at âˆ’78Â° C. before 1.39 ml (6.0 mmol) of tri-n-isopropyl borate was added. The mixture was stirred for another 30 minutes at âˆ’78Â° C. and then warmed to 0Â° C. over 2 hours. The mixture was cooled to âˆ’20Â° C. and 5 ml of aqueous 2 N hydrochloric acid was added. After stirring for 20 minutes the reaction mixture was transferred to a separating funnel and extracted three times with 100 ml of ethyl acetate. The combined organic layers were dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated to give a brown oil. The oil was titrated with ether to give 925 mg of a very hygroscopic dark brown oil, which was about 50% pure by LC/MS and used directly without further purification.

Step 2: Synthesis of 5-[3,4-bis-(2-morpholin-4-yl-ethoxy)-phenyl]-3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine

A vial is charged with 228 mg (approx. 0.3 mmol of pure boronic acid) of the crude boronic acid, 60.6 mg (0.20 mmol) of 5-bromo-3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine and 8.3 mg (5 mol %) of dichlororbis(triphenylphosphino)palladium(II). 1.5 ml of acetonitrile and 1.5 ml of a 2 M aqueous solution of sodium carbonate were added and the mixture irradiated in a Personal ChemistryÂ® microwave reactor to 150Â° C. for 15 minutes. The resulting mixture was extracted three times with 15 ml of ethyl acetate and the combined organic layers were dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate and concentrated. The resulting dark brown residue was purified by flash chromatography on silica gel using a gradient of ethyl acetate in hexanes to give 9.4 mg (16 Î¼mol; 8% yield) of 5-[3,4-bis-(2-morpholin-4-yl-ethoxy)-phenyl]-3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine as a light yellow solid. ¹H-NMR (d₄-methanol) Î´: 8.42 [1H] d (2.0 Hz), 8.18 [1H] d (1.5 Hz), 7.64 [1H] s, 7.56 [1H] dd (1.5 Hz, 7.5 Hz), 7.30 [1H] dt (1.5 Hz, 7.5 Hz), 7.25 [1H] d (2.5 Hz), 7.19 [1H] dd (2.5 Hz, 8.5 Hz), 7.12 [1H] d (8.5 Hz), 7.08 [1H] d (8.5 Hz), 7.05 [1H] dt (1 Hz, 7.5 Hz) 4.25 [2H] t (5.75 Hz), 4.20 [2H] t (5.5 Hz), 3.72 [8H] m, 2.84 [4H] m, 2.66 [8H] m. MS m/z: 559.2 [MH⁺].

Method 57

Step 1: Synthesis of 2-Amino-5-bromo-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide

Into an 15 mL high pressure glass vial (with Teflon screw cap) were added 5-bromoisatoic anhydride (0.401 g, 1.66 mmol), DMAP (20 mg, 0.16 mmol), and dimethylamine (2 M in THF; 5.0 mL, 10.0 mmol). The vial was sealed and placed in an oil bath at 70Â° C. for 8 h after which it was concentrated under vacuum. The crude product was dissolved in EtOAc and washed 2Ã— with water followed by brine. The organic phase was dried (Na₂SO₄), filtered and concentrated to afford 0.428 g of 2-Amino-5-bromo-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide as a pink solid, which was used directly for the next step. ¹H-NMR (500 MHz, d₆-DMSO) Î´=7.19 (dd, J=2.0, 8.5 Hz, 1H), 7.08 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 6.63 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 5.31 (br. s, 2H), 2.89 (br. s, 6H). MS: m/z 198/200 [Câ• O⁺].

Step 2: Synthesis of 2-Amino-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide

Into a 5 mL Personal Chemistry microwave reaction vial were added 3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (0.167 g, 0.331 mmol), 2-amino-5-bromo-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide (0.088 g, 0.364 mmol), 1,1â€²-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocenepalladium(II)-dichloride dichloromethane adduct (14 mg, 0.017 mmol), acetonitrile (5 mL) and saturated aqueous NaHCO₃(5 mL). The vial was sealed, purged with N₂, and irradiated in a Personal Chemistry Optimizer at 90Â° C. for 5 min. The layers were separated, and the aqueous phase was extracted 3Ã— with EtOAc. The combined organic phase was treated with brine, dried (Na₂SO₄), filtered and adsorbed onto silica gel. The crude material was purified by silica gel chromatography in an EtOAc (containing 10% MeOH) and hexane gradient. The purified material was dissolved in a MeOH/acetone solution (5 mL) and 200 uL of a 50% KOH solution was added and the solution was stirred at room temperature for 3 hours. The reaction was quenched by adding 1 M citric acid dropwise until pH=5. The quenched reaction mixture was partitioned between EtOAc and water, the layers were separated, and the aqueous phase was extracted 2Ã— with EtOAc. The combined organic phase was treated with brine, dried (Na₂SO₄), filtered and adsorbed onto silica gel. The material was purified on amino silica in an EtOAc (containing 10% MeOH) and hexane gradient to afford the title compound as a pale yellow powder (13.5 mg, 11% yield). ¹H-NMR (500 MHz, d₆-DMSO) Î´=11.80 (br. s, 1H), 8.42 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.02 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.68 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 7.58 (dd, J=1.5, 6.0 Hz, 1H), 7.44 (dd, J=2.0, 6.0 Hz, 1H), 7.31 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.27 (t, J=7.5 Hz, 1H), 7.12 (d, J=7.5 Hz, 1H), 7.04 (t, J=7.0 Hz, 1H), 6.80 (d, J=9.0 Hz, 1H), 5.26 (s, 2H), 3.80 (s, 3H), 2.95 (s, 6H). MS: m/z 387.1 [MH⁺].

Other compounds prepared by Method 57:

TABLE 35Structure

Method 58

Step 1: Synthesis of 7-[3-(2-Methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-3-methyl-3,4-dihydro-2H-benzo[1,2,4] thiadiazine 1,1-dioxide

Into an 8 mL screw-cap vial were added 2-Amino-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-benzenesulfonamide (0.0492 g, 0.090 mmol), acetaldehyde (200 Î¼L, 3.54 mmol), and acetonitrile (700 Î¼L). The vial was sealed and placed in a heat block at 90Â° C. for 1 h. The reaction mixture was concentrated under vacuum then dissolved in THF (1 mL), and 500 Î¼L of 50% w/w KOH aq. was added to the resulting solution. After 2 h, the reaction was quenched by addition of glacial acetic acid then concentrated under vacuum to afford a brown residue. Purification by flash chromatography on SiO₂gel, eluting with ethyl acetate and hexanes (0-100% gradient) afforded the title compound as a yellow powder (23.3 mg, 61%). ¹H-NMR (500 MHz, d₆-DMSO) Î´=11.88 (br.s, 1H), 8.44 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.04 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.71 (m, 2H), 7.68 (dd, J=2.5, 8.6 Hz, 1H), 7.59 (dd, J=2.5, 8.5 Hz, 1H), 7.54 (br.d, 1H), 7.29 (m, 1H), 7.26 (br.s, 1H), 7.12 (dd, J=8.5, 1 Hz, 1H), 7.05 (t, J=7.5 Hz, 1H), 6.89 (d, J=9.0 Hz, 1H), 4.86 (m, 1H), 3.81 (s, 3H), 1.44 (d, J=5.5.0 Hz, 3H). MS: m/z 421.1 [MH⁺].

Other compounds prepared by Method 58:

TABLE 36Structure

Method 59

Step 1: Synthesis of 5-bromo-2-diethylamino-nicotinic Acid

880 mg (4.00 mmol) of 5-bromo-2-fluoronicotinic acid was dissolved in 3 ml of acetonitrile. 1.0 ml (9.7 mmol) of diethylamine was added and the resulting mixture heated to 80Â° C. for 18 h. The mixture was evaporated and the resulting brown oil used without further purification. MS: m/z 273 [MH⁺].

Step 2: Synthesis of 2-diethylamino-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(tofuene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-nicotinic acid

230 mg (0.45 mmol) of 3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine, 137 mg (0.50 mmol) of 5-bromo-2-diethylamino-nicotinic acid and 16 mg (23 Î¼mol) of 1,1â€²-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocenepalladium(II)-dichloride dichloromethane adduct were dissolved in a mixture of 2.5 ml of acetonitrile and 2 ml of a 2 M aqueous solution of sodium carbonate. The reaction mixture was heated for 1.5 h to 100Â° C.

The resulting mixture was distributed between brine and ethyl acetate and the aqueous phase extracted three times with ethyl acetate. The combined organic phases were washed with brine, dried over sodium sulfate and evaporated. The crude was then purified by flash chromatography on silica gel using a gradient of ethyl acetate and a solvent mixture of ethyl actetae, dichloromethane and methanol (4:4:1) containing 1% v/v of 35% w/w aqueous ammonia solution to afford 150 mg of 2-diethylamino-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-nicotinic acid as a brown solid. MS: m/z 571 [MH⁺].

Step 3: Synthesis of 2-diethylamino-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-nicotinamide

40 mg (0.07 mmol) of 2-diethylamino-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-nicotinic acid was dissolved in 1.5 ml of dichloromethane. 40 mg (0.11 mmol) of O-(7-azabenzotriazol-1-yl)-N,N,Nâ€²,Nâ€²-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate, 55 Î¼l (0.11 mmol) of 2 M dimethylamine in THF, and 1 ml of DMF were added and the resulting mixture was stirred for 1 h. The solvent was completely evaporated.

The residue was dissolved in a mixture of methanol and DMSO and 1.1 ml of 2 M aqueous sodium hydroxide added in three portions over the period of 24 h. After stirring at ambient temperature for 48 h total the mixture was evaporated and the residue acidified by addition of glacial acetic acid and the resulting material purified by mass triggered reverse phase HPLC to afford 6.8 mg (14 Î¼mol; 20% yield) of 2-diethylamino-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-nicotinamide as a brown solid. ¹H-NMR (d₆-DMSO): Î´11.94 (s, 1H), 8.52 (d, 1H), 8.50 (d, 1H), 8.14 (d, 1H), 7.73 (d, 1H), 7.73 (s, 1H), 7.63 (dd, 1H), 7.29 (ddd, 1H), 7.13 (d(d), 1H), 7.05 (dd(d), 1H), 3.83 (s, 3H), 3.3.46-3.28 (m, 4H), 3.00 (s, 3H), 2.87 (s, 3H), 1.10 (t, 6H). MS: m/z 444 [MH⁺].

Other compounds prepared by Method 59:

TABLE 37Structure

Method 60

Step 1: Synthesis of 5-bromo-2-[4-(2-hydroxy-ethyl)-piperazin-1-yl]-nicotinic Acid

500 mg (4.00 mmol) of 5-bromo-2-fluoronicotinic acid was dissolved in 3 ml of acetonitrile. 620 Î¼l of 1-(2-hydroxyethyl)piperazine was added and the resulting mixture heated to 70Â° C. for 24 h. The mixture was distributed between ethyl acetate and water containing 35% w/w aqueous ammonia solution to adjust the pH to about 12. The aqueous phase is extracted twice with ethyl acetate. The aqueous phase was then lyophylized to afford a beige residue.

The residue was dissolved in a mixture of dichloromethane, acetonitrile and methanol and treated with an excess of MP-isocyanate resin (Argonaut TechnologiesÂ®). The resin was then filtered off and the filtrate evaporated to afford 632 mg (1.91 mmol; 84% yield) of 5-bromo-2-[4-(2-hydroxy-ethyl)-piperazin-1-yl]-nicotinic acid as a beige, partially crystalline residue. MS: m/z 330 [MH⁺].

Step 2: Synthesis of 5-bromo-2-[4-(2-hydroxy-ethyl)-piperazin-1-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-nicotinamide

630 mg (1.90 mmol) of 5-bromo-2-[4-(2-hydroxy-ethyl)-piperazin-1-yl]-nicotinic acid was suspended in 50 ml of dichloromethane. 6 ml of 2 M dimethylamine in THF and 850 mg (1.63 mmol) of benzotriazol-1-yl-oxytripyrrolidinophosphonium hexafluorophosphate were added and the resulting mixture was stirred for 18 h at ambient temperature. The resulting mixture was diluted with dichloromethane and washed with water. The aqueous phase was extracted with dichloromethane and the organic phases were combined, dried over sodium sulfate and evaporated to afford crude 5-bromo-2-[4-(2-hydroxy-ethyl)-piperazin-1-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-nicotinamide as a pale brown oil containing tris(pyrrolidinyl)phosphoramidate as a contaminant. MS: m/z 357 [MH⁺].

Step 3: 2-[4-(2-hydroxy-ethyl)-piperazin-1-yl]-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-nicotinamide

50 mg (99 Î¼mol) of 3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine, 215 mg of the crude 5-bromo-2-[4-(2-hydroxy-ethyl)-piperazin-1-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-nicotinamide obtained from step 2 and 5 mg (6 Î¼mol) of 1,1â€²-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocenepalladium(II)-dichloride dichloromethane adduct were dissolved in a mixture of 3 ml of acetonitrile and 2 ml of a saturated aqueous solution of sodium bicarbonate. The reaction mixture was heated to 120Â° C. for 4 h.

The resulting mixture was distributed between water and ethyl acetate and the aqueous phase extracted twice with ethyl acetate. The combined organic phases were washed with brine, dried over sodium sulfate and evaporated. The residue was dissolved in methanol and 400 Î¼l of 50% w/v aqueous potassium hydroxide was added. The resulting mixture was left at ambient temperature for 3 h. The crude solution was directly purified by mass triggered reverse phase HPLC purification to afford 14.7 mg (291 mmol; 29% yield) of 2-[4-(2-hydroxy-ethyl)-piperazin-1-yl]-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-nicotinamide as a colorless solid. ¹H-NMR (d₆-DMSO): Î´ 11.93 (s, 1H), 8.59 (d, 1H), 8.52 (d, 1H), 8.17 (d, 1H), 7.85 (d, 1H), 7.74 (s, 1H), 7.63 (dd, 1H), 7.29 (ddd, 1H), 7.12 (d(d), 1H), 7.05 (dd(d), 1H), 3.83 (s, 3H), 3.55 (m, 2H), 3.4-3.3 (m, 4H), 3.01 (s, 3H), 2.88 (s, 3H), 2.58 (m, 4H), 2.54-2.46 (m, 2H) MS: m/z 501 [MH⁺].

Other compounds prepared by Method 60:

TABLE 38Structure

Method 61

Step 1: Synthesis of 5-bromo-3-fluoro-2-hydroxybenzoic Acid Methyl Ester

5.00 g (32 mmol) of 3-fluorosalicylic acid was suspended in 50 ml of glacial acetic acid. 2.2 ml of bromine were added and the mixture was stirred at ambient temperature for 48 h. The resulting suspension was diluted with 500 ml of water and the precipitate filtered off and dried by suction to afford 9.394 g of 5-bromo-3-fluoro-2-hydroxybenzoic acid as an ivory solid.

4.08 g (13.9 mmol max.) of the crude was dissolved in a mixture of 70 ml of toluene and 30 ml of methanol. 9 ml of a 2 M solution of trimethylsilyl diazomethane was added until the mixture remains yellow. 200 Î¼l of glacial acetic acid was added until the mixture was colorless and the solvent was evaporated to afford 3.037 g (12.20 mmol; 88% over both steps) of 5-bromo-3-fluoro-2-hydroxybenzoic acid methyl ester. ¹H-NMR (d₆-DMSO): Î´ 10.57 (s, br., 1H), 7.83 (dd, 1H), 7.67 (d(d), 1H), 3.90 (s, 3H).

Step 2: Synthesis of 3-fluoro-2-hydroxy-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-benzoic Acid Methyl Ester

600 mg (1.19 mmol) of 3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine, 509 mg (2.04 mmol) of 5-bromo-3-fluoro-2-hydroxybenzoic acid methyl ester and 43 mg (60 Î¼mol) of 1,1â€²-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocenepalladium(II)-dichloride dichloromethane adduct were dissolved in a mixture of 10 ml of toluene and 10 ml of a saturated aqueous solution of sodium bicarbonate. The reaction mixture was heated to 70Â° C. for 2.5 h and then to 90Â° C. for an additional 1.5 h.

The crude was distributed between dichloromethane and a saturated aqueous solution of sodium bicarbonate. The aqueous phase was extracted three times with dichloromethane and the combined organic phases were dried over sodium sulfate and evaporated. The crude was purified by flash chromatography on silica gel using a gradient of ethyl acetate in hexanes to afford 427 mg (0.79 mmol; 66% yield) of 3-fluoro-2-hydroxy-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-benzoic acid methyl ester. MS: m/z 547 [MH⁺].

Step 3: Synthesis of 3-fluoro-2-hydroxy-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide

22 mg (40 Î¼mol) of 3-fluoro-2-hydroxy-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-benzoic acid methyl ester was dissolved in 2 ml of a 2 M solution of dimethylamine in THF. The solution was heated to 100Â° C. in a closed vial for 24 h and then concentrated. The residue was dissolved in 2 ml of methanol and 350 Î¼l of 50% w/v aqueous potassium hydroxide added. The mixture was left at ambient temperature for 1 h and then neutralized by addition of glacial acetic acid. The crude was directly purified by mass triggered reverse phase HPLC purification to afford 6.0 mg (14 Î¼mol; 37% yield) of 3-fluoro-2-hydroxy-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide as an ivory solid. ¹H-NMR (d₆-DMSO): Î´11.91 (s, 1H), 8.51 (d, 1H), 8.14 (d, 1H), 7.73 (d, 1H), 7.64 (d, 1H), 7.62 (dd, 1H), 7.32-7.25 (m, 2H), 7.14 (d, 1H), 7.05 (m, 1H), 3.82 (s, 3H), 2.99 (s, 3H), 2.87 (s, 3H). MS: m/z 406 [MH⁺].

Other compounds prepared by Method 61:

TABLE 39Structure

Method 62

Step 1: Synthesis of (S)-2-(2-amino-propionylamino)-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide Hydrochloride

Into a Scintillation vial were added BOC-Ala-OH (50.8 mg, 0.268 mmol), iPr₂NEt (50 Î¼L, 0.41 mmol) and methylene chloride. The solution was cooled in an ice-water bath for 3 min, then trimethylacetyl chloride (33 Î¼L, 0.40 mmol) was added. The solution was stirred at 0Â° C. for 45 min then 2-amino-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide (96.9 mg, 0.179 mmol) was added, the ice-bath was removed, and the solution was stirred at rt for 2 d. The reaction mixture was concentrated then re-dissolved in MeOH (1 mL), and cooled to 0Â° C. and treated with 50 Î¼L 50% (w/w) aqueous KOH for 30 min or until Ts-removal was complete. The reaction was quenched by addition of 500 Î¼L glacial acetic acid and then concentrated in vacuo. The crude residue was dissolved in EtOAc and filtered (to remove KOAc), then purified by flash column chromatography on SiO₂gel eluting with a 0 to 100 [(10% MeOH in EtOAc):hexanes] gradient. The purified BOC-protected compound was then dissolved in 1 mL methanol and treated with 4M HCl/1,4-dioxane solution (2 mL) for 2.5 h. Lyophilization afforded 149.2 mg of the title compound as a yellow powder. ¹H-NMR (500 MHz, d₆-DMSO) Î´12.01 (br.s, 1H), 10.16 (br.s, 1H), 8.57 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.26 (app.d, 2H), 8.21 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.80 (dd, J=2, 8 Hz, 1H), 7.74 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 7.65 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 7.60 (dd, J=1.5, 7.5 Hz, 1H), 7.55 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 7.27 (t, J=7 Hz, 1H), 7.11 (d, 8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.04 (t, J=6 Hz, 1H), 4.05 (m, 1H), 3.80 (s, 3H), 2.97, 2.85 (br.s, 6H), 1.41 (d, J=7 Hz, 3H); MS: m/z 558.2 [M+H⁺].

Method 63

Step 1: Synthesis of 2-isocyanato-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide

Into a 50 mL round bottomed flask were added 2-amino-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide (500 mg, 0.926 mmol), methylene chloride (10 mL) and sat'd NaHCO3 (10 mL). The solution was cooled in an ice-water bath for 5 min then phosgene (2.5 mL, 20% w/w solution in toluene, Fluka) was added to the lower (organic) layer. The solution was stirred rapidly and the ice-bath was removed. The reaction mixture was stirred rapidly for 1 h, then the layers were separated and the aqueous phase was extracted 2Ã— with methylene chloride. The combined organic fraction was treated with NaSO₄, filtered and concentrated. The residue was triturated with anhydrous ether to give a light yellow/tan powder, which was used directly in the next step. Note: treatment of a small aliquot of the title compound with excess dimethylamine (2M, THF) followed by HPLC analysis provided evidence of isocyanate formation via transformation to the corresponding N,N-dimethyl urea; m/z=612.2 (M+H⁺).

Step 2: Synthesis of {2-dimethylcarbamoyl-4-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenyl}-carbamic Acid Isopropyl Ester

Into a 3 mL reaction vial were added 2-isocyanato-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide (30 mg, 0.053 mmol), methylene chloride (1 mL), iPr₂EtN (21 Î¼L, 0.060 mmol), and isopropyl alcohol (50 Î¼L, 6.5 mmol). The solution was stirred at room temperature for at least 12 h and monitored by HPLC. The reaction mixture was concentrated then re-dissolved in MeOH (1 mL), and cooled to 0Â° C. and treated with 100 Î¼L 50% (w/w) aqueous KOH for 30 min or until Ts-removal was complete. The reaction was quenched by addition of 500 Î¼L glacial acetic acid and then concentrated in vacuum. Purification by mass-triggered HPLC (formic acid ACN/H₂O gradient) followed by lyophilization provided 12.2 mg of the title compound as a white powder. ¹H-NMR (500 MHz, d₆-DMSO) Î´=11.91 (br.s, 1H), 8.96 (br.s., 1H), 8.53 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.15 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.73 (m, 3H), 7.60 (d, J=9.0 Hz, 1H), 7.59 (s, 1H), 7.29 (dd, J=1.5, 7.2 Hz, 1H), 7.12 (d, J=7 Hz, 1H), 7.04 (t, J=7 Hz, 1H), 4.84 (m, 1H), 3.81 (s, 3H), 2.97, 2.92 (br s, 6H), 1.23 (d, J=6, 6H); MS: m/z 473.1 [M+H⁺].

Method 64

Step 1: Synthesis of morpholine-4-carboxylic Acid {2-dimethylcarbamoyl-4-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]phenyl}-amide

Into a 3 mL reaction vial were added 2-isocyanato-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide (48 mg, 0.085 mmol), methylene chloride (1 mL) and morpholine (40 Î¼L, 0.455 mmol, pre-treated with molecular sieves). The solution was stirred at room temperature for at least 12 h and monitored by HPLC. The reaction mixture was concentrated then re-dissolved in MeOH (1 mL), and cooled to 0Â° C. and treated with 100 Î¼L 50% (w/w) aqueous KOH for 30 min or until Ts-removal was complete. The reaction was quenched by addition of 500 Î¼L glacial acetic acid and then concentrated in vacuum. Purification by Mass-triggered HPLC (formic acid ACN/H₂O gradient) followed by lyophilization provided 10.4 mg of the title compound as a white powder. ¹H-NMR (500 MHz, d₆-DMSO) 11.91 (br.s, 1H), 8.73 (br.s., 1H), 8.52 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.14 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.71 (m, 3H), 7.80 (s, 1H), 7.58 (d, J=9.0 Hz, 1H), 7.28 (app t, J=7.5 Hz, 1H), 7.11 (d, J=7 Hz, 1H), 7.03 (t, J=7 Hz, 1H), 3.80 (s, 3H), 3.60 (m, 4H), 3.51 (m, 4H), 2.96 (br s, 6H); MS: m/z 500.1 [M+H⁺].

Other compounds produced by the methods of the present invention are provided in Table 40 below.

TABLE 40Structure

Method 65

Synthesis of tetra-n-butyl 2-amino-5-bromo-3-fluoro-benzoate

To a 250 mL round bottomed flask were added 2-amino-3-fluoro-benzoic acid (0.99 g, 6.4 mmol), THF (10 mL) and dichloromethane (50 mL). The solution was cooled in an ice bath for 5 min, then tetra-n-butylammonium tribromide (3.75 g, 7.78 mmol) was added in three portions over 1 min. The reaction mixture was stirred for 3.5 h, then concentrated in vacuo. Water was added to obtain a precipitate, which was collected, washed with water and dried under high vacuum to provide 2.45 g (81%) of 2-tetra-n-butyl 2-amino-5-bromo-3-fluoro-benzoate. ¹H NMR (d₆-DMSO) Î´ 7.628 (dd, J=2.5, 1.5 Hz, 1H), 7.533 (dd, J=11, 2.5 Hz, 1H), 3.153 (m, 8H), 1.558 (m, 8H), 1.307 (m, 8H), 0.926 (t, J=7.5 Hz, 12H; MS: m/z 231.9+233.9 (Mâˆ’H⁺).

Method 66

Step 1: Synthesis of 2-amino-3-chloro-5-iodo-benzoic acid methyl ester

To a round bottom flask was combined 1.00 g (3.61 mmol) of 2-amino-5-iodo-benzoic acid methyl ester and 18.0 mL isopropyl alcohol. To the solution was added 541 mg (4.05 mmol) of N-chlorosuccinimide and the solution was heated at 80Â° C. in an oil bath for 2.25 hours. The solution was cooled to room temperature and concentrated. The resulting residue was dissolved in ethyl acetate and an aqueous solution of sodium bisulfite was added. The organic layer was washed three times with water and brine, then dried over sodium sulfate. The organic layer was concentrated to dryness and recrystallized from hexanes to afford 809 mg (2.60 mmol, 72% yield) of 2-amino-3-chloro-5-iodo-benzoic acid methyl ester as tan-orange crystals. ¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d₆) Î´ 7.96 (d, 1H), 7.74 (d, 1H), 6.86 (s, br., 2H), 3.82 (s, 3H).

Step 2: Synthesis of 2-amino-3-chloro-5-iodo-benzoic Acid

To a solution of 526 mg (1.69 mmol) of 2-amino-3-chloro-5-iodo-benzoic acid methyl ester in 9.0 mL methanol was added 474 mg of potassium hydroxide (8.44 mmol). The solution was stirred at room temperature for 18 hours. An additional 474 mg (8.44 mmol) of potassium hydroxide was added and the solution was heated in an oil bath at 45Â° C. for 4.5 hours. The solution was acidified to pH=3 by a dropwise addition of 1N aqueous hydrochloric acid. The resulting precipitate was collected by vacuum filtration. The solid was dissolved in methanol and concentrated to dryness. Acetone was added to the residue and the insoluble white precipitates were filtered off. The filtrate was concentrated to afford 500 mg (1.68 mmol, quantitative yield) of 2-amino-3-chloro-5-iodo-benzoic acid as a brown powder. ¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d₆) Î´ 7.95 (d, 1H), 7.76 (d, 1H), 6.91 (s, br., 2H); MS: m/z 295.8 (Mâˆ’H⁺).

Step 3: Synthesis of 2-amino-3-chloro-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-benzoic Acid

400 mg (0.793 mmol) of 3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine, 32 mg (0.040 mmol) of dichloro[1,1â€²-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene]palladium(II) dichloromethane adduct and 259 mg (0.872 mmol) of 2-amino-3-chloro-5-iodo-benzoic acid were placed in a microwave vial. To the vial was added 3 mL of acetonitrile and 2 mL of a saturated aqueous solution of sodium bicarbonate. The vial was sealed and purged with nitrogen and evacuated with vacuum (3Ã—). The vial was irradiated in a microwave at 90Â° C. for 400 seconds. The resulting mixture was distributed between ethyl acetate and brine. The aqueous layer was extracted three times with ethyl acetate and the combined organic phases were dried over sodium sulfate and evaporated. The resulting residue was purified by flash chromatography on silica gel using a gradient of ethyl acetate (containing 10% methanol) and hexanes. The clean fractions were concentrated and then the material was triturated with ether to afford 430 mg (0.785 mmol, 51% yield) of 2-amino-3-chloro-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-benzoic acid as an orange solid. ¹H NMR (500 MHz, CD₃OD) Î´ 8.47 (d, 1H), 8.03 (m, 3H), 7.94 (d, 1H), 7.89 (s, 1H), 7.65 (d, 1H), 7.46 (dd, 1H), 7.34 (m, 3H), 7.09 (d, 1H), 7.02 (t, 1H), 3.82 (s, 3H), 2.33 (s, 3H); MS: m/z 547.9 (M+H⁺).

Step 4: Synthesis of {2-amino-3-chloro-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenyl}-morpholin-4-yl-methanone

25.0 mg (0.046 mmol) of 2-amino-3-chloro-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-benzoic acid was combined with 18.5 mg (0.114 mmol) of N,Nâ€²-carbonyldiimidazole in 1.0 mL dimethylformamide. The solution was stirred at room temperature for 2 hours whereupon 9.9 Î¼L (0.114 mmol) of morpholine was added and the solution was stirred at room temperature for 16 hours. The crude reaction mixture was then diluted with 1.0 mL methanol and 100 Î¼L of 50% w/v potassium hydroxide aqueous solution was added. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 hours and then neutralized with acetic acid. The material was filtered through a 0.45 Î¼m syringe filter and purified by mass-triggered reverse phase HPLC in a gradient of acetonitrile and water (containing 0.1% formic acid). The clean fractions were lyophilized to afford 6.9 mg (0.015 mmol, 32% yield) of {2-amino-3-chloro-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenyl}-morpholin-4-yl-methanone as a fluffy white powder. ¹H NMR (500 MHz, MeOD) Î´ 8.39 (d, 1H), 8.15 (d, 1H), 7.65 (s, 1H), 7.64 (d, 1H), 7.58 (dd, 1H), 7.36 (d, 1H), 7.31 (t, 1H), 7.13 (d, 1H), 7.06 (t, 1H), 3.86 (s, 3H), 3.72 (s, br., 8H); MS: m/z 463.0 (M+H⁺).

Other compounds prepared by Method 66:

TABLE 41MS: m/z Structure(M + H⁺)575.0 553.0 478.0 476.0 449.0 561.1 490.0 520.0 490.2 533.2 490.0

Method 67

Step 1: Synthesis of 2-amino-3-fluoro-5-iodo-benzoic acid

To a solution of 999 mg (6.44 mmol) of 2-amino-3-fluorobenzoic acid in 35 mL of water was added 500 mg (5.95 mmol) of sodium bicarbonate. The reaction was stirred and 1.77 g (6.99 mmol) of iodine was slowly added. The reaction was stirred at room temperature for 48 hours. To the solution was added an aqueous solution of sodium bisulfite and the solution was stirred vigorously for 30 minutes. The precipitate was collected by vacuum filtration and washed with water. The brown solid was dried overnight to afford 1.14 g (4.06 mmol, 63% yield) of 2-amino-3-fluoro-5-iodo-benzoic acid. ¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d₆) Î´ 7.79 (t, 1H), 7.58 (dd, 1H).

Step 2: Synthesis of 8-fluoro-6-iodo-1H-benzo[d][1,3]oxazine-2,4-dione

To a solution of 500 mg (1.78 mmol) of 2-amino-3-fluoro-5-iodo-benzoic acid in 5.0 mL tetrahydrofuran was added 1.4 mL (2.67 mmol) of 20% w/v solution of phosgene in toluene. The reaction was stirred for 16 hours at room temperature. The solution was concentrated to dryness to afford 550 mg (1.79 mmol, quantitative yield) of 8-fluoro-6-iodo-1H-benzo[d][1,3]oxazine-2,4-dione as a brown powder. ¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d₆) Î´ 12.05 (s, 1H), 8.09 (dd, 1H), 7.98 (s, 1H).

Step 3: Synthesis of 2-amino-3-fluoro-5-iodo-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide

550 mg (1.79 mmol) of 8-fluoro-6-iodo-1H-benzo[d][1,3]oxazine-2,4-dione was combined with 4 mL tetrahydrofuran in a 15 mL-sized sealed tube. To the solution was added 1.79 mL (3.58 mmol) of a 2.0 M dimethylamine solution in tetrahydrofuran. The sealed tube was capped and heated in an oil bath at 60Â° C. for 48 hours. The solution was concentrated down and then purified by flash chromatography on silica gel. A gradient of ethyl acetate and hexanes was used to afford 368 mg (1.19 mmol, 67% yield) of 2-amino-3-fluoro-5-iodo-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide as a golden oil. ¹H NMR (500 MHz, CDCl₃) Î´ 7.29 (dd, 1H), 7.19 (s, 1H), 4.50 (s, br., 2H), 3.03 (s, br., 6H).

Step 4: Synthesis of 2-amino-3-fluoro-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide

548 mg (1.09 mmol) of 3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine, 89 mg (0.109 mmol) of dichloro[1,1â€²-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene]palladium(II) dichloromethane adduct and 368 mg (1.19 mmol) of 2-amino-3-fluoro-5-iodo-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide were placed in a microwave vial. To the vial were added 6 mL of acetonitrile and 5 mL of a saturated aqueous solution of sodium bicarbonate. The vial was sealed and purged with nitrogen and evacuated with vacuum (3Ã—). The vial was irradiated in a microwave at 80Â° C. for 500 seconds. The resulting mixture was diluted with ethyl acetate and washed with water and brine. The layers were separated and the organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate and evaporated. The resulting residue was purified by flash chromatography on silica gel using a gradient of ethyl acetate and hexanes. The clean fractions were concentrated to afford 490 mg (0.877 mmol, 81% yield) of 2-amino-3-fluoro-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide as a peach foam. MS: m/z 559.2 (M+H⁺).

Step 5: Synthesis of 2-amino-3-fluoro-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide

222 mg (0.397 mmol) of 2-amino-3-fluoro-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide was dissolved in 5 mL methanol and 200 Î¼L of a 50% w/v potassium hydroxide aqueous solution was added. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 5.5 hours and then neutralized with acetic acid. The material was filtered through a 0.45 Î¼m syringe filter and purified by mass-triggered reverse phase HPLC in a gradient of acetonitrile and water (containing 0.1% formic acid). The clean fractions were lyophilized to afford 100 mg (0.247 mmol, 62% yield) of 2-amino-3-fluoro-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide as an off-white powder. ¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d₆) Î´ 11.79 (d, 1H), 8.41 (d, 1H), 8.02 (d, 1H), 7.65 (d, 1H), 7.56 (dd, 1H), 7.45 (dd, 1H), 7.22 (t, 1H), 7.15 (d, 1H), 7.07 (d, 1H), 6.99 (t, 1H), 5.17 (s, 2H), 3.75 (s, 3H), 2.90 (s, br., 6H); MS: m/z 405.1 (M+H⁺).

Method 68

Step 1: Synthesis of 2-amino-3-fluoro-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-benzoic Acid

163 mg (0.323 mmol) of 3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine, 13 mg (0.016 mmol) of dichloro[1,1â€²-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene]palladium(II) dichloromethane adduct, and 100 mg (0.356 mmol) of 2-amino-3-fluoro-5-iodo-benzoic acid were placed in a microwave vial. To the vial were added 2 mL of acetonitrile and 2 mL of a saturated aqueous solution of sodium bicarbonate. The vial was sealed and purged with nitrogen and evacuated with vacuum (3Ã—). The vial was irradiated in a microwave at 90Â° C. for 300 seconds. The resulting mixture was diluted with ethyl acetate and washed with water. The aqueous layer was back extracted three times with ethyl acetate. The combined organic phases were dried over sodium sulfate and evaporated. The resulting residue was purified by flash chromatography on silica gel using a gradient of ethyl acetate and hexanes. The clean fractions were concentrated to afford 135 mg (0.254 mmol, 78% yield) of 2-amino-3-fluoro-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-benzoic acid as a brown residue. MS: m/z 532.0 (M+H⁺).

Step 2: Synthesis of {2-amino-3-fluoro-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenyl}-[4-(2-diethylamino-ethyl)-piperazin-1-yl]-methanone

24 mg (0.05 mmol) of 2-amino-3-fluoro-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-benzoic acid, 8.4 mg (0.05 mmol) of 1-(2-diethylaminoethyl)piperazine, and 17 mg (0.05 mmol) of O-(7-azabenzotriazol-1-yl)-N,N,Nâ€²,Nâ€²-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate (HATU) were combined in 1.0 mL dimethyl formamide and stirred at room temperature for 48 hours. To the crude reaction was added 200 Î¼L of a 50% w/v potassium hydroxide (aqueous) solution and the mixture was stirred for 24 hours at room temperature. The reaction was neutralized by adding a few drops of acetic acid, filtered through a 0.45 Î¼m syringe filter, and then purified by mass-triggered reverse phase HPLC in a gradient of acetonitrile and water (containing 0.1% formic acid). The clean fractions were lyophilized to afford 5.0 mg (0.01 mmol, 21% yield) of {2-amino-3-fluoro-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenyl}-[4-(2-diethylamino-ethyl)-piperazin-1-yl]-methanone as a orange glass. ¹H NMR (500 MHz, MeOD) Î´ 8.40 (d, 1H), 8.17 (d, 1H), 7.65 (s, 1H), 7.58 (dd, 1H), 7.42 (dd, 1H), 7.31 (t, 1H), 7.22 (d, 1H), 7.14 (d, 1H), 7.07 (t, 1H), 3.86 (s, 3H), 3.70 (s, br., 4H), 2.58 (m, 12H), 1.09 (t, 6H). MS: m/z 545.3 (M+H⁺).

Other compounds prepared by Method 68:

TABLE 42MS: m/zStructure(M + H⁺)559.3 537.2 474.2 474.2 474.2 517.3

Method 69

Step 1: Synthesis of {2-amino-3-fluoro-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenyl}-[4-(2-diethylamino-ethyl)-piperazin-1-yl]-methanone

300 mg (0.564 mmol) of 2-amino-3-fluoro-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-benzoic acid, 105 mg (0.564 mmol) of 1-(2-diethylaminoethyl)piperazine, and 279 mg of O-(7-azabenzotriazol-1-yl)-N,N,Nâ€²,Nâ€²-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate (HATU) were combined in 3.5 mL dimethyl formamide and stirred at room temperature for 48 hours. The reaction was extracted into ethyl acetate and washed with water. The water layer was back extracted three times with ethyl acetate. The layers were separated and the organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated to dryness. The resulting residue was purified by flash chromatography on silica gel using a gradient of ethyl acetate (containing 10% methanol) and hexanes. The clean fractions containing the purified intermediate were evaporated to afford 230 mg (0.329 mmol, 58% yield) of {2-amino-3-fluoro-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenyl}-[4-(2-diethylamino-ethyl)-piperazin-1-yl]-methanone as a white solid. ¹H NMR (500 MHz, CD₃CN) Î´ 8.59 (d, 1H), 8.09 (s, 1H), 8.09 (d, 2H), 8.01 (s, 1H), 7.61 (dd, 1H), 7.43 (m, 4H), 7.23 (d, 1H), 7.18 (d, 1H), 7.11 (t, 1H), 4.67 (s, 2H), 3.88 (s, 3H), 3.60 (s, br., 4H), 2.52 (m, 12H), 0.99 (t, 6H); MS: m/z 699.3 (M+H⁺).

Step 2: Synthesis of N-{2-[4-(2-diethylamino-ethyl)-piperazine-1-carbonyl]-6-fluoro-4-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenyl}-2-dimethylamino-acetamide

30 mg (0.04 mmol) of {2-amino-3-fluoro-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenyl}-[4-(2-diethylamino-ethyl)-piperazin-1-yl]-methanone was combined with 9.0 mg (0.06 mmol) of dimethylaminoacetylchloride hydrochloride and 32 mg (0.11 mmol, 3.31 mmol/gram loading) of PS-DIEA resin (Argonaut Technologies, Inc.) in 1.0 mL dichloromethane. The reaction was shaken gently at room temperature for 48 hours. 22 mg (0.14 mmol) of dimethylaminoacetylchloride hydrochloride and 26 mg (0.09 mmol) more PS-DIEA resin (Argonaut Technologies, Inc.) was added and the reaction was continued to shake at room temperature for 24 more hours. The resin was filtered off and rinsed well with methanol and dichloromethane. The filtrate was concentrated down. The dried residue was dissolved in 0.5 mL methanol and 0.5 mL acetone. 150 Î¼L of a 50% w/v potassium hydroxide (aqueous) solution was added and the reaction was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour. The reaction was neutralized by adding a few drops of acetic acid and concentrated. The residue was dissolved in dimethyl sulfoxide, filtered through a 0.45 Î¼m syringe filter, and purified by reverse phase HPLC in a gradient of acetonitrile and water (containing 0.1% formic acid). The clean fractions were lyophilized to afford 1.9 mg (0.003 mmol, 7% yield) of N-{2-[4-(2-diethylamino-ethyl)-piperazine-1-carbonyl]-6-fluoro-4-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenyl}-2-dimethylamino-acetamide as a fluffy white powder. ¹H NMR (500 MHz, CD₃OD) Î´ 8.51 (d, 1H), 8.28 (d, 1H), 7.70 (s, 1H), 7.67 (dd, 1H), 7.60 (dd, 1H), 7.46 (s, br., 1H), 7.32 (t, 1H), 7.14 (d, 1H), 7.07 (d, 1H), 3.87 (s, 3H), 3.77 (s, br., 2H), 3.56 (d, 2H), 3.19 (s, 2H), 3.13 (s, br., 2H), 2.71 (t, 2H), 2.64 (t, 2H), 2.59 (d, 2H), 2.41 (s, 6H), 1.26 (t, 6H); MS: m/z 630.2 (M+H⁺).

Other compounds prepared by Method 69:

TABLE 43MS: m/zStructure(M + H⁺)642.3

Method 70

Step 1: Synthesis of 3-fluoro-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-2-(2,2,2-trifluoro-acetylamino)-benzamide

To a solution of 164 mg (0.294 mmol) of 2-amino-3-fluoro-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide in 2.0 mL dichloromethane was added 77 Î¼L (0.44 mmol) of N,N-diisopropylethylamine followed by 61 Î¼L (0.44 mmol) of trifluoroacetic anhydride. (The solution became hot and gas evolved upon addition of the trifluoroacetic anhydride.) The reaction was stirred at room temperature for 30 minutes. The solution was washed three times with an aqueous solution of 1 M citric acid. The organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate and then evaporated. The resulting residue was purified by flash chromatography on silica gel using a gradient of ethyl acetate and hexanes. The clean fractions were concentrated to afford 131 mg (0.200 mmol, 68% yield) of 3-fluoro-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-2-(2,2,2-trifluoro-acetylamino)-benzamide as an orange glass. MS: m/z 655.0 (M+H⁺).

Step 2: Synthesis of 3-fluoro-2-[(isopropylcarbamoyl-methyl)-amino]-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide

To a scintillation vial was combined 40 mg (0.06 mmol) of 3-fluoro-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-2-(2,2,2-trifluoro-acetylamino)-benzamide, 165 mg (0.092 mmol) of 2-bromo-N-isopropyl-acetamide, 17 mg (0.12 mmol) of potassium carbonate, and 0.5 mL N,N-dimethylformamide. The vial was heated in a heating block at 60Â° C. for 19 hours. 5.5 mg (0.03 mmol) 2-bromo-N-isopropyl-acetamide and 8.5 mg (0.06 mmol) potassium carbonate were added. Additionally, 9.0 mg (0.06 mmol) of sodium iodide was added and the reaction was heated to 60Â° C. for another 72 hours. The reaction was allowed to cool to room temperature and salts were filtered off. The crude filtrate was diluted with 0.5 mL methanol and 150 Î¼L of a 50% w/v potassium hydroxide aqueous solution was added. The reaction was stirred 1 hour at room temperature. The solution was neutralized by adding acetic acid dropwise and then the reaction was concentrated to dryness. The resulting residue was purified by flash chromatography on silica gel using a gradient of ethyl acetate (containing 10% methanol) and hexanes. The clean fractions were concentrated and then lyophilized overnight to afford 13.3 mg (0.003 mmol, 43% yield) of 3-fluoro-2-[(isopropylcarbamoyl-methyl)-amino]-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide as a pale yellow powder. ¹H NMR (500 MHz, CD₃OD) Î´ 8.42 (s, br., 1H), 8.18 (d, 1H), 7.65 (s, 1H), 7.58 (dd, 1H), 7.45 (dd, 1H), 7.31 (t, 1H), 7.25 (d, 1H), 7.13 (d, 1H), 7.06 (t, 1H), 4.02 (m, 1H), 3.85 (s, 3H), 3.84 (s, 2H), 3.15 (s, br., 3H), 3.04 (s, br., 3H), 1.16 (d, 6H); MS: m/z 504.1 (M+H⁺).

Other compounds prepared by Method 70:

TABLE 44StructureMS: m/z (M + H⁺)476.1 547.2

Method 71

Step 1: Synthesis of 3-fluoro-2-isocyanato-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide

In a scintillation vial was combined 125 mg (0.224 mmol) of 2-amino-3-fluoro-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide, 2.0 mL dichloromethane, and 2.0 mL of a saturated aqueous solution of sodium bicarbonate. The vial was cooled to 0Â° C. in an ice bath and, under vigorous stirring, 601 Î¼L (1.12 mmol) of a 20% phosgene in toluene solution was added. The reaction was stirred in the ice bath for 30 minutes and then stirred at room temperature for another 30 minutes. The layers were separated and organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated to afford 3-fluoro-2-isocyanato-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide as a brown foam.

Step 2: Synthesis of {2-dimethylcarbamoyl-6-fluoro-4-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenyl}-carbamic acid 2-morpholin-4-yl-ethyl Ester

75 mg (0.13 mmol) of 3-fluoro-2-isocyanato-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide was dissolved in 1.0 mL dichloromethane and combined with 31 Î¼L (0.26 mmol) of 4-(2-hydroxyethyl)-morpholine (which was dried over molecular sieves) and 22 Î¼L (0.13 mmol) of N,N-diisopropylethylamine. The reaction was stirred for 16 hours at room temperature. 31 Î¼L (0.26 mmol) of 4-(2-hydroxyethyl)morpholine was added and the reaction was continued to stir for 24 hours at room temperature. The reaction was concentrated and purified by flash chromatography on silica gel using a gradient of ethyl acetate (containing 10% methanol) and hexanes. The clean fractions were concentrated. MS: m/z 715.3 (M+H⁺).

Step 3: Synthesis of {2-dimethylcarbamoyl-6-fluoro-4-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenyl}-carbamic acid 2-morpholin-4-yl-ethyl ester

78 mg (0.11 mmol) of the purified intermediate was dissolved in 4.0 mL methanol and cooled to 0Â° C. in an ice bath. To the cold solution was added 200 Î¼L of 50% w/v aqueous potassium hydroxide solution. The reaction was stirred in the ice bath for 1.5 hours and then stored in a freezer for 48 hours. The reaction was neutralized by adding a few drops of acetic acid and concentrated. The residue was dissolved in dimethyl sulfoxide, filtered through a syringe filter, and purified by mass-triggered reverse phase HPLC in a gradient of acetonitrile and water (containing 0.1% formic acid). The clean fractions were lyophilized to afford 4.9 mg (0.01 mmol, 8% yield) of {2-dimethylcarbamoyl-6-fluoro-4-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenyl}-carbamic acid 2-morpholin-4-yl-ethyl ester as a fluffy white powder. ¹H NMR (500 MHz, MeOD) Î´ 8.49 (d, 1H), 8.27 (d, 1H), 7.67 (s, 1H), 7.58 (t, 2H), 7.44 (d, 1H), 7.31 (t, 1H), 7.13 (d, 1H), 7.06 (t, 1H), 4.28 (t, 2H), 3.85 (s, 3H), 3.70 (t, 4H), 3.09 (s, 3H), 3.00 (s, 3H), 2.70 (t, 2H), 2.56 (s, br., 4H); MS: m/z 562.2 (M+H⁺).

Other compounds prepared by Method 71:

TABLE 45StructureMS: m/z (M + H⁺)520.2 477.1

Method 72

Step 1: Synthesis of {2-dimethylcarbamoyl-6-fluoro-4-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenyl}-carbamic Acid Isopropyl Ester

45 mg (0.08 mmol) of 2-amino-3-fluoro-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide was dissolved in 1.0 mL dichloromethane and 1.0 mL of a saturated aqueous solution of sodium bicarbonate was added. The biphasic solution was cooled to 0Â° C. in an ice bath and, while stirring vigorously, 161 Î¼L (0.161 mmol) of 1 M isopropyl chloroformate in toluene was added. The reaction was allowed to stir in the ice bath and allowed to warm to room temperature overnight (16 hours). The layers were separated and the organic layer was washed twice with water. The organic layer was then dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated. MS: m/z 645.1 (M+H⁺).

Step 2: Synthesis of {2-dimethylcarbamoyl-6-fluoro-4-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenyl}-carbamic Acid Isopropyl Ester

The crude residue was dissolved in 5.0 mL methanol and cooled to 0Â° C. in an ice bath. To the cold solution was added 200 Î¼L of 50% w/v aqueous potassium hydroxide solution. The reaction was stirred in the ice bath for 1.5 hours and then stored in a freezer for 48 hours. The reaction was neutralized by adding a few drops of acetic acid and concentrated. The material was dissolved in ethyl acetate and washed with water. The layers were separated and the organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate. The material was purified by flash chromatography on silica gel using a gradient of ethyl acetate (containing 10% methanol) and hexanes. The material was not pure, so it was purified a second time using mass-triggered reverse phase HPLC in a gradient of acetonitrile and water (containing 0.1% formic acid). The clean fractions were lyophilized to afford 10.3 mg (0.021 mmol, 26% yield) of {2-dimethylcarbamoyl-6-fluoro-4-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenyl}-carbamic acid isopropyl ester as a fluffy white powder. ¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d₆) Î´ 11.96 (s, br., 1H), 8.57 (d, 1H), 8.21 (d, 1H), 7.73 (d, 1H), 7.72 (d, 1H), 7.61 (d, 1H), 7.44 (d, 1H), 7.27 (t, 1H), 7.12 (d, 1H), 7.03 (t, 1H), 4.78 (m, 1H), 3.79 (s, 3H), 2.93 (s, 3H), 2.82 (s, 3H), 1.19 (d, 6H); MS: m/z 491.1 (M+H⁺), 513.1 (M+Na⁺).

Other compounds prepared by Method 72:

TABLE 46StructureMS: m/z (M + H⁺)463.1 505.2

Method 73

Step 1: Synthesis of 1-(2,2,2-trifluoro-acetyl)-pyrrolidine-2-carboxylic Acid {2-dimethylcarbamoyl-6-fluoro-4-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenyl}-amide

To a scintillation vial was combined 32 mg (0.06 mmol) of 2-amino-3-fluoro-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide and 15 uL (0.09 mmol) of N,N-diisopropylethylamine. To the vial was added 745 Î¼L of a 0.1M solution of (S)-(âˆ’)-N-(trifluoroacetyl)prolylchloride in dichloromethane. The reaction was stirred at room temperature for 30 minutes, quenched with a few drops of methanol, and concentrated down. MS: m/z 752.1 (M+H⁺).

Step 2: Synthesis of pyrrolidine-2-carboxylic Acid {2-dimethylcarbamoyl-6-fluoro-4-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenyl}-amide

The crude residue was dissolved in 1.0 mL methanol and 150 Î¼L of a 50% w/v aqueous potassium hydroxide solution was added. The reaction was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour. A few drops of acetic acid were added to neutralize the reaction and then the reaction was concentrated down. The material was purified by flash chromatography on silica gel using a gradient of ethyl acetate (containing 10% methanol) and hexanes. The material was not pure, so it was purified again using mass-triggered reverse phase HPLC in a gradient of acetonitrile and water (containing 0.1% formic acid). The clean fractions were lyophilized to afford 1.5 mg (0.003 mmol, 5% yield) of pyrrolidine-2-carboxylic acid {2-dimethylcarbamoyl-6-fluoro-4-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenyl}-amide as a fluffy white powder. ¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d₆) Î´ 11.92 (d, 1H), 9.62 (s, br., 1H), 8.53 (d, 1H), 8.17 (d, 1H), 7.69 (d, 1H), 7.66 (dd, 1H), 7.58 (dd, 1H), 7.44 (d, 1H), 7.23 (t, 1H), 7.08 (d, 1H), 7.01 (t, 1H), 3.75 (s, 3H), 3.67 (q, 1H), 2.88 (s, 3H), 2.85 (m, 1H), 2.79 (s, 3H), 2.77 (m, 1H), 2.02 (s, 1H), 1.96 (m, 1H), 1.71 (m, 1H), 1.58 (m, 2H); MS: m/z 502.1 (M+H⁺).

Method 74

Synthesis of 5-bromo-3-fluoro-2-hydroxy-benzoic Acid Methyl EsterStep 1: Synthesis of 5-bromo-3-formyl-2-hydroxy-benzoic Acid

36 g (0.17 mol) of 5-bromo-2-hydroxy-benzoic acid was dissolved in 500 mL of trifluoroacetic acid. 112 g (0.80 mol) of urotropine was added and the resulting mixture heated to 100Â° C. for 23 h. The reaction mixture was concentrated to half its volume and the residual liquid poured into 1.8 L of dilute aqueous hydrochloric acid and stirred for 8 h at ambient temperature. The resulting precipitate was filtered off and crystallized from aqueous ethanol to afford 20.3 g (82.9 mmol, 50%) of 5-bromo-3-formyl-2-hydroxy-benzoic acid a pale yellow crystalline solid. ¹H-NMR (500 MHz, d₆-DMSO): Î´ 10.29 (s, 1H), 8.13 (d, 1H), 7.95 (d, 1H); MS: m/z 242.9+244.9 (Mâˆ’H⁺).

Step 2: Synthesis of 5-bromo-2-hydroxy-3-(1-hydroxy-ethyl)-benzoic Acid

1.0 g (4.1 mmol) of 5-bromo-3-formyl-2-hydroxy-benzoic acid was dissolved in 100 mL of anhydrous THF under nitrogen. The solution was cooled in an ice-bath and 13.6 ml of a 3 M solution of methyl magnesium bromide was added. The mixture was stirred for 16 h, slowly warming to room temperature. The resulting solution was distributed between ethyl acetate and dilute aqueous hydrochloric acid. The aqueous layer was extracted with ethyl acetate and the combined organic phases were washed with brine, dried over sodium sulfate and evaporated to afford 1.09 g of 5-bromo-2-hydroxy-3-(1-hydroxy-ethyl)-benzoic acid as a yellow solid. ¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d₆) Î´ 7.76 (d, 1H), 7.72 (d, 1H), 4.98 (q, 1H), 1.30 (d, 3H), MS: m/z 258.9+261.0 (M+H⁺).

Step 3: Synthesis of 5-bromo-3-ethyl-2-hydroxy-benzoic Acid

974 mg (3.73 mmol) of 5-bromo-2-hydroxy-3-(1-hydroxy-ethyl)-benzoic acid was dissolved in trifluoroacetic acid under nitrogen. 715 Î¼L (521 mg, 4.48 mmol) of triethyl silane was added and the resulting mixture was heated to 90Â° C. for 2 h. The mixture was evaporated and the residue purified by flash chromatography on silica gel using a gradient of ethyl acetate in hexanes to afford 563 mg (2.30 mmol, 62%) of 5-bromo-3-ethyl-2-hydroxy-benzoic acid as a colorless solid. ¹H-NMR (500 MHz, d₆-DMSO): Î´7.73 (d, 1H), 7.57 (d, 1H), 2.61 (q, 2H), 1.15 (t, 3H); MS: m/z 243.0+244.9 (M+H⁺).

Method 75

Synthesis of 5-bromo-3-chloro-2-hydroxy-benzoic Acid Methyl Ester

20.00 g (83 mmol, 90% tech.) of 5-bromo-2-hydroxy-benzoic acid was dispersed in 200 mL of water. 7 M aqueous sodium hydroxide was added until all material was dissolved and the pH reached 14. 150 mL of commercial bleach was added. Concentrated aqueous hydrochloric acid was added slowly until a beige, viscous suspension was obtained and the product was formed according to LC-MS analysis. The resulting precipitate was filtered off, washed with water and dried in vacuo to afford 21.00 g of a beige solid.

10.50 g of that material was dissolved in a mixture of 200 mL of toluene and 50 mL of methanol. 28 mL (56 mmol) of a 2 M solution of trimethylsilyl diazomethane in diethyl ether was added until a persistent yellow color remained. 1 mL of glacial acetic acid was added and the resulting solution was distributed between ethyl acetate and a saturated aqueous solution of sodium bicarbonate. The aqueous layer was extracted with dichloromethane and the organic phases were combined, dried over sodium sulfate and evaporated. The residue was recrystallized twice from hot ethanol using decolorizing carbon to afford 8.795 g (33.12 mmol, 40%) of 5-bromo-3-chloro-2-hydroxy-benzoic acid methyl ester as a colorless crystalline solid. ¹H NMR (500 MHz, CDCl₃) Î´ 11.28 (m, 1H), 7.90 (m, 1H), 7.68 (m, 1H), 3.99 (m, 3H); MS: m/z 264.9+266.9 (M+H⁺).

Method 76

Synthesis of {3-chloro-2-hydroxy-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenyl}-[4-(2-dimethylamino-ethyl)-piperazin-1-yl]-methanoneStep 1: Synthesis of 3-chloro-2-hydroxy-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-benzoic Acid

320 mg (0.57 mmol) of 3-chloro-2-hydroxy-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-benzoic acid methyl ester was dissolved in 20 mL of hot ethanol. 5 mL (14 mmol) of 7 M aqueous sodium hydroxide was added and the mixture was left at ambient temperature for 15 h. The resulting solution was acidified to pH 1 by addition of concentrated aqueous hydrochloric acid. The resulting precipitate was filtered off and dried by suction to afford 232 mg (0.59 mmol, 103%) of 3-chloro-2-hydroxy-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-benzoic acid as a yellow solid. ¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d₆) Î´ 12.08 (s, 1H), 8.45 (d, 1H), 8.21 (d, 1H), 8.11 (d, 1H), 8.03 (d, 1H), 7.77 (d, 1H), 7.62 (dd, 1H), 7.31 (t, 1H), 7.15 (d, 1H), 7.07 (t, 1H), 3.83 (s, 3H). MS: m/z 395.0 (M+H⁺).

Step 2: Synthesis of {3-chloro-2-hydroxy-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenyl}-[4-(2-dimethylamino-ethyl)-piperazin-1-yl]-methanone

30 mg (76 Î¼mol) of 3-chloro-2-hydroxy-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-benzoic acid and 46 mg (0.12 mmol) of O-(7-azabenzotriazol-1-yl)-N,N,Nâ€²,Nâ€²-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate were dissolved in a mixture of 1.8 mL of acetonitrile and 0.2 mL of DMF. 40 Î¼L (approx. 0.2 mmol; density unknown) of 1-(2-di-methylaminoethyl)-piperazine was added and the resulting mixture heated to 90Â° C. for 18 h. 40 mg (0.11 Î¼mol) of O-(7-azabenzotriazol-1-yl)-N,N,Nâ€²,Nâ€²-tetramethyluronium hexafluoro-phosphate were added and the mixture heated to 100Â° C. for 3 days. The resulting mixture was distributed between a saturated aqueous solution of sodium bicarbonate and ethyl acetate. The aqueous layer was extracted three times with ethyl acetate. The combined organic phases were washed with brine, dried over sodium sulfate and evaporated. The resulting crude was purified by mass-triggered reverse-phase HPLC to afford 5.0 mg (9.4 Î¼mol, 12%) of {3-chloro-2-hydroxy-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenyl}-[4-(2-dimethylamino-ethyl)-piperazin-1-yl]-methanone as an ivory solid. ¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d₆) Î´ 11.91 (s, 1H), 8.49 (d, 1H), 8.12 (d, 1H), 7.77 (d, 1H), 7.73 (d, 1H), 7.63 (dd, 1H), 7.42 (d, 1H), 7.29 (ddd, 1H), 7.13 (d, 1H), 7.06 (ddd, 1H), 3.82 (s, 3H), 3.68-3.50 (m, br. 2H), 3.08-2.90 (m, br., 2H), 2.48-2.3 (m, 8H), 2.13 (s, 6H), MS: m/z 534.2 (M+H⁺), 548.2 (M+Na⁺).

Other compounds prepared by Method 76:

TABLE 47 note:carbonyl diimidazole was used in some cases instead of O-(7-azabenzotriazol-1-yl)-N,N,Nâ€²,Nâ€²-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate, neat DMF was used in some cases, reaction temperatures ranged from ambient temperature to microwave irradiation to 100Â° C. for 30 min.

Method 77

Synthesis of 2-Amino-5-bromo-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide

Method A: Into an 15 mL high pressure glass vial (with Teflon screw cap) were added 5-bromoisatoic anhydride (0.401 g, 1.66 mmol), 4-dimethylaminopyridine (20 mg, 0.16 mmol), and dimethylamine (2 M in THF; 5.0 mL, 10.0 mmol). The vial was sealed and placed in an oil bath at 70Â° C. for 8 h after which it was concentrated under vacuum. The crude product was dissolved in Ethyl acetate and washed 2Ã— with water followed by brine. The organic phase was dried (Sodium sulfate), filtered and concentrated to afford 0.428 g of 2-amino-5-bromo-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide as a pink solid, which was used without further purification. ¹H-NMR (500 MHz, d₆-DMSO) Î´=7.19 (dd, J=2.0, 8.5 Hz, 1H), 7.08 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 6.63 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 5.31 (br. s, 2H), 2.89 (br. s, 6H). MS: m/z 198/200 [Câ• O⁺].

Method B: Into a 350 ml round bottomed pressure tube were added 5-bromoisatoic anhydride (15.0 g, 62.0 mmol) and 2 M dimethylamine in tetrahydrofuran (90 ml, 180 mmol). The vial was sealed and heated in an oil bath at 60Â° C. for 1 hour, then the mixture was concentrated to dryness. The residue was dissolved in dichloromethane (100 ml). The organic layer washed with saturated, aqueous sodium bicarbonate solution (25 ml), washed with water (25 ml), dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated to obtain a yellow powder. The powder was re-crystallized from ether to obtain 11.8 g (78.6%) of 2-amino-5-bromo-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide. ¹H-NMR (250 MHz, CDCl₃) Î´ 7.20 (dd, J=8.5, 2.5 Hz, 1H), 7.10 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 6.65 (d, J=8.7 Hz, 1H), 5.34 (s, 2H), 2.91 (s, 6H); MS m/z 243.1, 245.1 (M+H+).

Method 78

Synthesis of morpholine-4-carboxylic acid [2-dimethylcarbamoyl-4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-phenyl]-amideStep 1: Synthesis of morpholine-4-carboxylic acid (4-bromo-2-dimethylcarbamoyl-phenyl)-amide

2-Amino-5-bromo-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide (2.00 g, 8.22 mmol), diisopropylethylamine (6.5 ml, 37.32 mmol), 4-morpholinecarbonyl chloride (4.3 ml, 37.46 mmol), and chloroform (20 ml) were combined and stirred for 18 hours at 50Â° C. Water was added to the mixture, and the organic layer was extracted. The organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate, concentrated in vacuo, and the crude material was purified by flash chromatography (50% to 100% ethyl acetate in hexanes) to give 1.13 g (39%) of morpholine-4-carboxylic acid (4-bromo-2-dimethylcarbamoyl-phenyl)-amide. ¹H-NMR (250 MHz, DMSO-d6) Î´ 8.67 (s, 1H), 7.56-7.45 (m, 2H), 7.42 (t, J=9.3 Hz, 4H), 3.35-3.28 (m, 4H), 2.96-2.86 (m, 6H); MS: m/z 356.0+358.1 (M+H⁺).

Step 2: Synthesis of morpholine-4-carboxylic acid [2-dimethylcarbamoyl-4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2] dioxaborolan-2-yl)-phenyl]-amide

To a microwave vial were added morpholine-4-carboxylic acid (4-bromo-2-dimethylcarbamoyl-phenyl)-amide (2.00 g, 5.61 mmol), pinacol diborane (2.85 g, 11.22 mmol), potassium acetate (1.65 g, 16.81 mmol), [1,1â€²-bis(diphenylphosphino)-ferrocene]dichloropalladium(II) complex with dichloromethane (458 mg, 0.56 mmol), and N,N-dimethylformamide (13 ml). The vial was microwaved for 20 minutes at 140Â° C. The N,N-dimethylformamide solvent was removed by rotary evaporation. The residue was dissolved in dichloromethane, and the organic layer was washed with water twice. The organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash chromatography on silica gel using a gradient of 10% methanol in ethyl acetate in hexanes and then crystallized from ether to give 1.41 g (62%) of morpholine-4-carboxylic acid [2-dimethylcarbamoyl-4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-phenyl]-amide. MS: m/z 404.2 (M+H⁺).

Method 79

Step 1: Synthesis of 2,2-dimethyl-propionic acid 5-bromo-3-iodo-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-1-ylmethyl Ester

5-Bromo-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine was dissolved in N,N-dimethylforamide at 4Â° C. To the solution was added sodium hydride in small portions. The flask was warmed to room temperature and stirred for 1 hour. To the mixture was added chloromethyl pivalate. The reaction mixture was stirred for 2 hours at room temperature, and quenched with methanol. Saturated ammonium chloride solution was added, and the mixture was concentrated in vacuo. The residue was dissolved in dichloromethane, and the organic layer was washed four times with. The organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was dissolved in acetone. The solution was filtered and the solid material collected was discarded. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo. The crude material was re-crystallized from ether to give 2,2-dimethyl-propionic acid 5-bromo-3-iodo-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-1-ylmethyl ester. MS: m/z 310.4+310.4 (M+H⁺).

Step 2: Synthesis of 2,2-dimethyl-propionic acid 5-bromo-3-formyl-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-1-ylmethyl Ester

2,2-Dimethyl-propionic acid 5-bromo-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-1-ylmethyl ester (4.09 g, 13.14 mmol) was dissolved in N,N-dimethylformamide (4 ml), and phosphorus oxy-chloride (1.33 ml) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred for 18 hours at 50Â° C. The reaction was quenched with saturated, aqueous sodium bicarbonate, and the mixture was extracted with dichloromethane. The organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate, concentrated, and purified by flash chromatography (0-100% (ethyl acetate in hexanes) to give 3.65 g (82%) of 2,2-dimethyl-propionic acid 5-bromo-3-formyl-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-1-ylmethyl ester. MS: m/z 338.0+340.0 (M+H⁺).

Step 3: Synthesis of 2,2-dimethyl-propionic acid 5-bromo-3-[hydroxy-(2-hydroxymethyl-phenyl)-methyl]-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-1-ylmethyl Ester

To a âˆ’78Â° C. solution of (2-bromo-phenyl)-methanol (2.27 g, 12.14 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (100 ml) was added tert-butyllithium (1.7 M in hexanes, 15.7 ml, 26.69 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred for 10 minutes at âˆ’78Â° C. A solution of 2,2-dimethyl-propionic acid 5-bromo-3-formyl-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-1-ylmethyl ester (2.06 g, 6.07 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (30 ml) was added to the stirring reaction mixture. After the reaction mixture was allowed stirred for an additional 20 minutes at âˆ’78Â° C., the reaction was quenched with saturated, aqueous sodium bicarbonate solution. The quenched solution was extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic layer was dried over magnesium sulfate, and the mixture was concentrated in vacuo. The crude material was purified by flash chromatography (0-100% ethyl acetate in hexanes) to give 1.60 g (59%) of 2,2-dimethyl-propionic acid 5-bromo-3-[hydroxy-(2-hydroxymethyl-phenyl)-methyl]-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-1-ylmethyl ester. MS: m/z 446.0, 448.0 (M+H⁺).

Step 4: Synthesis of 2,2-dimethyl-propionic acid 5-bromo-3-(1,3-dihydro-isobenzofuran-1-yl)-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-1-ylmethyl Ester

2,2-Dimethyl-propionic acid 5-bromo-3-[hydroxy-(2-hydroxymethyl-phenyl)-methyl]-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-1-ylmethyl ester (1.60 g, 3.58 mmol) was dissolved in anhydrous dichloromethane (80 ml), and the mixture was stirred at room temperature. Boron trifluoride etherate (374 ul, 2.97 mmol) was added and the mixture stirred for 20 minutes. The reaction was quenched with saturated sodium bicarbonate solution. The organic layer was separated, and the aqueous layer was washed with dichloromethane. The organic layers were combined, dried over magnesium sulfate, and the mixture was concentrated in vacuo. The crude material was purified by flash chromatography (0-100% ethyl acetate in hexanes) to give 1.29 g (84%) of 2,2-dimethyl-propionic acid 5-bromo-3-(1,3-dihydro-isobenzofuran-1-yl)-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-1-ylmethyl ester. MS: m/z 429.2+431.2 (M+H⁺).

Step 5: Synthesis of 2,2-Dimethyl-propionic acid 5-(4-amino-3-dimethylcarbamoyl-phenyl)-3-(1,3-dihydro-isobenzofuran-1-yl)-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-1-ylmethyl Ester

2,2-dimethyl-propionic acid 5-bromo-3-(1,3-dihydro-isobenzofuran-1-yl)-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-1-ylmethyl, morpholine-4-carboxylic acid [2-dimethylcarbamoyl-4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-phenyl]-amide, [1,1â€²-bis(diphenylphosphino)-ferrocene]dichloropalladium(II) complex with dichloromethane, tetrahydrofuran, acetonitrile, water, and saturated sodium bicarbonate were combined in a vial and irradiated in the microwave for 20 minutes at 120Â° C. Water was added to the reaction mixture, and this was extracted with dichloromethane. The organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate, concentrated, and purified by flash chromatography to give 2,2-Dimethyl-propionic acid 5-(4-amino-3-dimethylcarbamoyl-phenyl)-3-(1,3-dihydro-isobenzofuran-1-yl)-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-1-ylmethyl ester. MS: m/z 529.4 (M+H⁺).

Step 6: Synthesis of 2,2-dimethyl-propionic acid 3-(1,3-dihydro-isobenzofuran-1-yl)-5-{3-dimethylcarbamoyl-4-[(morpholine-4-carbonyl)-amino]-phenyl}-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-1-ylmethyl Ester

22,2-dimethyl-propionic acid 5-(4-amino-3-dimethylcarbamoyl-phenyl)-3-(1,3-dihydro-isobenzofuran-1-yl)-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-1-ylmethyl ester, chloroform, 4-morpholinecarbonyl chloride, and di-iso-propyl ethyl amine were combined and stirred for 48 hours at 50Â° C. The reaction was quenched with sodium bicarbonate solution and extracted with dichloromethane. The organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. The crude material was purified by flash chromatography (0 to 100% [10% methanol in ethyl acetate] in hexanes) to give 2,2-dimethyl-propionic acid 3-(1,3-dihydro-isobenzofuran-1-yl)-5-{3-dimethylcarbamoyl-4-[(morpholine-4-carbonyl)-amino]-phenyl}-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-1-ylmethyl ester. MS: m/z 626.6 (M+H⁺).

Step 7: Synthesis of morpholine-4-carboxylic Acid {4-[3-(1,3-dihydro-isobenzofuran-1-yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-2-dimethylcarbamoyl-phenyl}-amide

2,2-dimethyl-propionic acid 3-(1,3-dihydro-isobenzofuran-1-yl)-5-{3-dimethylcarbamoyl-4-[(morpholine-4-carbonyl)-amino]-phenyl}-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-1-ylmethyl ester was dissolved in tetrahydrofuran. 1 M sodium hydroxide in methanol was added to the mixture, and the reaction was stirred for 2 hours at room temperature. The reaction was quenched with sodium bicarbonate solution and extracted with dichloromethane. The organic layer was dried, filtered, and concentrated. The crude material was purified then by mass-triggered reverse-phase HPLC to afford morpholine-4-carboxylic acid {4-[3-(1,3-dihydro-isobenzofuran-1-yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-2-dimethylcarbamoyl-phenyl}-amide. ¹H NMR (250 MHz, DMSO-d₆) Î´ 11.74 (s, 1H), 8.75 (s, 1H), 8.47 (s, 1H), 7.69 (d, J=8.7 Hz, 1H), 7.55-7.49 (m, 3H), 7.44-7.22 (m, 4H), 7.10 (d, J=7.6 Hz, 1H), 6.48 (s, 1H), 5.13 (m, 2H), 3.62-3.58 (m, 4H), 3.42-3.35 (m, 4H in water peak), 2.98 (s, 3H), 2.94 (s, 3H); MS: m/z 512.3 (M+H⁺).

Method 80

Synthesis of 1-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-piperidine-3-carboxylic Acid DimethylamideStep 1: Synthesis of 5-bromo-3-iodo-1-(2-trimethylsilanyl-ethoxymethyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine

Into a 50 ml round bottom flask were added 5-bromo-3-iodo-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (1.86 g, 5.78 mmol) and dry tetrahydrofuran (20 ml). The solution was cooled in an ice bath at 0Â° C. and sodium hydride (305 mg, 60% dispersion in mineral oil, 6.36 mmol) was added in small portions. After 20 minutes, 2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxymethyl chloride (1.12 mL, 6.35 mmol) was added, and the reaction mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature over 30 minutes. The reaction mixture was allowed stirred at this temperature for an additional 30 minutes. Methanol (1.0 mL) was then added to quench the reaction, followed by the addition of saturated aqueous ammonium chloride solution (10 mL). The mixture was then extracted with dichloromethane (2Ã—20 mL). The organic layers were combined, dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated. The residue was purified by flash chromatography (20% ethyl acetate in hexanes) to give 2.36 g (90%) 5-bromo-3-iodo-1-(2-trimethylsilanyl-ethoxymethyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine as a yellowish oil. ¹H-NMR (250 MHz, CDCl₃) Î´ 8.49 (d, J=2 Hz, 1H), 7.84 (d, J=2.25 Hz, 1H), 7.44 (s, 1H), 3.50 (t, J=8.25 Hz, 2H), 0.88 (t, J=8.25 Hz, 2H), âˆ’0.08 (s, 9H); MS: m/z 452.9+454.9 (M+H⁺).

Step 2: Synthesis of 5-bromo-3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(2-trimethylsilanyl-ethoxy-methyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine

Into a 50 ml round bottom pressure tube were added 5-bromo-3-iodo-1-(2-trimethylsilanyl-ethoxymethyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (2.36 g, 5.2 mmol), 2-methoxyphenyl boronic acid (792 mg, 5.2 mmol), [1,1â€²-Bis(diphenylphosphino)-ferrocene]-dichloropalladium(II)-complex with dichlormethane (1:1) (43 mg, 0.052 mmol), acetonitrile (20 mL), tetrahydrofuran (5 ml) and of sodium carbonate (aq. 2 M, 9 ml, 18.0 mmol). The flask was sealed and heated at 65Â° C. for 2 hours. The reaction mixture was cooled to room temperature and concentrated. The residue was purified by flash chromatography (20% ethyl acetate in hexanes) to give 1.58 g (70%) of 5-bromo-3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(2-trimethylsilanyl-ethoxymethyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine. ¹H-NMR (250 MHz, CDCl₃) Î´ 8.355 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.155 (d, J=2 Hz, 1H), 7.64 (s, 1H), 7.50 (dd, J=7.5, 1.5 Hz, 1H), 7.23-7.35 (m, 1H), 6.98-7.10 (m, 2H), 5.68 (s, 2H), 3.86 (s, 3H), 3.58 (t, J=8.4 Hz, 2H), 0.94 (t, J=8.4 Hz, 3H), âˆ’0.06 (s, 9H); MS: m/z 432.1+434.1 (M+H⁺).

Step 3: Synthesis of piperidine-3-carboxylic Acid Dimethylamide

To a solution of piperidine-1,3-dicarboxylic acid 1-tert-butyl ester (1.0 g, 4.36 mmol) in THF (20 mL) was added 2,4-Dichloro-6-methoxy-[1,3,5]triazine (765 mg, 4.36 mmol) and N-methyl morpholine (1.44 mL, 13 mmol). The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 h. A dimethylamine solution in THF (10 mL, 2.0 M, 21.3 mmol) was added in one portion. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 15 h. Water (2.0 mL) was added and the mixture was concentrated in vacuo. The residue was partitioned between ethyl acetate (20 mL) and hydrochloric acid (aqueous 1 N, 15 mL). The organic layer was washed with sodium bicarbonate (sat. 10 mL) and brine (10 mL). It was then dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give the crude product (890 mg, 79%). The crude material was dissolved in dichloromethane (3.0 mL) and trifluoroacetic acid (3.0 mL) was added. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 90 min. It was then concentrated in vacuo. The residue was taken into saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate (10 mL) and extracted three times with chloroform (15 mL). The combined organic phases were dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give 510 mg (74% over 2 steps) piperidine-3-carboxylic acid dimethylamide, which was used directly in the next step.

Step 4: Synthesis of 1-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(2-trimethylsilanyl-ethoxymethyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-piperidine-3-carboxylic Acid Dimethylamide

To a microwave reaction vial were added 5-bromo-3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(2-trimethylsilanyl-ethoxymethyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (220 mg, 0.5 mmol), copper (I)-iodide (26 mg, 0.067 mmol), proline (0.13 mmol), potassium cabonate (280 mg, 1.5 mmol) and pyrrolidine-3-carboxylic acid dimethylamide (260 mg, 1.67 mmol). The vial was purged with nitrogen and DMSO (2.0 ml) was added. The mixture was sealed and irradiated in the microwave to 140Â° C. for 1 hour. The mixture was then partitioned between ethyl acetate (20 ml) and water (20 ml). The layers were separated and the aqueous layer was further extracted with ethyl acetate (10 mL). The combined organic layers were dried over Sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by flash chromatography on silica gel (0% to 100% ethyl acetate in hexanes) to give 151 mg (Ëœ60% with minor impurity) of 1-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(2-trimethylsilanyl-ethoxymethyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-piperidine-3-carboxylic acid dimethylamide as a yellowish oil. MS: m/z 509.3 (M+H⁺).

Step 5: Synthesis of 1-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-piperidine-3-carboxylic Acid Dimethylamide

Crude 1-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(2-trimethylsilanyl-ethoxymethyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-piperidine-3-carboxylic acid dimethylamide (151 mg, 0.29 mmol) obtained from step 4 was treated with trifluoroacetic acid (2 mL) at room temperature for 5 h. The volatiles were then removed in vacuo. The residue was taken into saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate solution (5 ml) and extracted three times with chloroform (10 ml). The combined organic phase was dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated to give a crude intermediate (110 mg).

The crude intermediate (110 mg, 0.27 mmol) was dissolved in methanol (2 ml). N,Nâ€²-dimethylethylenediamine (0.3 mL, 2.7 mmol) was added. The mixture was stirred at 50Â° C. for 5 hours, and then concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified using preparative HPLC to give 20 mg (21%) of 1-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-piperidine-3-carboxylic acid dimethylamide as a white solid. ¹H-NMR (500 MHz, d₆-DMSO) Î´ 11.58 (s, 1H), 8.09 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 7.59 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 7.50 (dd, J=7.5, 1.75 Hz, 2H), 7.467 (d, J=2.75, 1H), 7.23-7.33 (m, 1H), 6.99-7.13 (m, 2H), 3.81 (s, 3H), 3.40-3.53 (m, 2H), 2.90-3.10 (m, 4H), 2.82 (s, 3H), 2.51-2.80 (m, 2H), 1.70-1.85 (m, 3H), 1.30-1.60 (m, 1H); MS: m/z 379.4 (M+H⁺).

Method 81

Synthesis of 2-{1-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-pyrrolidin-3-yl}-N,N-dimethyl-acetamideStep 1: Synthesis of N,N-Dimethyl-2-pyrrolidin-3-yl-acetamide

To a solution of 3-dimethylcarbamoylmethyl-pyrrolidine-1-carboxylic acid tert-butyl ester (1.0 g, 4.36 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (20 ml) was added 2,4-dichloro-6-methoxy-[1,3,5]triazine (765 mg, 4.36 mmol) and N-methyl morpholine (1.44 ml, 13 mmol). The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour. A dimethylamine solution in tetrahydrofuran (11 ml, 2.0 M, 21.3 mmol) was added in one portion. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 15 hours. Water (2.0 mL) was added, and the mixture was concentrated in vacuo. The residue was partitioned between ethyl acetate (20 mL) and aqueous 1 N hydrochloric acid (15 ml). The organic layer was washed with sodium bicarbonate (sat. 10 ml) and brine (10 mL), then dried over sodium sulfate and evaporated in vacuo to give the crude product (990 mg, 88%). The crude material was dissolved in dichloromethane (2.0 mL) and trifluoroacetic acid (2.0 ml) was added. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 90 minutes. It Was then concentrated in vacuo and the residue partitioned between saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate (10 mL) and chloroform. The aqueous layer was extracted three times with chloroform (15 ml) and the combined organic layers were dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated in vacuo to give 530 mg (77% over 2 steps) of N,N-dimethyl-2-pyrrolidin-3-yl-acetamide as a yellowish oil, which was used in the subsequent step without further purification.

Step 2: Synthesis of 2-{1-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(2-trimethylsilanyl-ethoxymethyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-pyrrolidin-3-yl}-N,N-dimethyl-acetamide

A microwave reaction vial was charged with 5-bromo-3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(2-trimethylsilanyl-ethoxymethyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (347 mg, 0.8 mmol), copper(I)-iodide (31 mg, 0.067 mmol), proline (37 mg, 0.13 mmol), potassium carbonate (332 mg, 1.6 mmol) and N,N-dimethyl-2-pyrrolidin-3-yl-acetamide (250 mg, 1.6 mmol) obtained from step 1. The vial was flushed with nitrogen and dimethylsulfoxide (2.0 ml) was added. The reaction tube was sealed irradiated in the microwave to 140Â° C. for 1 hour. The crude was partitioned between ethyl acetate (20 ml) and water (20 ml). The layers were separated and the aqueous layer was extracted with ethyl acetate (10 ml). The combined organic layers were dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by flash chromatography on silica gel (0% to 100% ethyl acetate in hexanes) to give 87 mg (30%) of 2-{1-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(2-trimethylsilanyl-ethoxymethyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-pyrrolidin-3-yl}-N,N-dimethyl-acetamide as a yellowish oil. MS: m/z 509.3 (M+H⁺).

Step 3: Synthesis of 2-{1-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-pyrrolidin-3-yl}-N,N-dimethyl-acetamide

2-{1-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(2-trimethylsilanyl-ethoxymethyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-pyrrolidin-3-yl}-N,N-dimethyl-acetamide (87 mg, 0.15 mmol) obtained from step 2 was treated with trifluoroacetic acid (2 mL) at room temperature for 5 h. The volatiles were removed in vacuo and the residue was taken into saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate (5 mL) and extracted three times with chloroform (10 ml). The combined organic phase was dried over Sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated to give a crude intermediate (60 mg).

The crude intermediate (60 mg) was dissolved in methanol (2 ml). N,Nâ€²-dimethyl-ethylenediamine (0.3 ml, 2.7 mmol) was added in one portion. The mixture was stirred at 50Â° C. for 5 h. The mixture was then concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified using preparative HPLC to give 12 mg of (12%) of 2-{1-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-pyrrolidin-3-yl}-N,N-dimethyl-acetamide. ¹H-NMR (250 MHz, d₆-DMSO) Î´ 11.38 (d, J=2.25 Hz, 1H), 7.74 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 7.54 (d, J=2.75 Hz, 1H), 7.51 (dd, J=1.75, 7.5 Hz, 1H), 7.20-7.29 (m, 1H), 6.95-7.14 (m, 3H), 3.81 (s, 3H), 3.20-3.52 (m, 4H), 2.88-2.98 (m, 4H), 2.83 (s, 3H), 2.50-2.80 (m, 2H), 2.13-2.25 (m, 1H), 1.63-1.73 (m, 1H); MS: m/z 379.3 (M+H⁺).

Method 82

Synthesis of 1-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-pyrrolidine-3-carboxylic Acid DimethylamideStep 1: Synthesis of pyrrolidine-3-carboxylic Acid Dimethylamide

To a solution of pyrrolidine-1,3-dicarboxylic acid 1-tert-butyl ester (980 mg, 4.55 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (20 ml) was added 2,4-dichloro-6-methoxy-[1,3,5]triazine (800 mg, 4.55 mmol) and N-methyl morpholine (1.0 ml, 0.91 mmol). The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour. Dimethylamine (2.0 M in tetrahydrofuran, 11 ml, 22.0 mmol) was added in one portion. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for an additional 15 hours. Water (2.0 ml) was added, and the mixture was concentrated in vacuo. The residue was partitioned between ethyl acetate (20 ml) and 1 N hydrochloric acid (15 ml). The organic layer was washed with a saturated aqueous solution of sodium bicarbonate (10 ml) and brine (10 ml), then dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo to give the crude product (260 mg, 20%). The crude material was dissolved in dichloromethane (1.0 ml) and trifluoroacetic acid (1.0 ml) was added. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 90 minutes, and then concentrated in vacuo. The residue was taken into saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate (10 ml) and extracted three times with chloroform (10 ml). The combined organic layers were dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give 180 mg (20% over 2 steps) of pyrrolidine-3-carboxylic acid dimethylamide.

Step 2: Synthesis of 1-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(2-trimethylsilanyl-ethoxymethyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-pyrrolidine-3-carboxylic Acid Dimethylamide

To a microwave reaction vial were added 5-bromo-3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(2-trimethylsilanyl-ethoxymethyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (228 mg, 0.53 mmol), copper(I)-iodide (20 mg, 0.11 mmol), proline (24.4 mg, 0.21 mmol), potassium carbonate (220 mg, 1.6 mmol) and pyrrolidine-3-carboxylic acid dimethylamide (150 mg, 1.05 mmol) obtained in step 1. The mixture was flushed with nitrogen, and dimethylsulfoxide (1.5 ml) was added. The mixture was sealed and placed under microwave irradiation at 140Â° C. for 1 hour. The mixture was then partitioned between ethyl acetate (20 ml) and water (20 mL). The layers were separated and the aqueous layer was further extracted with ethyl acetate (10 ml). The combined organic layers were dried over Sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by flash chromatography (0% to 100% ethyl acetate in hexanes) to give 95 mg (36%) of 1-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(2-trimethylsilanyl-ethoxymethyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-pyrrolidine-3-carboxylic acid dimethylamide. MS: m/z 495.5 (M+H⁺).

Step 3: Synthesis of 1-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-pyrrolidine-3-carboxylic acid dimethylamide

1-[3-(2-Methoxy-phenyl)-1-(2-trimethylsilanyl-ethoxymethyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-pyrrolidine-3-carboxylic acid dimethylamide (95 mg, 0.29 mmol) was treated with trifluoroacetic acid (2 ml) at room temperature for 5 hours. The volatiles were then removed in vacuo. The residue was taken into saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate (5 mL) and extracted three times with chloroform (10 ml). The combined organic phase was dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated to give a crude intermediate (60 mg).

The crude intermediate from two batches (110 mg, 0.27 mmol) was dissolved in methanol (2 ml). N,Nâ€²-Dimethylethylenediamine (0.3 mL, 2.7 mmol) was added in one portion to the reaction mixture. The mixture was stirred at 50Â° C. for 5 hours, and then concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified using preparative HPLC to give 22 mg (21%) of 1-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-pyrrolidine-3-carboxylic acid dimethylamide. ¹H-NMR (250 MHz, d₆-DMSO) Î´ 11.41 (s, 1H), 7.79 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 7.55 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 7.51 (dd, J=1.8, 7.5 Hz, 1H), 7.20-7.29 (m, 1H), 6.98-7.14 (m, 3H), 3.81 (s, 3H), 3.46-3.52 (m, 1H), 3.29-3.44 (m, 3H), 3.08 (s, 3H), 2.85 (s, 3H), 2.11-2.24 (m, 2H); MS: m/z 365.0 (M+H⁺).

Method 83

2-amino-5-[3-(2-ethyl-2H-pyrazol-3-yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-benzamideStep 1: Synthesis of 2-ethyl-2H-pyrazole-3-carboxylic acid methoxy-methyl-amide

A solution of 2-ethyl-2H-pyrazole-3-carboxylic, di-iso-propylethylamine, and N,O-dimethylhydroxylamine hydrochloride in N,N-dimethylformamide was stirred at 0Â° C. (Benzotriazol-1-yloxy)tripyrrolidinophosphonium hexafluorophosphate was added and the reaction mixture was slowly warmed to room temperature. The reaction was stirred for 18 hours. The mixture was concentrated, and 20% 2-propanol in dichloromethane added. The mixture was washed with a saturated aqueous solution of sodium bicarbonate, dried over sodium sulfate, and concentrated. The crude material was purified by flash chromatography to give 2-ethyl-2H-pyrazole-3-carboxylic acid methoxy-methyl-amide. ¹H NMR (250 MHz, CDCl₃) Î´ 7.47 (d, J=2 Hz, 1H), 6.71 (d, J=2 Hz, 1H), 4.48 (quart, J=7.3 Hz, 2H), 3.62 (s, 3H), 3.34 (s, 3H), 1.42 (t, J=7.0 Hz, 3H).

Step 2: Synthesis of (5-bromo-2-fluoro-pyridin-3-yl)-(2-ethyl-2H-pyrazol-3-yl)-methanone

Diisopropylamine and tetrahydrofuran were combined and cooled to âˆ’20Â° C. n-Butyl lithium (2.5M in hexanes) was slowly added and the resulting mixture stirred at this temperature for 30 minutes. The temperature was lowered to âˆ’78Â° C. and neat 5-bromo-2-fluoropyridine was added (internal temperature was not allowed to exceed âˆ’68Â° C.). The reaction mixture was stirred at âˆ’78Â° C. for 40 minutes. The resulting mixture was added to a solution of 2-ethyl-2H-pyrazole-3-carboxylic acid methoxy-methyl-amide in tetrahydrofuran. The combined reaction mixture was stirred at âˆ’78Â° C. for 1 hour before the reaction mixture was slowly warmed to room temperature, and quenched with saturate aqueous ammonium chloride solution. The reaction mixture was extracted with dichloromethane, dried over sodium sulfate, and concentrated. The crude material was purified by flash chromatography on silica gel to afford (5-bromo-2-fluoro-pyridin-3-yl)-(2-ethyl-2H-pyrazol-3-yl)-methanone. MS: m/z 298.1+300.1 (M+H⁺).

Step 3: Synthesis of (2-amino-5-bromo-pyridin-3-yl)-(2-ethyl-2H-pyrazol-3-yl)-methanone

(5-Bromo-2-fluoro-pyridin-3-yl)-(2-ethyl-2H-pyrazol-3-yl)-methanone (685 mg, 2.29 mmol) was combined with ammonia (0.5M in dioxane, 30 ml, 15.00 mmol) and di-iso-propylethylamine (4 ml, 23.43 mmol). The mixture was stirred for 18 hours at 90Â° C. The reaction mixture concentrated in vacuo. The crude material was combined with a saturated aqueous solution of sodium bicarbonate, and ethyl acetate and the biphasic mixture was stirred for 1 hour. The organic layer was separated, dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated. The crude material was purified by flash chromatography (0 to 100% [10% methanol in ethyl acetate] in hexanes) to give 339 mg (50%) of (2-amino-5-bromo-pyridin-3-yl)-(2-ethyl-2H-pyrazol-3-yl)-methanone. ¹H-NMR (250 MHz, d₆-DMSO) Î´ 8.35 (d, J=2.3 Hz, 1H), 7.99 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 7.68 (s, 2H), 7.61 (d, J=1.8 Hz, 1H), 6.71 (d, J=1.8 Hz, 1H), 4.35 (quart., J=7.0 Hz, 2H), 1.37 (t, J=7.3 Hz, 3H); MS: m/z 295.1+297.1 (M+H⁺).

Step 4: Synthesis of 5-bromo-3-[1-(2-ethyl-2H-pyrazol-3-yl)-2-methoxy-vinyl]-pyridin-2-ylamine

To a solution of (methoxymethyl)triphenylphosphonium chloride (866 mg, 2.53 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (20 ml) was added potassium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide (5.0 ml, 0.5M, 2.5 mmol). The red-orange reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 45 minutes. A solution of (2-amino-5-bromo-pyridin-3-yl)-(2-ethyl-2H-pyrazol-3-yl)-methanone (339 mg, 1.15 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (10 ml) was added to the reaction mixture. The combined solution was stirred for 4 hours, and then quenched with saturated, aqueous ammonium chloride. The mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic layer was washed with water, dried over sodium sulfate, and concentrated in vacuo. The crude material was purified by flash chromatography (0 to 100% [10% methanol in ethyl acetate] in hexanes) to give 280 mg (75%) of 5-bromo-3-[1-(2-ethyl-2H-pyrazol-3-yl)-2-methoxy-vinyl]-pyridin-2-ylamine. MS: m/z 323.2+325.2 (M+H⁺).

Step 5: Synthesis of 5-bromo-3-(2-ethyl-2H-pyrazol-3-yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine

5-Bromo-3-[1-(2-ethyl-2H-pyrazol-3-yl)-2-methoxy-vinyl]-pyridin-2-ylamine (602 mg, 1.86 mmol), ethyl alcohol (30 ml), and concentration hydrochloric acid (30 ml) were combined and stirred at 100Â° C. for 18 hours. The reaction was quenched with sodium bicarbonate solution and the product was filtered off. The filtered product was dried under high vacuum to give 320 mg (59%) of 5-bromo-3-(2-ethyl-2H-pyrazol-3-yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine. MS: m/z 291.3+293.3 (M+H⁺).

Step 6: 2,2-Dimethyl-propionic acid 5-bromo-3-(2-ethyl-2H-pyrazol-3-yl)-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-1-ylmethyl Ester Prepared

5-Bromo-3-(2-ethyl-2H-pyrazol-3-yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine was dissolved in N,N-dimethylforamide at 4Â° C. To the solution was added sodium hydride in small portions. The flask was warmed to room temperature and stirred for 1 hour. To the mixture was added chloromethyl pivalate. The reaction mixture was stirred for 2 hours at room temperature, and quenched with methanol. Saturated ammonium chloride solution was added, and the mixture was concentrated in vacuo. The residue was dissolved in dichloromethane, and the organic layer was washed four times with a saturated solution of sodium bicarbonate. The organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was dissolved in acetone. The insoluble residue remaining was filtered off and discarded. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo and the crude material re-crystallized to afford 2,2-dimethyl-propionic acid 5-bromo-3-(2-ethyl-2H-pyrazol-3-yl)-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-1-ylmethyl ester. MS: m/z 405.3+407.3 (M+H⁺).

Step 7: 2,2-Dimethyl-propionic acid 5-(4-amino-3-dimethylcarbamoyl-phenyl)-3-(2-ethyl-2H-pyrazol-3-yl)-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-1-ylmethyl Ester

2,2-dimethyl-propionic acid 5-bromo-3-(2-ethyl-2H-pyrazol-3-yl)-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-1-ylmethyl ester, 2-amino-N,N-dimethyl-5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-benzamide, [1,1â€²-bis(diphenylphosphino)-ferrocene]dichloro-palladium(II) complex with dichloromethane, acetonitrile, 1M aqueous sodium carbonate solution, and tetrahydrofuran were combined in a microwave vial. The tube was placed in a microwave reactor and irradiated to 120Â° C. for 20 minutes. The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo and the residue partitioned between dichloromethane and water. The organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated. The crude product was purified by flash chromatography (0 to 100% [10% methanol in ethyl acetate] in hexanes) to give 2,2-dimethyl-propionic acid 5-(4-amino-3-dimethylcarbamoyl-phenyl)-3-(2-ethyl-2H-pyrazol-3-yl)-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-1-ylmethyl ester. MS: m/z 489.3 (M+H⁺).

Step 8: Synthesis of 2-amino-5-[3-(2-ethyl-2H-pyrazol-3-yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide

2,2-dimethyl-propionic acid 5-(4-amino-3-dimethylcarbamoyl-phenyl)-3-(2-ethyl-2H-pyrazol-3-yl)-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-1-ylmethyl ester was dissolved in tetrahydrofuran. 1 M sodium hydroxide in methanol was added to the mixture, and the reaction was stirred for 2 h at room temperature until complete conversion was confirmed by HPLC-MS. Saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate solution was added and the mixture extracted with dichloromethane. The organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated. The crude material was purified by preparative HPLC to give 2-amino-5-[3-(2-ethyl-2H-pyrazol-3-yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide. ¹H-NMR (250 MHz, d₆-DMSO) Î´ 12.12 (s, 1H), 8.51 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.97 (d, J=2.3 Hz, 1H), 7.76 (d, J=2.3 Hz, 1H), 7.55 (s, 1H), 7.47 (d, J=8.8 Hz, 1H), 7.35 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 6.82 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 6.53 (s, 1H), 5.29 (s, 2H), 4.20 (quart., J=7.3 Hz, 2H), 2.96 (s, 6H), 1.32 (t, J=7.1 Hz, 3H); MS: m/z 375.1 (M+H⁺).

Other compounds prepared according to Method 83:

¹H-NMR (250 MHz, d₆-DMSO) Î´ 12.27 (s, 1H), 8.64 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 8.15 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.83-7.80 (m, 2H), 7.75 (s, 1H), 7.55-7.50 (m, 2H), 7.40 (s, 1H), 6.58 (d, J=1.8 Hz, 1H), 4.23 (quart., J=7.3 Hz, 2H), 3.01 (s, 3H), 2.95 (s, 3H), 1.33 (t, J=7.1 Hz, 3H); MS: m/z 360.3 (M+H⁺).

Method 84

Synthesis of 5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-2-[3-(2-methylamino-ethyl)-ureido]-benzamideStep 1: Synthesis of 2,2,2-trifluoro-N-(2-methylamino-ethyl)-acetamide

To a round bottom flask was added N-methylethylenediamine (1.9 ml, 21.79 mmol), water (0.43 mL), acetonitrile (33 mL) and ethyl trifluoroacetate (6.5 ml, 54.62 mmol). The mixture was stirred at reflux for 18 hours. The mixture was concentrated in vacuo. Dichloromethane was added to the residue and the solid filtered off to give 3.71 g of crude 2,2,2-trifluoro-N-(2-methylamino-ethyl)-acetamide, which was used in step 2 without further purification. MS: m/z 171.1 (M+H⁺).

Step 2: Synthesis of methyl-[2-(2,2,2-trifluoro-acetylamino)-ethyl]-carbamic Acid Tert-Butyl Ester

2,2,2-trifluoro-N-(2-methylamino-ethyl)-acetamide obtained in step 1 (3.71 g, approx. 83% pure, 21.79 mmol) was dissolved in THF (50 mL). di-tert-butyl dicarbonate (9.50 g, 43.53 mmol) and triethylamine (12 ml, 86.10 mmol) were added. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 5 hours. The reaction mixture was quenched by addition of a saturated solution of sodium bicarbonate and extracted with dichloromethane. The organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated. The residue was purified by flash chromatography on silica gel (0-100% Ethyl acetate/hexanes) to afford 5.06 g (86%) of methyl-[2-(2,2,2-trifluoro-acetylamino)-ethyl]-carbamic acid tert-butyl ester. ¹H-NMR (250 MHz, CDCl₃) Î´ 7.95 (broad s, 1H), 3.41-3.42 (m, 4H), 2.83 (s, 3H), 1.39 (s, 9H).

Step 3: Synthesis of (2-amino-ethyl)-methyl-carbamic Acid Tert-Butyl Ester

To a solution of methyl-[2-(2,2,2-trifluoro-acetylamino)-ethyl]-carbamic acid tert-butyl ester (1.04 g, 3.85 mmol) in methanol (60 mL) was added 1 M aqueous lithium hydroxide (34 mL, 34.00 mmol). The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. It was then concentrated and ethyl acetate (50 mL) was added. The precipitate was filtered off and the filtrate concentrated to give 120 mg (18%) of (2-amino-ethyl)-methyl-carbamic acid tert-butyl ester. ¹H-NMR (250 MHz, CDCl₃) Î´ 3.22 (t, J=6.5 Hz, 2H), 2.72-2.86 (m, 5H), 1.36 (s, 9H).

Step 4: Synthesis of 5-bromo-2-isocyanato-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide

2-amino-5-bromo-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide (1.48 g, 6.09 mmol) was dissolved in a mixture of dichloromethane (60 mL) and saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate (60 mL). 16 mL of 20% w/w phosgene in toluene was added and the mixture stirred at room temperature for 30 min. The layers were separated and the aqueous layer extracted three times with dichloromethane (20 mL). The combined organic layers were dried over sodium sulfate and evaporated. The residue was concentrated down several times from ether and dichloromethane to afford 5-bromo-2-isocyanato-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide as a yellow power. ¹H-NMR (250 MHz, d₆-DMSO) Î´ 7.95 (d, J=2.4 Hz, 1H), 7.80 (dd, J=6.3, 2.7 Hz, 1H), 7.16 (d, J=8.88 Hz, 1H), 3.10 (s, 6H).

Step 5: Synthesis of {2-[3-(4-bromo-2-dimethylcarbamoyl-phenyl)-ureido]-ethyl}-methyl-carbamic Acid Tert-Butyl Ester

To a solution of (2-amino-ethyl)-methyl-carbamic acid tert-butyl ester (100 mg, 0.574 mmol) in DMF (2 mL) was added diisopropylethylamine (0.3 mL, 1.75 mmol) and 5-bromo-2-isocyanato-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide (154 mg, 0.572 mmol). The solution was stirred for 18 hours at 80Â° C. Ethyl acetate was added to the reaction mixture, and the combined mixture was washed 3 times with water. The organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. The crude material was recrystallized from a mixture of ethyl acetate and dichloromethane to give 75 mg (30%) of {2-[3-(4-bromo-2-dimethylcarbamoyl-phenyl)-ureido]-ethyl}-methyl-carbamic acid tert-butyl ester. ¹H-NMR (250 MHz, CDCl₃) Î´ 11.0 (br s, 1H), 8.35 (d, J=9.1 mmol), 7.77 (s, 1H), 7.57 (s, 1H), 7.42 (d, J=9.0 Hz, 1H), 3.45-3.55 (m, 5H), 2.97 (s, 6H), 2.86 (s, 3H), 1.12 (s, 9H).

Step 6: Synthesis of [2-(3-{2-dimethylcarbamoyl-4-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenyl}-ureido)-ethyl]-methyl-carbamic Acid Tert-Butyl Ester

A mixture of {2-[3-(4-bromo-2-dimethylcarbamoyl-phenyl)-ureido]-ethyl}-methyl-carbamic acid tert-butyl ester (75 mg, 0.17 mmol), 3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (85 mg, 0.168 mmol), and [1,1â€²-bis(diphenylphosphino)-ferrocene]dichloropalladium(II) dichloromethane adduct (13.7 mg) was dissolved in a mixture of acetonitrile (4 mL), 1 M aqueous sodium carbonate (4 mL) and tetrahydrofuran (1 mL). The mixture was irradiated in the microwave to 120Â° C. for 10 minutes. The reaction mixture was then concentrated and the residue was partitioned between dichloromethane and water. The organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated. The residue was purified by flash chromatography on silica gel (0 to 100% [10% methanol in ethyl acetate] in hexanes) to give 84 mg (66%) of [2-(3-{2-dimethylcarbamoyl-4-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenyl}-ureido)-ethyl]-methyl-carbamic acid tert-butyl ester. MS: m/z 741.5 (M+H⁺).

Step 7: Synthesis of [2-(3-{2-dimethylcarbamoyl-4-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenyl}-ureido)-ethyl]-methyl-carbamic Acid Tert-Butyl Ester

[2-(3-{2-dimethylcarbamoyl-4-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenyl}-ureido)-ethyl]-methyl-carbamic acid tert-butyl ester (84 mg, 0.113 mmol) was dissolved in a solution of tetrahydrofuran (20 ml) and methanol (5 ml). A solution of aqueous potassium hydroxide (50% w/v, 5 ml) was added to the reaction mixture, and the combined mixture was allowed to stir for 1 hour at room temperature. The reaction mixture was quenched with sodium bicarbonate solution, and extracted with dichloromethane. The organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash chromatography on silica gel (0-100% [10% methanol in ethyl acetate] in hexanes) to give 61 mg (92%) of [2-(3-{2-dimethylcarbamoyl-4-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenyl}-ureido)-ethyl]-methyl-carbamic acid tert-butyl ester. MS: m/z 587.5 (M+H⁺).

Step 8: Synthesis of (5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-2-[3-(2-methylamino-ethyl)-ureido]-benzamide

[2-(3-{2-dimethylcarbamoyl-4-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenyl}-ureido)-ethyl]-methyl-carbamic acid tert-butyl ester (61 mg, 0.103 mmol) was dissolved in 5% trifluoroacetic acid in dichloromethane (15 mL). The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour. The mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified by preparative HPLC to give 13 mg (26%) of (5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-2-[3-(2-methylamino-ethyl)-ureido]-benzamide. ¹H-NMR (250 MHz, d₆-DMSO) Î´ 11.90 (broad s, 1H), 11.04 (s, 1H), 9.15 (s, 1H), 8.64 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.43 (d, J=8.8 Hz, 1H), 8.24 (d, J=2 Hz, 1H), 8.06 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.81 (dd, J=8.8, 2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.72 (s, 1H), 7.61 (dd, J=7.4, 1.6 Hz, 1H), 7.28 (d, J=7.0 Hz, 1H), 7.13 (d, J=7.6 Hz, 1H), 7.06 (t, J=7.5 Hz, 1H), 3.84 (s, 3H), 2.92 (s, 6H), 2.42 (s, 3H); MS: m/z 487.1 (M+H⁺).

Other compounds prepared according to Method 84:

¹H-NMR (250 MHz, d₆-DMSO) Î´ 11.93 (broad s, 1H), 11.05 (s, 1H), 9.04 (s, 1H), 8.45 (d, J=8.8 Hz, 1H), 8.43 (d, J=8.8 Hz, 1H), 8.04 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.80 (dd, J=10.6, 1.8 Hz, 1H), 7.73 (s, 1H), 7.60 (dd, J=7.4, 1.6 Hz, 1H), 7.40-7.25 (m, 1H), 7.16-7.00 (m, 2H), 3.23 (t, J=5.9 Hz, 4H), 2.96 (s, 6H), 2.78 (t, J=13.8 Hz, 2H), 1.81 (d, J=11.3 Hz, 3H), 1.35 (t, J=13.6 Hz, 2H), MS: m/z 527.1 (M+H⁺).

¹H-NMR (250 MHz, d₆-DMSO) Î´ 11.91 (broad s, 1H), 11.08 (s, 1H), 9.11 (s, 1H), 8.62 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.44 (d, J=8.7 Hz, 1H), 8.22 (d, J=1.9 Hz, 1H), 8.02 (d, J=1.8 Hz, 1H), 7.81 (dd, J=8.8, 1.9 Hz, 1H), 7.72 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.60 (dd, J=7.6, 1.5 Hz, 1H), 7.30-7.25 (m, 1H), 7.20-7.00 (m, 2H), 3.83 (s, 3H), 2.97 (s, 6H), 2.79 (t, J=7.1 Hz, 2H), 1.80 (m, 2H), 1.14 (s, 9H), MS: m/z 543.2 (M+H⁺).

¹H-NMR (250 MHz, d₆-DMSO) Î´ 11.93 (s, 1H), 9.11 (s, 1H), 8.53 (d, J=1.9 Hz, 1H), 8.16 (d, J=1.9 Hz, 1H), 7.82-7.55 (m, 4H), 7.35-7.25 (m, 1H), 7.17-7.00 (m, 2H), 4.17 (t, J=5.7 Hz, 2H), 3.82 (s, 3H), 3.57 (t, J=4.5 Hz, 4H), 2.98 (s, 3H), 2.92 (s, 3H), 2.56 (t, J=5.7 Hz, 2H), 2.50-2.40 (m, 2H). LCMS 544.3 m/z (M+H⁺).

¹H-NMR (250 MHz, d₆-DMSO) Î´ 11.92 (s, 1H), 9.09 (s, 1H), 8.54 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.16 (d, J=3.8 Hz, 2H), 7.72-7.55 (m, 4H), 7.35-7.25 (m, 1H), 7.18-7.00 (m, 2H), 4.14 (t, J=5.8 Hz, 2H), 3.82 (s, 3H), 2.98 (s, 3H), 2.92 (s, 3H), 2.55 (m, 2H), 2.20 (s, 6H). LCMS 502.3 m/z (M+H⁺).

¹H-NMR (250 MHz, DMSO-d₆) Î´11.93 (s, 1H), 8.55 (d, J=2 Hz, 1H), 8.20 (s, 1H), 8.17 (d, J=1.9 Hz, 1H), 7.80-7.70 (m, 3H), 7.65-7.55 (m, 2H), 7.27 (t, J=7.5 Hz, 1H), 7.13 (d, J=8.1 Hz, 1H), 7.05 (t, J=7.5 Hz, 1H), 4.20 (t, J=5.4 Hz, 2H), 3.81 (s, 3H), 3.39 (1H in water peak), 3.02-2.92 (m, 8H), 2.79 (quart, 7.2 Hz, 2H), 1.10 (t, J=7.1 Hz, 3H); LCMS m/z 502.3 (M+H⁺).

Method 85

Synthesis of 2-[3-Isopropyl-3-(tetrahydro-furan-2-ylmethyl)-ureido]-5-[3-(2-methoxyphenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-benzamideStep 1: Synthesis of 2-isocyanato-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide

A 50 mL round bottomed flask was charged with 2-amino-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide (500 mg, 0.926 mmol), methylene chloride (10 mL) and saturated sodium bicarbonate solution (10 mL). The solution was cooled in an ice-water bath for 5 min. Phosgene (2.5 mL, 20% w/w solution in toluene) was added to the mixture. The solution was stirred rapidly for 30 minutes. The ice-bath was removed, and the reaction mixture was stirred for an additional 30 minutes. The layers were separated and the aqueous layer was extracted twice with methylene chloride. The combined organic fractions were dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated. The residue was triturated with anhydrous ether to give 457 mg (081 mmol, 87%) of 2-isocyanato-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide, which was used directly without any further purification or characterization in the subsequent step.

Step 2: Synthesis of 2-[3-isopropyl-3-(tetrahydro-furan-2-ylmethyl)-ureido]-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide

2-Isocyanato-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide (125 mg, 0.22 mmol), N,N-diisopropylethylamine (0.06 mL, 0.34 mmol), isopropyl-(tetrahydro-furan-2-ylmethyl)-amine (315 mg, 2.2 mmol), and methylene chloride (3 ml) were combined and stirred at room temperature for 18 hours. The reaction was concentrated to dryness in vacuo. The crude material was dissolved in a solution of tetrahydrofuran (4 mL) and methanol (1 mL). To the mixture was added 0.2 mL 50% w/v aqueous potassium hydroxide and the combined mixture stirred for 30 minutes. The reaction was quenched with saturated sodium bicarbonate, and the mixture was extracted with methylene chloride. The organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated to dryness in vacuo. The crude material was purified by preparative HPLC to give 15 mg (27 Î¼mol, 12%) of 2-[3-isopropyl-3-(tetrahydro-furan-2-ylmethyl)-ureido]-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide. ¹H-NMR (250 MHz, CDCl₃) Î´ 11.90 (s, 1H), 8.52 (d, J=2.1 Hz, 1H), 8.14 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.83 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 7.72-7.52 (m, 4H), 7.30 (t, J=7.1 Hz, 1H), 7.13 (d, J=7.9 Hz, 1H), 7.05 (t, J=7.4 Hz, 1H); MS: m/z 556.4 (M+H⁺).

Other compounds prepared by Method 85:

TABLE 48StructureMS: m/z (M + H⁺)530.2 528 529.2 515.2 527.2 543.2 541.2 513.2 497.0 561.2

Method 86

Synthesis of {2-dimethylcarbamoyl-4-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenyl}-carbamic acid 1-ethyl-pyrrolidin-3-yl EsterStep 1: Synthesis of 2-isocyanato-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide

A 50 mL round bottomed flask was charged with 2-amino-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide (500 mg, 0.926 mmol), methylene chloride (10 mL) and saturated sodium bicarbonate solution (10 mL). The solution was cooled in an ice-water bath for 5 min. Phosgene (2.5 mL, 20% w/w solution in toluene) was added to the mixture. The solution was stirred rapidly for 30 minutes. The ice-bath was removed, and the reaction mixture was stirred for an additional 30 minutes. The layers were separated and the aqueous layer was extracted twice with methyllene chloride. The combined organic fractions were dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated. The residue was triturated with anhydrous ether to give 457 mg (081 mmol, 87%) of 2-isocyanato-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide, which was used directly without any further purification or characterization in the subsequent step.

Step 2: Synthesis of {2-dimethylcarbamoyl-4-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]-pyridin-5-yl]-phenyl}-carbamic acid 1-ethyl-pyrrolidin-3-yl Ester

2-Isocyanato-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide (125 mg, 0.22 mmol), N,N-diisopropylethylamine (0.06 mL, 0.34 mmol), 1-ethyl-pyrrolidin-3-ol (253 mg, 2.2 mmol), and methylene chloride (3 mL) were combined and stirred at room temperature for 18 hours. The reaction was concentrated to dryness in vacuo. The crude material was dissolved in a solution of tetrahydrofuran (4 mL) and methanol (1 mL). To the mixture was added 0.2 mL 50% w/v aqueous potassium hydroxide and the combined mixture stirred for 30 minutes. The reaction was quenched with saturated sodium bicarbonate, and the mixture was extracted with methylene chloride. The organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated to dryness in vacuo. The crude material was purified by preparative HPLC to give 25 mg (47 Î¼mol, 22%) of {2-dimethylcarbamoyl-4-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenyl}-carbamic acid 1-ethyl-pyrrolidin-3-yl ester. ¹H-NMR (250 MHz, CDCl₃) Î´ 11.93 (s, 1H), 9.10 (s, 1H), 8.64 (d, J=1.9 Hz, 1H), 8.16 (d, J=2.1 Hz, 1H), 7.75-7.54 (m, 5H), 7.30 (t, J=7.1 Hz, 1H), 7.13 (d, J=7.9 Hz, 1H), 7.05 (t, J=7.5 Hz, 1H), 5.10-5.02 (m, 1H), 3.82 (s, 3H), 2.97 (s, 3H), 2.93 (s, 3H), 2.77-2.24 (m, 7H), 1.80-1.72 (m, 1H), 1.03 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 3H); MS: m/z 528.3 (M+H⁺).

Other compounds prepared by Method 86:

TABLE 49StructureMS: m/z (M + H⁺)528.2 528.2 511.1 515.2 501.1 542.2 542.2 529.2 542.2 537.1 530.2 558.2 546.2 556.2 525.1 542.1

Method 87

Synthesis of 3-fluoro-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-2-[(pyridin-4-ylmethyl)-amino]-benzamideStep 1: Synthesis of 2,3-difluoro-5-iodo-benzoic Acid

2,3-Difluorobenezoic acid (7.50 g, 47.43 mmol), silver(I)-sulfate (14.79 g, 47.43 mmol), iodine (12.04 g, 47.43 mmol), and concentrated sulfuric acid (300 ml) were combined and stirred in a sealed tube at 100Â° C. for 18 hours. The reaction mixture was filtered through a glass filter, washing the precipitate with concentrated sulfuric acid. The combined filtrates were poured into cold water and stirred for 20 minutes. The resulting precipitate was filtered to give 7.40 g (55%) of 2,3-difluoro-5-iodo-benzoic acid. ¹H-NMR (250 MHz, d₆-DMSO) Î´ 13.78 (broad s, 1H), 8.18-8.10 (m, 1H), 7.96-7.91 (m, 1H).

Step 2: Synthesis of 2,3-difluoro-5-iodo-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide

2,3-Difluoro-5-iodo-benzoic acid (7.20 g, 25.35 mmol), di-iso-propylethylamine (4.5 ml, 25.83 mmol), trimethylacetyl chloride (3.2 ml, 25.98 mmol), and dichloromethane (100 ml) were combined and stirred at room temperature for 1 hour. Dimethylamine (2 M in tetrahydrofuran, 22.0 ml, 44.00 mmol) was added to the reaction, and the combined mixture was stirred for an addition 18 hours at room temperature. The mixture was concentrated in vacuo, and the crude product was purified by flash chromatography on silica gel (0 to 40% ethyl acetate in hexanes) to afford 7.17 g (91%) of 2,3-difluoro-5-iodo-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide. ¹H-NMR (250 MHz, d₆-DMSO) Î´ 8.02-7.90 (m, 1H), 7.60-7.54 (m, 1H), 2.99 (s, 3H), 2.84 (s, 3H); LCMS m/z 400.0 (M+H⁺); MS: m/z 312.0 (M+H⁺).

Step 3: Synthesis of 3-fluoro-5-iodo-N,N-dimethyl-2-[(pyridin-4-ylmethyl)-amino]-benzamide

2,3-Difluoro-5-iodo-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide (507, 1.63 mmol), 4-(aminomethyl)-pyridine (1.8 ml, 17.73 mmol), di-iso-propylethylamine (0.31 ml, 1.78 mmol), and dioxane (3 ml) were combined and stirred for 18 hours at 75Â° C. The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo to give approximately 650 mg of crude 3-fluoro-5-iodo-N,N-dimethyl-2-[(pyridin-4-ylmethyl)-amino]-benzamide, which was used directly in the next step. MS: m/z 400.2 (M+H⁺).

Step 4: Synthesis of 3-fluoro-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-2-[(pyridin-4-ylmethyl)-amino]-benzamide

Crude 3-fluoro-5-iodo-N,N-dimethyl-2-[(pyridin-4-ylmethyl)-amino]-benzamide (Ëœ1.63 mmol) from the previous step and 3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (822 mg, 1.63), [1,1â€²-bis(diphenylphosphino)-ferrocene]dichloropalladium(II) complex with dichloromethane (1:1, 133 mg, 0.16 mmol), acetonitrile (8 ml) and 2 M aqueous sodium carbonate solution (4 ml) were placed in a microwave reactor and irradiated to 100Â° C. for 10 minutes. The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo and the residue partitioned between dichloromethane and water. The organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate, and concentrated. The crude product was purified by flash chromatography on silica gel (0 to 100% [10% methanol in ethyl acetate] in hexanes) to afford 236 mg (22% for 2 steps) of 3-fluoro-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-2-[(pyridin-4-ylmethyl)-amino]-benzamide. MS: m/z 650.3 (M+H⁺).

Step 5: 3-Fluoro-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-2-[(pyridin-4-ylmethyl)-amino]-benzamide

3-Fluoro-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-2-[(pyridin-4-ylmethyl)-amino]-benzamide was dissolved in a mixture of tetrahydrofuran and methanol. A solution of aqueous potassium hydroxide (50% w/v) was added to the reaction mixture, and the combined mixture was allowed to stir for 1 hour at room temperature. The reaction mixture was quenched with sodium bicarbonate solution, and extracted with dichloromethane. The organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash chromatography (0-100% [10% methanol in ethyl acetate] in hexanes) to afford 3-fluoro-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-2-[(pyridin-4-ylmethyl)-amino]-benzamide. ¹H-NMR (250 MHz, DMSO-d₆) Î´ 11.87 (s, 1H), 8.53-8.41 (m, 3H), 8.09 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.70 (d, J=2.6 Hz, 1H), 7.60 (dd, J=7.5, 1.5 Hz, 1H), 7.52 (dd, J=14.0, 2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.33-7.21 (m, 3H), 7.17 (d, J=1.6 Hz, 1H), 7.11 (d, J=7.9 Hz, 1H), 7.04 (t, J=7.4 Hz, 1H), 6.01 (broad s, 1H), 4.42 (d, J=6.6 Hz, 2H), 3.80 (s, 3H), 2.89 (s, 12H), 2.59 (s, 12H); MS: m/z 496.3 (M+H⁺).

Other compounds prepared by Method 87:

TABLE 50

Method 88

Synthesis of 2,3-difluoro-5-iodo-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide

2,3 Difluoro-5-iodobenzoic acid (10.8 g, 38 mmol) was suspended in 80 mL of dry dichloromethane under nitrogen. Di-iso-propylethylamine (6.6 mL, 38 mmol) was added and the mixture was cooled to 0Â° C. Pivaloyl chloride (4.7 mL, 38 mmol) was added and the solution was stirred at 0Â° C. for 1.5 hrs. Dimethylamine was added (40% wt solution in water, 10.6 mL, 83 mmol) and the reaction mixture was stirred for 5 hrs. The reaction was quenched with sodium bicarbonate and diluted with dichloromethane (50 mL). The layers were separated, the organic phase was washed with 1 N hydrochloric acid and brine. The organic phase was dried over magnesium sulfate and concentrated to give 10.3 g (33 mmol, 87%) of 2,3-difluoro-5-iodo-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide as a colorless solid. ¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d6) Î´ 7.95 (ddd, J₁=10 Hz, J₂=7.5 Hz, J₃=2 Hz, 1H), 7.57 (dt, J₁=10 Hz, J₂=2 Hz, 1H), 2.98 (s, 3H), 2.84 (s, 3H); MS: m/z 312 [MH⁺]

Other compounds prepared by Method 88:

TABLE 51Structure

Method 89

Step 1: Synthesis of 3-Fluoro-2-(4-hydroxy-cyclohexylamino)-5-iodo-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide

2,3-Difluoro-5-iodo-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide (2.36 g, 7.6 mmol) and trans-4-amino-cyclohexanol (3.5 g, 30 mmol) were stirred at 120Â° C. for 5 hrs. The resulting solid was dissolved in 1 N hydrochloric acid and dichloromethane. The aqueous layer was extracted with dichloromethane twice. The combined organic phases were washed with saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate solution and brine, dried over magnesium sulfate and concentrated to give 2.8 g (6.84 mmol, 91%) of 3-fluoro-2-(4-hydroxy-cyclohexylamino)-5-iodo-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide as a white solid. ¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d6) Î´ 7.45 (dd, J₁=12 Hz, J₂=2 Hz, 1H), 7.15 (s, 1H), 4.57 (dd, J=10 Hz, J₂=3 Hz, 1H), 4.50 (d, J=4.5 Hz, 1H), 3.33 (m, 1H), 3.02 (m, 1H), 2.94 (bs, 3H), 2.81 (bs, 3H), 1.74 (m, 4H), 1.04-1.24 (m, 4H); MS: m/z 407 [MH⁺]

Other compounds prepared by Method 89:

TABLE 52Structure

Method 90

Synthesis of 3-fluoro-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-2-(1-methyl-piperidin-4-ylamino)-benzamide

Into a 5 mL screw-cap vial were added 2,3-Difluoro-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide (100 mg, 0.178 mmol) and 1-methyl-piperidin-4-ylamine (102 mg, 0.712 mmol). The vial was sealed and placed in heated block at 120Â° C. for 48 h. The reaction solution was dissolved in 1:1 methanol/acetone (2 mL total) and treated with 100 Î¼L of 50% w/w aqueous potassium hydroxide for 1 h. Glacial Acetic acid was added to obtain pH 7, then the reaction mixture was concentrated. The residue was purified by reverse-phase HPLC to afford the title compound as a white powder (4 mg, 0.008 mmol, 4% yield). ¹H-NMR (500 MHz, d₆-DMSO) Î´=11.87 (d, J=2 Hz, 1H), 8.49 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 8.12 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.71 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 7.61 (dd, J₁=8.0 Hz, J₂=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.54 (dd, J=13.5 Hz, J₂=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.24-7.3 (m, 2H), 7.12 (dd, J₁=8.5 Hz, J₂=1.0 Hz, 1H), 7.04 (td, J₁=7.5 Hz, J₂=1.0 Hz, 1H), 4.57 (dd, J₁=5 Hz, J₂=2.5 Hz, 1H), 3.81 (s, 3H), 3.14 (m, 1H), 3.00 (s, 3H), 2.9 (s, 3H), 3.14 (m, 1H), 2.12 (s, 3H), 1.87 (m, 2H), 1.74 (m, 2H), 1.41 (m, 2H); MS: m/z 502 [MH⁺].

Other compounds prepared by Method 90:

TABLE 53Structure

Method 91

Synthesis of 3-Fluoro-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-2-(1-oxo-hexahydro-1,4-thiopyran-4-ylamino)-benzamide

3-Fluoro-2-(4-hydroxy-cyclohexylamino)-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrazolo[3,4-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide (72 mg, 0.14 mmol) and 3-chloroperbenzoic acid (36 mg, 0.15 mmol) were dissolved in 5 mL dichloromethane and stirred overnight. The reaction was quenched with a saturated sodium bicarbonate solution, applied to a Varian Chemelut cartridge and eluted with ethyl acetate. The eluent was concentrated and the brown residue was purified by flash silica gel chromatography using a gradient of a solution of 90 parts ethyl acetate and 10 parts methanol and hexanes to afford 23 mg of a light brown solid (0.043 mmol, 30% yield). ¹H-NMR (500 MHz, d₆-DMSO, mixture of Sâ• O diastereomers) Î´=11.88 (s, 1H), 8.51 (s, 1H), 8.13 (s, 1H), 7.71 (d, J=2 Hz, 1H), 7.61 (d, J=9 Hz, 1H), 7.57 (m, 1H), 7.28 (m, 2H), 7.12 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.05 (t, J=7.5 Hz, 1H), 4.75 (m, 1H), 3.81 (s, 3H), 3.46 (m, 0.5H), 3.3 (m, 0.5H), 3.14 (m, 1H), 3.01 (s, 3H), 2.91 (m, 4H), 2.64 (m, 2H), 2.15 (m, 1H), 2.02 (m, 1H), 1.8 (m, 1H), 1.64 (m, 1H); MS: m/z 521 [MH⁺].

Method 92

Step 1: Synthesis of 3-Fluoro-2-(4-hydroxy-cyclohexylamino)-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-benzoic Acid

A mixture of 3-(2-Methoxy-phenyl)-5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (1.24 g, 3.27 mmol), 3-Fluoro-2-(4-hydroxy-cyclohexylamino)-5-iodo-benzoic acid (1.65 g, 3.27 mmol) and 1,1â€²-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocenepalladium(II)-dichloride dichlormethane adduct (66 mg, 0.08 mmol) in dimethylacetamide (20 mL) and aqueous solution of sodium carbonate (2M, 4.9 mL) was stirred at 100Â° C. for 14 h. The cooled reaction mixture was poured into 150 mL of water acidified with 6 N hydrochloric acid and filtered. The solids were redissolved in a mixture of dichloromethane and ethanol and filtered again. The filtrate was concentrated and the brown residue was purified by flash silica gel chromatography using a gradient of a solution of 90 parts ethyl acetate, 10 parts methanol, and one part acetic acid and hexanes afforded 1.5 g of a light brown solid (2.38 mmol, 76% yield). MS: m/z 630 [MH⁺]

Step 2: Synthesis of 3-Fluoro-2-(4-hydroxy-cyclohexylamino)-N-(2-hydroxy-ethyl)-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N-methyl-benzamide

To a solution of 3-Fluoro-2-(4-hydroxy-cyclohexylamino)-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-benzoic acid (63 mg, 0.1 mmol) in anhydrous THF (1 mL) was added O-(7-azabenzotriazol-1-yl)-N,N,Nâ€²,Nâ€²-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate (HATU) (57 mg, 0.15 mmol), diisopropylethylamine (52 Î¼L, 0.3 mmol), and 2-methylaminoethanol (11 mg, 0.15 mmol). The reaction solution was irradiated in a Personal Chemistry Optimizer at 100Â° C. for 2 min and 200 Î¼L of 50% w/v aqueous potassium hydroxide was added. The mixture was stirred for 15 h and 100 Î¼L of glacial acetic acid was added. The suspension was dissolved in DMSO and water and directly purified by reverse-phase HPLC to afford the title compound as a white powder (5 mg, 0.009 mmol, 9% yield). ¹H-NMR (500 MHz, d₆-DMSO, 70Â° C.) Î´=8.48 (d, J=2 Hz, 1H), 8.11 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.67 (s, 1H), 7.60 (dd, J=7 Hz, J₂=2 Hz, 1H), 7.47 (dd, J₁=14 Hz, J₂=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.28 (m, 1H), 7.22 (m, 1H), 7.12 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.05 (t, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 4.55 (m, 1H), 3.99 (m, 1H), 3.82 (s, 3H), 3.11 (m, 1H), 2.97 (s, 3H), 2.9 (m, 3H), 2.76 (m, 2H), 2.66 (m, 2H), 1.92 (m, 4H), 1.56 (m, 4H); MS: m/z 533 [MH⁺].

Other compounds prepared by Method 92:

TABLE 54Structure

Method 93

Synthesis of 3-R-Dimethylamino-pyrrolidine-1-carboxylic Acid {2-dimethylcarbamoyl-6-fluoro-4-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenyl}-amide

2-Amino-3-fluoro-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide (50 mg, 0.124 mmol) and triethylamine (26 mL) were dissolved in 5 mL of dry dichloromethane and the solution was cooled to 0Â° C. Phosgene (20 wt % in toluene, 78 mL, 0.15 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred for 1 minute and 3-(R)-dimethylaminopyrrolidine was added at 0Â° C. The reaction was stirred for 3 hrs concentrated and directly loaded onto silica gel. Purification by flash silica gel chromatography using a gradient of a solution of 40 parts ethyl acetate, 40 parts dichloromethane, 20 parts methanol, and one part ammonium hydroxide and dichloromethane afforded the title compound as a white solid (2 mg, 0.004 mmol, 3% yield). ¹H-NMR (500 MHz, d₆-DMSO) Î´=8.57 (d, J=2 Hz, 1H), 8.21 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.74 (s, 1H), 7.68 (dd, J₁=11 Hz, J₂=2 Hz, 1H), 7.62 (dd, J₁=8.0 Hz, J₂=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.42 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.29 (m, 1H), 7.12 (dd, J₁=7.5 Hz, J₂=1.0 Hz, 1H), 7.05 (td, J=7.5 Hz, J₂=1.0 Hz, 1H), 3.81 (s, 3H), 3.58 (m, 1H), 3.49 (m, 1H), 3.26 (m, 1H), 2.93 (s, 3H), 2.85 (s, 3H), 2.66 (m, 1H), 2.16 (s, 6H), 2.06 (m, 1H), 1.69 (m, 1H); MS: m/z 545 [MH⁺].

Other compounds prepared by Method 93:

TABLE 55Structure

Method 94

Step 1: Synthesis of 2-methoxycarbonylamino-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-benzoic Acid

Methyl chloroformate (0.88 ml, 11.4 mmol) was added to a solution of 2-amino-5-iodo-benzoic acid (2.50 g, 9.5 mmol) and di-iso-propyl ethyl amine (5.96 ml, 34.4 mmol) in dichloromethane (50 ml) and the resulting mixture stirred at room temperature for 4 hours. The solvent was evaporated and the residue used without further purification. MS: m/z 322.1 (M+H⁺). To this crude was added tetrahydrofuran/acetonitrile/50% w/v potassium carbonate (80 ml), 3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (4.80 g, 9.5 mmol). This mixture was degassed with nitrogen, split into 4 portions and irradiated in the microwave to 150Â° C. for 30 min. The reaction mixtures were then combined and extracted with ethyl acetate (3Ã—), dried over magnesium sulfate, and purified by silica gel chromatography to produce 2-methoxycarbonylamino-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-benzoic acid as a white solid. (2.51 g, 46%). MS: m/z 572.6 (M+H⁺).

Step 2: Synthesis of [4-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-2-(pyrrolidine-1-carbonyl)-phenyl]-carbamic Acid Methyl Ester

O-(7-Azabenzotriazol-1-yl)-N,N,Nâ€²,Nâ€²-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate (49.9 mg, 0.13 mmol) was added to a solution of 2-methoxycarbonylamino-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-benzoic acid (75 mg, 0.13 mmol), pyrrolidine (9.33, 0.13 mmol) and di-iso-propyl ethyl amine (51 mg, 0.39 mmol) in N,N-Dimethylformamide (1 ml). The reaction was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour, then methanol (2 ml) was added followed by aqueous sodium hydroxide (0.2 ml) and the reaction was stirred at room temperature for 16 hours. This solution was then neutralized with acetic acid and the compound was purified by preparative mass-triggered reverse-phase HPLC chromatography to give [4-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-2-(pyrrolidine-1-carbonyl)-phenyl]-carbamic acid methyl ester as a white solid.). ¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d6) Î´ 1.81 (p, J=6 Hz 1H); 1.87 (p, J=6 Hz 1H); 3.41 (t, J=6 Hz 1H); 3.48 (t, J=6 Hz 1H); 3.65 (s, 3H); 3.81 (s, 3H); 7.04 (t, J=8 Hz 1H) 7.13 (d, J=8 Hz 1H); 7.29 (t, J=8 Hz, 1H); 7.60 (d, J=8 Hz 1H); 7.75 (m, 4H); 8.17 (s, 1H); 8.55 (s, 1H); 9.23 (s, br, 1H); 11.95 (s, br, 1H) (21.8 mg, 36% yield MS: m/z 471.5 (M+H⁺).

Other compounds prepared by Method 94:

TABLE 56MSm/z(M +StructureH⁺)548.6 500.6 548.6 500.6 536.6 443.5 500.6 528.6 536.6 501.6 528.6 473.5 501.6 528.6 501.6 554.7 501.6 501.6 500.6 501.6 528.6 514.6 476.5 503.6 507.5 515.6 470.5 511.6 521.5 582.6 514.6 443.5 521.5 503.6 501.6 515.6 568.6 502.6 487.6 486.5 486.5 582.6 487.5 457.5 542.7 528.6 528.6 500.6 514.6 515.6 500.6 428.5 471.5 516.6 515.6 500.6 428.5 487.5 551.6 515.6 500.6 514.6 514.6 542.7 514.6 515.6

Method 95

Synthesis of 5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-2-(pyrimidin-5-ylamino)-benzamideStep 1: Synthesis of 5-bromo-N,N-dimethyl-2-(pyrimidin-5-ylamino)-benzamide

A vial is charged with 120 mg (0.49 mmol) of 2-amino-5-bromo-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide, 11.4 mg (12 Î¼mol) of tris(dibenzylideneacetone)dipalladium(0), 15.9 mg (27 Î¼mol) of 4,5-bis(diphenylphosphino)-9,9-dimethylxanthene (XantPhos), 290 mg (0.89 mmol) of cesium carbonate, and 159 mg (1.00 mmol) of 5-bromo-pyrimidine. The vial is flushed with nitrogen and 2 mL of anhydrous 1,4-dioxane are added. The vial is sealed and heated to 100Â° C. for 17 h. The resulting mixture is diluted with methanol and dichloromethane and filtered over a 0.45 Î¼m PTFE syringe filter. The filtrate is evaporated and the residue purified by flash chromatography on silica gel using a gradient of ethyl acetate containing 10% v/v of methanol in hexanes to afford 115.6 mg (0.39 mmol, 80%) of 5-bromo-N,N-dimethyl-2-(pyrimidin-5-ylamino)-benzamide as an ivory solid. ¹H-NMR (500 MHz, d₆-DMSO): Î´8.66 (s, 1H), 8.48 (s, 2H), 8.13 (s, br., 1H), 7.51 (dd, 1H), 7.43 (d, 1H), 7.23 (d, 1H), 2.86 (s, 3H), 2.81 (s, 3H); MS: m/z 321.0+323.0 (M+H⁺).

Step 2: Synthesis of 5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-2-(pyrimidin-5-ylamino)-benzamide

125 mg (0.25 mmol) of 3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine, 14 mg (17 Î¼mol) of dichloro[1,1â€²-bis(diphenylphoshino)ferrocene]palladium(II) dichloromethane adduct and 65 mg (0.22 mmol) of 5-bromo-N,N-dimethyl-2-(pyrimidin-5-ylamino)-benzamide were place in a microwave vial. 1.5 mL of acetonitrile, 0.75 mL of tetrahydrofuran and 1.5 mL of a saturated aqueous solution of sodium bicarbonate were added. The vial was sealed and irradiated in a Personal ChemistryÂ® Optimizer to 130Â° C. for 20 min. The organic layer was separated and evaporated. The resulting residue was purified by flash chromatography on silica gel using a gradient of ethyl acetate containing 10% v/v of methanol in hexanes to afford 67 mg (0.11 mmol, 50%) of 5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-2-(pyrimidin-5-ylamino)-benzamide. MS: m/z 619.0 (M+H⁺).

Step 3: Synthesis of 5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-2-(pyrimidin-5-ylamino)-benzamide

67 mg (0.11 mmol) of 5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-2-(pyrimidin-5-ylamino)-benzamide was dissolved in 3 mL of hot ethanol. 200 Î¼L of 50% w/v aqueous potassium hydroxide was added and the mixture left at ambient temperature for 4.5 h. 10% w/v aqueous citric acid was added and the mixture partitioned between dichloromethane and water. The aqueous layer was extracted three times with dichloromethane. The combined organic phases were dried over sodium sulfate and evaporated. The residue was purified by mass-triggered reverse-phase HPLC to afford 21.9 mg (47 Î¼mol, 43%) of 5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-2-(pyrimidin-5-ylamino)-benzamide as a beige solid. ¹H-NMR (500 MHz, d₆-DMSO): Î´ 11.91 (s, br., 1H), 8.64 (s, 1H), 8.55 (d, 1H), 8.51 (s, 2H), 8.17 (d, 1H), 8.12 (s, 1H), 7.74 (d, 1H), 7.73 (dd, 1H), 7.63-7.61 (m, 2H), 7.39 (d, 1H), 7.30 (dd(d), 1H), 7.14 (d, 1H), 7.06 (t, 1H), 3.83 (s, 3H), 2.90 (s, 3H), 2.88 (s, 3H); MS: m/z 465.0 (M+H⁺).

Other compounds prepared by Method 95:

TABLE 57

Method 96

Step 1: Synthesis of 2-tert-butoxycarbonylamino-3-{3-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenyl}-propionic Acid

To a mixture of 2-tert-butoxycarbonylamino-3-{3-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenyl}-propionic acid (500 mg, 0.99 mmol) and 3-(3-bromo-phenyl)-2-tert-butoxycarbonylamino-propionic acid (344 mg, 1.0 mmol) in a 20 mL microwave reaction flask was added THF (3 mL), acetonitrile (3 mL) and sodium carbonate (3 mL, 1 N aqueous solution, 3 mmol). The mixture was purged with nitrogen for 1 minute. Dichloro[1,1â€²-bis(diphenylphoshino)ferrocene]palladium(II) dichloro-methane adduct (82 mg, 0.1 mmol) was added and the purging continued for another minute. The flask was sealed and irradiated in a microwave reactor to 120Â° C. for 20 min. Saturated sodium chloride (10 mL) was added and the pH was adjusted to 5 by addition of hydrochloric acid (1 N). The resulting mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate (10 mLÃ—3). The combined organic layers were dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated. The residue was purified by flash chromatography on silica gel using a gradient of methanol in dichloromethane to afford 2-tert-butoxycarbonylamino-3-{3-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenyl}-propionic acid as a yellow solid (370 mg, 58% yield). MS: m/z 642 (M+H⁺).

Step 2: Synthesis of 2-amino-3-{3-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenyl}-N,N-dimethyl-propionamide

To a solution of 2-tert-butoxycarbonylamino-3-{3-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenyl}-propionic acid (100 mg, 0.16 mmol), dimethylamine (2 N solution in THF, 0.16 mL, 0.32 mmol), diisopropylethylamine (24 mg, 0.19 mmol) in DMF (1 mL) was added O-(7-azabenzotriazol-1-yl)-N,N,Nâ€²,Nâ€²,Nâ€²-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate (73 mg, 0.19 mmol). The resulting solution was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour. Methanol (1 mL) and potassium hydroxide (50% w/v in water, 0.2 mL) were added and the resulting mixture was stirred for 30 minutes. The mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure. To the residue was added trifluoroacetic acid (1 mL) and the resulting mixture was sonicated until the residue is completely dissolved. The solution was concentrated and the residue purified by mass-triggered reverse-phase HPLC to afford 2-amino-3-{3-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenyl}-N,N-dimethyl-propionamide as a pale yellow solid (23 mg, 35%). MS: m/z 415 (M+H⁺). ¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d6) Î´ 2.77 (s, 3H), 2.82 (s, 3H), 2.77 (dd, 1H), 2.89 (dd, 1H), 3.84 (s, 3H), 7.05 (t, 1H), 7.14 (d, 1H), 7.19 (d, 1H), 7.30 (dt, 1H), 7.38 (t, 1H), 7.53 (s, 1H), 7.56 (d, 1H), 7.585 (dd, 1H), 7.73 (d, 1H), 8.15 (d, 1H), 8.53 (d, 1H), 11.87 (s, 1H).

Other compounds prepared by Method 96:

TABLE 58StructureMS: m/z (M + H⁺)484 498 484

Method 97

Synthesis of 2-amino-5-[3-(1H-indol-7-yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-benzamideStep 1: Synthesis of 5-bromo-3-(1H-indol-7-yl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine

To a mixture of 5-bromo-3-iodo-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (1 g, 2.1 mmol) and 1H-indole-7-boronic acid (338 mg, 2.1 mmol) in a 20 mL microwave reaction flask was added THF (6.5 mL), acetonitrile (6.5 mL) and sodium carbonate (6.5 mL, 1 N aqueous solution, 6.5 mmol). The mixture was purged with nitrogen for 1 minute. Dichloro[1,1â€²-bis(diphenylphoshino)ferrocene]-palladium(II) dichloromethane adduct (164 mg, 0.2 mol) was added and the purging continued for another minute. The flask was sealed and irradiated in a microwave reactor to 60Â° C. for 30 minutes. Saturated sodium chloride (15 mL) was added and the pH was adjusted to 7 using hydrochloric acid (1 N). The resulting mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate (10 mLÃ—3). The combined organic layers were dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated. The residue was purified by flash chromatography on silica gel using a gradient of methanol in dichloromethane to afford 5-bromo-3-(1H-indol-7-yl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine as a light brown solid (802 mg, 82% yield). MS: m/z 466 (M+H⁺).

Step 2: Synthesis of 2-tert-Butoxycarbonylamino-5-[3-(1H-indol-7-yl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-benzoic Acid Methyl Ester

To a mixture of 5-bromo-3-(1H-indol-7-yl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (802 mg, 1.7 mmol) and 2-tert-butoxycarbonylamino-5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-benzoic acid methyl ester (641 mg, 1.7 mmol) in a 20 mL microwave reaction flask was added THF (6 mL), acetonitrile (6 mL) and sodium carbonate (6 mL, 1 N aqueous solution, 6 mmol). The mixture was purged with nitrogen for 1 minute. Dichloro[1,1â€²-bis(diphenylphoshino)ferrocene]palladium(II) dichloromethane adduct (122 mg, 170 Î¼mol) was added and the purging continued for another minute. The flask was sealed and irradiated in a microwave reactor to 70Â° C. for 15 minutes. Saturated sodium chloride (15 mL) was added and the pH was adjusted to 7 using hydrochloric acid (1 N). The resulting mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate (10 mLÃ—3). The combined organic layers were dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated. The residue was purified by flash chromatography on silica gel using a gradient of methanol in dichloromethane to afford 2-tert-butoxycarbonylamino-5-[3-(1H-indol-7-yl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-benzoic acid methyl ester as a yellow solid (605 mg, 56% yield). MS: m/z 637 (M+H⁺).

Step 3: Synthesis of 2-tert-butoxycarbonylamino-5-[3-(1H-indol-7-yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-benzoic Acid

2-tert-Butoxycarbonylamino-5-[3-(1H-indol-7-yl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-benzoic acid methyl ester (605 mg, 0.95 mmol) was suspended in methanol (10 mL), potassium hydroxide (50% w/v in water, 2 mL) was added and the resulting suspension was heated to 40Â° C. for 1 hour. Hydrochloric acid (1 N) was added to adjust the pH to 6. The mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate (10 mLÃ—4). The combined organic extracts were dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated. The residue was triturated with hexane to afford 2-tert-butoxycarbonylamino-5-[3-(1H-indol-7-yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-benzoic acid as a pale yellow powder (308 mg, 69%). MS: m/z 469 (M+H⁺).

Step 4: Synthesis of 2-Amino-5-[3-(1H-indol-7-yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-benzoic Acid

To a solution of 2-tert-Butoxycarbonylamino-5-[3-(1H-indol-7-yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-benzoic acid (308 mg, 0.66 mmol) in dichloromethane (9 mL) was added trifluoroacetic acid. The resulting solution was stirred for 2 hours at room temperature. The solution was concentrated to give the crude 2-amino-5-[3-(1H-indol-7-yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-benzoic acid which was used in next step without further purification. MS: m/z 369 (M+H⁺).

Step 5: Synthesis of 2-amino-5-[3-(1H-indol-7-yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide

To a solution of 2-amino-5-[3-(1H-indol-7-yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-benzoic acid (70 mg, 0.11 mmol), dimethylamine (2 N solution in THF, 0.11 mL, 0.22 mmol), diisopropylethylamine (20 mg, 0.16 mmol) in DMF (1 mL) was added O-(7-azabenzotriazol-1-yl)-N,N,Nâ€²,Nâ€²,-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate (60 mg, 0.16 mmol). The resulting solution was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour. The mixture was diluted with DMF (1 mL) and directly used in purification by mass-triggered reverse-phase HPLC to afford 2-amino-5-[3-(1H-indol-7-yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide as a white solid (3 mg, 7%). MS: m/z 396 (M+H⁺). ¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d6) Î´ 2.90 (s, 6H), 5.21 (s, 2H), 6.49 (d, 1H), 6.79 (d, 1H), 7.10 (t, 1H), 7.30 (d, 2H), 7.33 (d, 1H), 7.43 (dd, 1H), 7.49 (d, 1H), 7.81 (d, 1H), 8.03 (d, 1H), 8.44 (m, 2H), 10.89 (s, 1H), 11.99 (s, 1H).

Other compounds prepared by Method 97:

TABLE 59StructureMS: m/z (M + H⁺)508 465 511 399 465 508 396 465 441 510 553

Method 98

Synthesis of 3-amino-6-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-pyridazine-4-carboxylic Acid DimethylamideStep 1: Synthesis of 3,6-dichloro-pyridazine-4-carboxylic Acid Dimethylamide

3,6-Dichloro-pyridazine-4-carboxylic acid (500 mg, 2.59 mmol) was dissolved in dichloromethane (2 mL), treated with di-iso-propylamine (454 Î¼L, 2.59 mmol) and cooled in an ice water bath. Pivaloyl chloride (318 Î¼L, 2.59 mmol) was added and the mixture was stirred for 25 minutes. 2 M dimethylamine (2.59 mL, 5.18 mmol) was added and the reaction was stirred 15 h. The mixture was washed with saturated ammonium chloride (1Ã—), saturated sodium bicarbonate (1Ã—), and dried over sodium sulfate to afford 3,6-dichloro-pyridazine-4-carboxylic acid dimethylamide (353 mg, 62.2%). MS: m/z 220 (M+H⁺).

Step 2: Synthesis of 3-amino-6-chloro-pyridazine-4-carboxylic Acid Dimethylamide

To 3,6-dichloro-pyridazine-4-carboxylic acid dimethylamide (100 mg, 0.456 mmol) was added saturated ammonia in absolute ethanol (2 mL) and the mixture irradiated in a microwave reactor to 180Â° C. for 45 min. 1 mL of saturated ammonia in ethanol was added and irradiation continued for an additional 30 min. The sample was concentrated in vacuo, washed with saturated ammonium chloride (1Ã—) and brine (1Ã—). Saturated sodium bicarbonate was added to the aqueous layer and was extracted with ethyl acetate (3Ã—). The combined organics were dried over sodium sulfate to afford 3-amino-6-chloro-pyridazine-4-carboxylic acid dimethylamide (54.9 mg, 60%). MS: m/z 389 (M+H⁺).

Step 3: Synthesis of 3-amino-6-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-pyridazine-4-carboxylic Acid Dimethylamide

3-(2-Methoxy-phenyl)-5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (138.4 mg, 0.274 mmol), 3-amino-6-chloro-pyridazine-4-carboxylic acid dimethylamide (54.9 mg, 0.274 mmol), palladium acetate (3.0 mg, 0.013 mmol) and 2-dicyclohexylphosphino-2â€²,6â€²-dimethoxybiphenyl (S-Phos) (11.2 mg, 0.0274 mmol) were combined under nitrogen. Acetonitrile (0.5 mL), tetrahydrofuran (0.5 mL) and 1 M aqueous potassium carbonate (0.822 mL, 0.822 mmol) were added and the vial was flushed with nitrogen, capped and heated at 80Â° C. for 15 h. The layers were separated. The organics were diluted with ethyl acetate and washed with brine (1Ã—), dried over sodium sulfate and adsorbed onto silica gel. The material was purified by flash chromatography on silica gel using a gradient of ethyl acetate in hexanes to afford 3-amino-6-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-pyridazine-4-carboxylic acid dimethylamide. MS: m/z 543 (M+H⁺).

Step 4: Synthesis of 3-amino-6-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-pyridazine-4-carboxylic Acid Dimethylamide

Crude 3-amino-6-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-pyridazine-4-carboxylic acid dimethylamide (56.6 mg, 0.104 mmol) was dissolved in methanol (0.5 mL) and dimethylformamide (0.5 mL) and 50% w/v aqueous potassium hydroxide (0.2 mL) was added. After 5 hours, the reaction was quenched by addition of acetic acid (0.5 mL). The mixture was carefully poured into saturated sodium bicarbonate and extracted with ethyl acetate. The organics were dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and dried to a residue which was purified by preparative HPLC to afford 3-amino-6-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-pyridazine-4-carboxylic acid dimethylamide (5.7 mg, 14.1%, 3 steps). ¹H-NMR (500 MHz, dimethylsulfoxide-d6) Î´ 2.90 (s, 3H), 3.0 (s, 3H), 3.82 (s, 3H), 6.44 (s, 2H), 7.07 (dt, J=7.5 Hz, J=1.0 Hz, 1H), 7.13 (br d, J=7.5 Hz, 1H), 7.30 (dt, J=7.5 Hz, J=1.5 Hz, 1H), 7.61 (dd, J=7.5 Hz, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.83 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 7.92 (s, 1H), 8.55 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.87 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 11.89 (s, 1H). MS: m/z 389 (M+H⁺).

Other compound prepared by Method 98:

TABLE 60StructureMS: m/z (M + H⁺)318

Method 99

Synthesis of 2-{6-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-pyrazin-2-yl}-N,N-dimethyl-acetamide

2-{6-[3-(2-Methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-pyrazin-2-yl}-N,N-dimethyl-acetamide (56.6 mg, 0.104 mmol) was dissolved in methanol (0.5 mL) and dimethylformamide (0.5 mL) and 50% w/v aqueous potassium hydroxide (0.2 mL) was added. After 5 hours, the reaction was quenched by addition of acetic acid (0.2 mL). The mixture was carefully poured into saturated sodium bicarbonate and extracted with ethyl acetate. The combined organic layers were dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and dried to a residue which was purified by preparative HPLC to afford 2-{6-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-pyrazin-2-yl}-N,N-dimethyl-acetamide (5.7 mg, 14.1%). ¹H-NMR (500 MHz, dimethylsulfoxide-d6) Î´ 2.74 (s, 3H), 2.90 (s, 3H), 3.78 (s, 3H), 3.96 (s, 2H), 7.01 (dt, J=1, J=7.5 Hz, 1H), 7.11 (br d, J=8 Hz, 1H), 7.28 (dt, J=1.5, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 7.50 (dd, J=1.5 Hz, J=7.5 Hz, 1H), 7.77 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.21 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 8.46 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.56 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 8.62 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H). MS: m/z 388 (M+H⁺).

Method 100

Synthesis of 3-(4-hydroxy-cyclohexylamino)-6-iodo-pyrazine-2-carboxylic Acid DimethylamideStep 1: Synthesis of 3-(4-trans-hydroxy-cyclohexylamino)-pyrazine-2-carboxylic Acid Dimethylamide

3-Chloro-pyrazine-2-carboxylic acid dimethylamide (200 mg, 1.08 mmol), prepared from commercial 3-chloro-pyrazine-2-carboxylic acid, was dissolved in ethanol (0.5 mL) and treated with di-iso-propylamine (0.282 mL, 1.62 mmol) and trans-4-amino-cyclohexanol (186 mg, 1.62 mmol) in the microwave at 180Â° C. for 13 min. The solution was diluted with ethyl acetate and washed with saturated ammonium chloride (1Ã—), brine (1Ã—), dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated to a residue which was used crude in the next step. MS: m/z 265 (M+H⁺).

Step 2: Synthesis of 3-(4-hydroxy-cyclohexylamino)-6-iodo-pyrazine-2-carboxylic Acid Dimethylamide

3-(4-trans-Hydroxy-cyclohexylamino)-pyrazine-2-carboxylic acid dimethylamide (285 mg, 1.08 mmol) was dissolved in dimethylformamide (10 mL) and treated with N-iodosuccinimide (291 mg, 1.29 mmol) at 80Â° C. for 24 h. Another aliquot of N-iodosuccinimide (243 mg, 1.08 mmol) was added the reaction was allowed to react for another 5 h at 80Â° C. The mixture was quenched with 38% aqueous sodium bisulfite and extracted with ethyl acetate (2Ã—). The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over sodium sulfate and purified by silica gel chromatography (hexanes/ethyl acetate). The material was not clean and was therefore re-dissolved in ethyl acetate and washed with saturated sodium bicarbonate and brine and dried over sodium sulfate to afford pure 3-(4-hydroxy-cyclohexylamino)-6-iodo-pyrazine-2-carboxylic acid dimethylamide (100 mg, 22%). ¹H-NMR (500 MHz, dimethylsulfoxide-d6) Î´ 1.2-1.3 (m, 4H), 1.80-1.86 (m, 4H), 2.94 (S, 3H), 2.98 (s, 3H), 3.72 (m, 1H), 4.56 (br s, 1H), 6.81 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 8.31 (s, 1H). MS: m/z 422 (M+H⁺).

Method 101

Synthesis of 3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-5-(1H-pyrazol-3-yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridineStep 1: Synthesis of 3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-5-(1H-pyrazol-3-yl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine

5-Bromo-3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (200 mg, 0.438 mmol), commercial 1H-pyrazole-3-boronic acid (73.6 mg, 0.637 mmol) and 1,1â€²-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocenepalladium(II)-dichloride dichloromethane adduct (17.8 mg, 0.022 mmol) were combined in dimethylformamide (1.4 mL) and 2 M saturated sodium carbonate (657 Î¼L) under nitrogen. The mixture was heated to 165Â° C. in the microwave for 900 s. The mixture was diluted with ethyl acetate and the aqueous layer was removed. After drying over sodium sulfate, the crude material was purified by silica gel chromatography to afford 3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-5-(1H-pyrazol-3-yl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (156 mg, 80.2%). %). MS: m/z 445 (M+H⁺).

Step 2: Synthesis of 3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-5-(1H-pyrazol-3-yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine

3-(2-Methoxy-phenyl)-5-(1H-pyrazol-3-yl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (156 mg, 0.350 mmol) was dissolved in methanol (1.0 mL) and dimethylformamide (1.0 mL) and 50% w/v aqueous potassium hydroxide (1.0 mL) was added. After 4 hours, the reaction was quenched by addition of acetic acid (1.0 mL). The mixture was carefully poured into saturated sodium bicarbonate and extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic layers were dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and dried to a residue which was purified by preparative HPLC to afford 3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-5-(1H-pyrazol-3-yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (18.9 mg, 18.6%). ¹H-NMR (500 MHz, dimethylsulfoxide-d6) Î´ 3.78 (s, 3H), 6.69 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 6.99 (dt, J=7.0, J=0.5 Hz, 1H), 7.06 (d, J=7.5 Hz, 1H), 7.23 (dt, J=7.0, J=1.5 Hz, 1H), 7.50 (dd, J=7.5, J=1.5 Hz, 1H), 7.63 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 7.65 (br s, 1H), 8.29 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.63 (br s, 1H), 11.82 (s, 1H). MS: m/z 291 (M+H⁺).

Method 102

Synthesis of 5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-2H-pyrazole-3-carboxylic Acid DimethylamideStep 1: Synthesis of 3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-5-[1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrazol-3-yl]-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine

3-(2-Methoxy-phenyl)-5-(1H-pyrazol-3-yl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (500 mg, 1.12 mmol) was dissolved in tetrahydrofuran (10 mL) and cooled in an ice bath. Sodium hydride (60% oil dispersion, 103 mg, 2.58 mmol) was added, followed by p-toluene-sulfonylchloride (TsCl) (361 mg, 1.89 mmol). After stirring 19 h, deionized water was added and the mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate. The combined organic layers were washed with saturated sodium bicarbonate (1Ã—) and brine (1Ã—) and dried over sodium sulfate. The material was purified by flash chromatography on silica gel using a gradient of ethyl acetate in hexanes to afford 3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-5-[1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrazol-3-yl]-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (458 mg, 68.4%). MS: m/z 599 (M+H⁺).

Step 2: Synthesis of 5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-2-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-2H-pyrazole-3-carboxylic Acid

To a cooled solution (âˆ’78Â° C.) of 3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-5-[1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrazol-3-yl]-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (458 mg, 0.765 mmol) in dry tetrahydrofuran (7 mL) was added 2.5 M n-butyl lithium (n-BuLi) (336 Î¼L. 0.842 mmol) over 15 min. After 2 h at âˆ’78Â° C., a stream of carbon dioxide gas was added to the mixture for 5 min. The reaction was allowed to warm to room temperature. After stirring 3 h, the reaction was quenched by the addition of saturated ammonium chloride and extracted into ethyl acetate. The organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate and purified by flash chromatography on silica gel using a gradient of methanol in dichloromethane to afford 5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-2-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-2H-pyrazole-3-carboxylic acid (114 mg, 23%). MS: m/z 643 (M+H⁺).

Step 3: Synthesis of 5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-2-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-2H-pyrazole-3-carboxylic Acid Dimethylamide

5-[3-(2-Methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-2-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-2H-pyrazole-3-carboxylic acid (114 mg, 0.177 mmol), O-(7-Azabenzotriazol-1-yl)-N,N,Nâ€²,Nâ€²-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate (81.0 mg, 0.213 mmol), di-iso-propylamine (77 Î¼L, 0.442 mmol) and 2 M dimethylamine in tetrahydrofuran (177 Î¼L, 0.354 mmol) were all combined in dimethylformamide (0.5 mL) in a microwave vial and irradiated in a microwave reactor to 90Â° C. for 900 s. The mixture was diluted with ethyl acetate and washed with saturated sodium bicarbonate and brine and dried over sodium sulfate and purified by flash chromatography on silica gel using a gradient of methanol in dichloromethane to afford 5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-2-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-2H-pyrazole-3-carboxylic acid dimethylamide (90.4 mg, 99%). MS: m/z 516 (M+H⁺).

Step 4: Synthesis of 5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-2H-pyrazole-3-carboxylic Acid Dimethylamide

5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-2-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-2H-pyrazole-3-carboxylic acid dimethylamide (90 mg, 0.174 mmol) was dissolved in methanol (0.5 mL) and dimethylformamide (0.5 mL) and 50% w/v aqueous potassium hydroxide (0.5 mL) was added. After 3 hours, acetic acid (0.5 mL) was added and the mixture diluted with water. The solids were collected by filtration and the material purified by preparative HPLC to afford 5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-2H-pyrazole-3-carboxylic acid dimethylamide (16.0 mg, 25.4%) ¹H-NMR (500 MHz, dimethylsulfoxide-d6, 70Â° C.) Î´ 3.06-3.15 (s, 6H), 3.83 (s, 3H), 6.98 (br s, 1H), 7.07 (t, J=7.5 Hz, 1H), 7.14 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.31 (Br t, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 7.60 (brd, J=6.0 Hz, 1H), 7.71 (Br s, 1H), 8.39 (br s, 1H), 8.67 (br s, 1H). MS: m/z 362 (M+H⁺).

Method 103

Synthesis of 1-methyl-1H-imidazole-4-carboxylic Acid {2-dimethylcarbamoyl-4-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenyl}-amideStep 1: Synthesis of 1-methyl-1H-imidazole-4-carboxylic Acid {2-dimethylcarbamoyl-4-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenyl}-amide

1-Methyl-1H-imidazole-4-carbonyl chloride (0.092 mmol) was suspended in dichloromethane (1 mL) and a solution of 2-amino-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide (50 mg, 0.092 mmol) in 20% v/v pyridine in dichloromethane (0.5 mL) was added. After 24 h, saturated ammonium chloride solution was added and the layers were separated. The organic layers were dried over sodium sulfate and taken to the next step. MS: m/z 649 (M+H⁺).

Step 2: Synthesis of 1-methyl-1H-imidazole-4-carboxylic Acid {2-dimethylcarbamoyl-4-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenyl}-amide

1-Methyl-1H-imidazole-4-carboxylic acid {2-dimethylcarbamoyl-4-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenyl}-amide (0.092 mmol) was dissolved in methanol (0.25 mL) and tetrahydrofuran (0.25 mL) and 50% w/v aqueous potassium hydroxide (0.1 mL) was added at 0Â° C. After 2 hours, the reaction was quenched by addition of acetic acid (0.5 mL). The mixture was redissolved in tetrahydrofuran and the insoluble salts were removed by filtration. The crude material was purified by preparative HPLC to afford 1-methyl-1H-imidazole-4-carboxylic acid {2-dimethylcarbamoyl-4-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenyl}-amide (9.2 mg, 20.2%, 2 steps).

¹H-NMR (500 MHz, dimethylsulfoxide-d6) Î´ 3.0 (s, 3H), 3.06 (s, 3H), 3.73 (s, 3H), 3.83 (s, 3H), 7.05 (dt, J=7.0 Hz, J=1.0 Hz, 1H), 7.13 (bd, J=7.5 Hz, 1H), 7.30 (dd, J=1.5, J=7.0 Hz 1H), 7.61 (dd, J=1.5 Hz, J=7.5 Hz, 1H), 7.72 (d, J=7.5 Hz, 1H), 7.73 (8.33 (d, J=7.5 Hz, 1H), 7.77 (br s, 1H), 7.81 (dd, J=2.0, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 7.84 (d, J=1.5 Hz, 1H), 8.19 (s, 1H), 8.44 (d, J=9.0 Hz, 1H), 8.57 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 10.07 (s, 1H), 11.83 (s, 1H). MS: m/z 495 (M+H⁺).

Other compounds prepared by Method 103:

TABLE 61StructureMS: m/z (M + H⁺)496 497 495

510 497 512

In the cases where the sample was contaminated with aniline, the sample was treated with PS-isocyanate (Argonaut Technologies, Inc.) in dichloromethane at 40Â° C. for 16 h, and then the resin was filtered and rinsed with dichloromethane and tetrahydrofuran to afford the pure product.

Method 104

Synthesis of morpholine-4-carboxylic Acid [4-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-2-(4-methyl-piperazine-1-carbonyl)-phenyl]-amideStep 1: Synthesis of 2-amino-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-benzoic Acid Trifluoroacetate

2-Amino-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-benzoic acid tert-butyl ester (1.13 g, 1.98 mmol) was treated with 10 mL of dichloromethane/trifluoracetic acid (1:1) for 24 h. The solution was dried in vacuo to afford 2-amino-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-benzoic acid trifluoroacetate (quantitative). MS: m/z 514 (M+H⁺).

Step 2: Synthesis of {2-amino-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenyl}-(4-methyl-piperazin-1-yl)-methanone

2-Amino-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-benzoic acid trifluoroacetate (400 mg, 0.637 mmol) was dissolved in dimethylformamide (5.0 mL) in a microwave vial and di-iso-propylamine (388 Î¼L, 2.22 mmol), O-(7-azabenzotriazol-1-yl)-N,N,Nâ€²,Nâ€²-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate (291 mg, 0.765 mmol) and 1-methyl-piperazine (95.6 mg, 0.0.955 mmol) were added. The mixture was irradiated in a microwave reactor to 90 s at 90Â° C. The dimethylformamide was removed in vacuo and the residue was dissolved in ethyl acetate and washed with saturated sodium bicarbonate (2Ã—). The organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated. The crude {2-amino-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenyl}-(4-methyl-piperazin-1-yl)-methanone was used in the next step. MS: m/z 597 (M+H⁺).

For compounds containing an alcohol, a subsequent protection using standard conditions (tert-butyldimethylsilyl chloride (2.0 eq.), pyridine (5.0 eq.) and imidazole (2.0 eq.) in dimethylformamide at room temperature followed by flash chromatography on silica gel) was performed.

Step 3: Synthesis of morpholine-4-carboxylic Acid [4-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-2-(4-methyl-piperazine-1-carbonyl)-phenyl]-amide

Crude {2-amino-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenyl}-(4-methyl-piperazin-1-yl)-methanone (0.637 mmol) was dissolved in dichloromethane (7.0 mL) with di-iso-propylamine (266 Î¼L, 1.91 mmol) and cooled to 0Â° C. Phosgene (20% w/v in toluene, 1.0 mL, 1.91 mmol) was added and after 1 minute, morpholine (557 Î¼L, 6.37 mmol) was added rapidly. The mixture was stirred 15 h, washed with brine and dried over sodium sulfate to afford crude morpholine-4-carboxylic acid [4-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-2-(4-methyl-piperazine-1-carbonyl)-phenyl]-amide (632 mg, crude). MS: m/z 710 (M+H⁺).

Step 4: Synthesis of morpholine-4-carboxylic acid [4-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-2-(4-methyl-piperazine-1-carbonyl)-phenyl]-amide

Crude morpholine-4-carboxylic acid [4-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-2-(4-methyl-piperazine-1-carbonyl)-phenyl]-amide (0.637 mmol) was dissolved in methanol (1.0 mL) and dimethylformamide (1.0 mL) and 50% w/v aqueous potassium hydroxide (1.0 mL) was added. After 2 hours, the reaction was quenched by addition of acetic acid (1.0 mL). The mixture was carefully poured into saturated sodium bicarbonate and extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic layers were dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and dried to a residue which was purified by preparative HPLC to afford morpholine-4-carboxylic acid [4-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-2-(4-methyl-piperazine-1-carbonyl)-phenyl]-amide (74.5 mg, 21.0%, 4 steps). 1H-NMR (500 MHz, dimethylsulfoxide-d6) Î´ 2.18 (s, 3H), 2.31 (br m, 4H), 3.38 (t, J=4.5 Hz, 1H), 3.61 (t, J=5.0 Hz, 1H), 3.82 (s, 3H), 7.05 (dt, J=7.5, J=1.0 Hz, 1H), 7.12 (d, J=7.5 Hz, 1H), 7.29 (dd, J=1.5, J=9.0 Hz 1H), 7.54 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.60 (dd, J=1.5 Hz, J=7.0 Hz, 1H), 7.60 (d, J=9.0, 1H), 7.72 (m, 2H), 8.14 (d, J=1.5 Hz, 1H), 8.53 (d, J=2.0, 1H), 8.60 (s, 1H), 11.9 (s, 1H). MS: m/z 556 (M+H⁺).

For compounds containing a tert-butyldimethylsilyl ether, the silyl group was removed by treating the crude with acetic acid/water/tetrahydrofuran (3:1:1) at 40Â° C. followed by extraction with ethyl acetate and subsequent purification by preparative HPLC.

Other compounds prepared using Method 104:

TABLE 62StructureMS: m/z (M + H⁺)589 571 586 557 543 570 557 570 557 572 531 558 556 570 561 561

Method 105

Synthesis of 1-isopropyl-piperidine-3-carboxylic Acid {2-dimethylcarbamoyl-4-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenyl}-amideStep 1: Synthesis of 1-isopropyl-piperidine-3-carboxylic Acid {2-dimethylcarbamoyl-4-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenyl}-amide

Commercial 1-isopropyl-piperidine-3-carboxylic acid (114 mg, 0.666 mmol) and di-iso-propylethylamine (78.6 Î¼L, 0.666 mmol) were combined in dichloromethane (5 mL) and cooled in an ice bath (0Â° C.). After 5 min., pivaloyl chloride (0.555 mmol) was added and the mixture was reacted for 2 h. A solution of aniline (300 mg, 0.555 mmol) in dichloro-methane (1 mL) was added to the mixed anhydride and the reaction was stirred for 15 h at 40Â° C. at which time the solution was directly purified by flash chromatography on silica gel using a gradient of ethyl acetate in hexanes to afford 1-isopropyl-piperidine-3-carboxylic acid {2-dimethylcarbamoyl-4-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenyl}-amide. MS: m/z 694 (M+H⁺).

Step 2: Synthesis of 1-isopropyl-piperidine-3-carboxylic Acid {2-dimethylcarbamoyl-4-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenyl}-amide

1-iso-Propyl-piperidine-3-carboxylic acid {2-dimethylcarbamoyl-4-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenyl}-amide (185.1 mg, 0.27 mmol) was dissolved in methanol (0.5 mL) and dimethylformamide (0.5 mL), cooled to 0Â° C. and 50% w/v aqueous potassium hydroxide (0.2 mL) was added. After 1 hour, the reaction was quenched by addition of concentrated hydrochloric acid (0.2 mL). The mixture was carefully poured into saturated sodium bicarbonate and extracted with ethyl acetate. The combined organic layers were dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and dried to a residue which was purified by preparative HPLC to afford 1-isopropyl-piperidine-3-carboxylic acid {2-dimethylcarbamoyl-4-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenyl}-amide (46.0 mg, 31.9%). ¹H-NMR (500 MHz, dimethylsulfoxide-d6) Î´ 0.98 (d, J=6.5 Hz, 6H), 1.59 (m, 2H), 1.76 (m, 2H), 2.16 m, 3H, 2.32 (m, 2H), 2.70 (m, 1H, 2.87 (s, 3H), 2.97 (s, 3H, 3.82 (s, 3H), 7.04 (t, J=7.5 Hz, 1H), 7.09 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.28 (dt, J=1.5, J=7.5 Hz 1H), 7.61 (dd, J=1.5 Hz, J=7.5 Hz, 1H), 7.59-7.61 (m, 2H), 7.65 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.72-7.74 (m, 2H), 8.54 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 9.51 (s, 1H), 11.92 (s, 1H). MS: m/z 541 (M+H⁺).

Other compounds prepared by Method 105:

TABLE 63StructureMS: m/z (M + H⁺)527

Method 106

Step 1: Synthesis of 2-amino-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide

A mixture of 3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3]dioxolan-2-yl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (1.5 g, 3 mmol), 2-amino-5-bromo-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide 0.8, 3.3 mmol), and dichloro[1,1â€²-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene]palladium(II) dichloromethane adduct (110 mg, 0.2 mmol) in THF/Acetonitrile/saturated NaHCO₃(5 ml/5 ml/5 ml) was stirred at 100Â° C. for 4 hours. The mixture was allowed to cool down to room temperature and then extracted with ethyl acetate (3Ã—). The combined organic layers were extracted with brine, dried with Na₂SO₄, decanted, and concentrated to dryness. Silica gel chromatography of the crude using a gradient of ethyl acetate and hexane afforded 2-amino-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide (1.1 g, 71% yield). ¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d6) Î´ 2.29 (s, 3H), 2.89 (s, 6H), 3.77 (s, 3H), 6.74 (d, 1H), 7.03 (m, 1H), 7.14 (d, 1H), 7.29 (s, 1H), 7.34-7.41 (m, 4H), 7.55 (d, 1H), 7.94 (s, 2H), 8.01 (d, 2H), 8.54 (s, 1H). MS: m/z 541.1 (M+H⁺).

Step 2: Synthesis of 3-hydroxy-pyrrolidine-1-carboxylic Acid {2-dimethylcarbamoyl-4-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenyl}-amide

A solution of 2-amino-5-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-N,N-dimethyl-benzamide (0.2 g, 0.4 mmol) in dichloromethane (10 ml) was stirred at 0Â° C. for 15 minutes. Then phosgene (238 Î¼l, 0.4 mmol; 20% w/v in toluene) was added and after 1 minute trimethylamine (77 Î¼l, 0.6 mmol), followed by D,L-pyrrolidin-3-ol (48 mg, 0.6 mmol in 1 ml dichloromethane). The mixture was allowed to stir until the ice melted and then at room temperature for another hour. The crude was worked up by removing solvent and purified on silica chromatography. The resulting product was dissolved in methanol (3 ml) and aqueous KOH (100 Î¼l-50% w/v). The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 4 hours or until no more starting material remained. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The crude was neutralized with 1N HCl and purified by mass-triggered reverse phase HPLC to afford 3-hydroxy-pyrrolidine-1-carboxylic acid {2-dimethylcarbamoyl-4-[3-(2-methoxy-phenyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yl]-phenyl}-amide (62 mg, 34% yield). ¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d6) Î´ 1.8-2.0 (m, 2H), 3.02 (s, 3H), 3.22 (d, 1H), 3.35-3.41 (m, 4H), 3.82 (S, 3H), 4.32 (s, 1H), 7.05 (m, 1H), 7.13 (d, 1H), 7.29 (m, 1H), 7.60 (d, 1H), 7.65 (s, 1H), 7.73 (d, 2H), 8.25 (d, 1H), 8.17 (s, 1H), 8.46 (s, 1H), 8.54 (s, 1H), 11.90 (s, 1H). MS: m/z 500.2 (M+H⁺).

Other compounds prepared by method 106:

TABLE 64Structure

Example 2Bioassays

Kinase assays known to those of skill in the art may be used to assay the inhibitory activities of the compounds and compositions of the present invention. Kinase assays include, but are not limited to, the following examples.

Although the first of these examples uses the kinase domain of a mutant form of Abl T315I (â€œAbl T315I KDâ€ ), the kinase assays may use various forms of mutant and wild type enzymes, including, for example, the entire protein, the kinase domain, or a portion thereof (e.g. Abl Y393F). The kinases used in the assays may also be of varying phosphorylation states. In the c-Abl example, a mutant kinase at a zero phosphorylation state was used.

c-Abl Pyruvate Kinase/Lactate Dehydrogenase Coupled Enzyme Assay

In the c-Abl Pyruvate Kinase (PK)/Lactate Dehydrogenase (LDH) Coupled Assay the protein kinase dependant phosphorylation of a substrate peptide was coupled to the oxidation of NADH. The oxidation of NADH to NAD+ was detected by monitoring a decrease in absorbance at 340 nm.

Materials: Abl substrate peptide=EAIYAAPFAKKK-OH (Biopeptide, San Diego, Calif.); Î²NADH (Sigma Cat#N-8129, FW=709.4); 2M MgCl₂; 1M HEPES buffer, pH 7.5; Phosphoenolpyruvate (PEP) (Sigma Cat#P-7002, FW=234); Lactate dehydrogenase (LDH) (Worthington Biochemical Cat#2756); Pyruvate Kinase (PK) (Sigma Cat#P-9136); ATP (Sigma Cat#A-3377, FW=551); Greiner 384-well UV star plate; and purified and unphosphorylated T315I Abl kinase domain.

Stock Solutions: 10 mM NADH (7.09 mg/ml in miliQH₂O) made fresh daily; 10 mM Abl substrate peptide (13.4 mg/ml in miliQH₂O) stored at âˆ’20Â° C.; 100 mM HEPES buffer, pH 7.5 (5 ml IM stock+45 ml miliQH₂O); 100 mM MgCl₂(5 ml 2M MgCl₂+95 ml dH₂O); 100 mM PEP (23.4 mg/ml in dH₂O) stored at âˆ’20Â° C.; 10 mM ATP (5.51 mg/ml in dH₂O) stored at âˆ’20Â° C. (diluted 50 Î¼l into total of 10 ml miliQH₂O daily=50 Î¼M ATP working stock); 1000 U/ml PK (U/mg varies with lot) flash-frozen under liquid N₂and stored at âˆ’80Â° C.; and 1000 U/ml LDH (U/mg varies with lot) flash-frozen under liquid N₂and stored at âˆ’80Â° C.

Standard Assay Setup for 384-well format (50 Î¼l reaction): 300 Î¼M NADH; 10 mM MgCl₂; 2 mM PEP; 45 U/ml PK; 60 U/ml LDH; 200 Î¼M Abl substrate peptide; 2.5 Î¼l test compound (in DMSO); 2 Î¼g/ml Abl kinase domain; 10 Î¼M ATP; 100 mM HEPES buffer. Positive controls contained DMSO with no test compound. Negative controls contained 5 Î¼l of 0.5M EDTA (50 mM in the assay). The dephosphorylated form of the c-Abl T315I mutant was used in the biochemical screening assays. The kinase reaction was initiated at time t=0 by the addition of ATP.

Activity was measured by following the time-dependent loss of NADH by absorbance spectroscopy at 340 nm. The linear portion of the resulting progress curve was then analyzed by linear regression to get the activity in absorbance units/time, reported as the slope of that best fit line (moles/unit time can be calculated from using molar extinction coefficient for NADH at 340 nm, 6250M^âˆ’1cm^âˆ’1).

Data was evaluated using the equation: Zâ€²=1âˆ’[3*(Ïƒ₊+Ïƒ_âˆ’)/|Î¼₊âˆ’Î¼_âˆ’|](Zhang, et al., 1999 J Biomol Screening 4(2) 67-73), where Î¼ denotes the mean and Ïƒ the standard deviation. The subscript designates positive or negative controls. The Zâ€² score for a robust screening assay should be >0.50. The typical threshold=Î¼_+âˆ’3*Ïƒ₊. Any value that falls below the threshold was designated a â€œhitâ€ .

Dose response was analyzed using the equation: y=min+{(maxâˆ’min)/(1+10^{[compound]âˆ’logIC50})}, where y is the observed initial slope, max=the slope in the absence of inhibitor, min=the slope at infinite inhibitor, and the IC₅₀is the [compound] that corresponds to Â½ the total observed amplitude (Amplitude=maxâˆ’min).

To measure modulation, activation, or inhibition of Abl KD, a test compound was added to the assay at a range of concentrations. Inhibitors may inhibit Abl KD activity at an IC₅₀in the micromolar range, the nanomolar range, or, for example, in the subnanomolar range.

Additional Kinase Assays

In addition to the c-Abl PK/LDH coupled assay (above), homogeneous luminescence-based inhibitor screening assays were developed for c-Abl, MET, AurA, and PDK1 kinases (among others). Each of these assays made use of an ATP depletion assay (Kinase-Gloâ„¢, Promega Corporation, Madison, Wis.) to quantitate kinase activity. The Kinase-Gloâ„¢ format uses a thermostable luciferase to generate luminescent signal from ATP remaining in solution following the kinase reaction. The luminescent signal is inversely correlated with the amount of kinase activity.

cAbl Luminescence-Based Enzyme Assay

Materials: Abl substrate peptide=EAIYAAPFAKKK-OH (Biopeptide, San Diego, Calif.), ATP (Sigma Cat#A-3377, FW=551), HEPES buffer, pH 7.5, Bovine serum albumin (BSA) (Roche 92423420), MgCl₂, Staurosporine (Streptomyces sp. Sigma Cat#85660-1MG), white Costar 384-well flat-bottom plate (VWR Cat#29444-088), Abl kinase (see below), Kinase-Gloâ„¢ (Promega Cat#V6712).

Stock Solutions: 10 mM Abl substrate peptide (13.4 mg/ml in miliQH₂O) stored at âˆ’20Â° C.; 100 mM HEPES buffer, pH 7.5 (5 ml IM stock+45 ml miliQH₂O); 10 mM ATP (5.51 mg/ml in dH₂O) stored at âˆ’20Â° C. (diluted 50 Î¼l into total of 10 ml miliQH₂O daily=50 Î¼M ATP working stock); 1% BSA (1 g BSA in 100 ml 0.1 M HEPES, pH 7.5, stored at âˆ’20Â° C.), 100 mM MgCl₂; 200 Î¼M Staurosporine, 2Ã— Kinase-Gloâ„¢ reagent (made fresh or stored at âˆ’20Â° C.).

Standard Assay Setup for 384-well format (20 Î¼l kinase reaction, 40 Î¼l detection reaction): 10 mM MgCl₂; 100 Î¼M Abl substrate peptide; 0.1% BSA; 1 Î¼l test compound (in DMSO); 0.4 Î¼g/ml Abl kinase domain; 10 Î¼M ATP; 100 mM HEPES buffer. Positive controls contained DMSO with no test compound. Negative controls contained 10 Î¼M staurosporine. The kinase reactions were initiated at time t=0 by the addition of ATP. Kinase reactions were incubated at 21Â° C. for 30 min, then 20 Î¼l of Kinase-Gloâ„¢ reagent were added to each well to quench the kinase reaction and initiate the luminescence reaction. After a 20 min incubation at 21Â° C., the luminescence was detected in a plate-reading luminometer.

MET Luminescence-Based Enzyme Assay

Materials: Poly Glu-Tyr (4:1) substrate (Sigma Cat# P-0275), ATP (Sigma Cat#A-3377, FW=551), HEPES buffer, pH 7.5, Bovine serum albumin (BSA) (Roche 92423420), MgCl₂, Staurosporine (Streptomyces sp. Sigma Cat#85660-1MG), white Costar 384-well flat-bottom plate (VWR Cat#29444-088). MET kinase (see below), Kinase-Gloâ„¢ (Promega Cat#V6712).

Stock Solutions: 10 mg/ml poly Glu-Tyr in water, stored at âˆ’20Â° C.; 100 mM HEPES buffer, pH 7.5 (5 ml 1M stock+45 ml miliQH₂O); 10 mM ATP (5.51 mg/ml in dH₂O) stored at âˆ’20Â° C. (diluted 50 Î¼l into total of 10 ml miliQH₂O daily=50 Î¼M ATP working stock); 1% BSA (1 g BSA in 100 ml 0.1M HEPES, pH 7.5, stored at âˆ’20Â° C.), 100 mM MgCl₂; 200 Î¼M Staurosporine, 2Ã— Kinase-Gloâ„¢ reagent (made fresh or stored at âˆ’20Â° C.).

Standard Assay Setup for 384-well format (20 Î¼l kinase reaction, 40 Î¼l detection reaction): 10 mM MgCl₂; 0.3 mg/ml poly Glu-Tyr; 0.1% BSA; 1 Î¼l test compound (in DMSO); 0.4 Î¼g/ml MET kinase; 10 Î¼M ATP; 100 mM HEPES buffer. Positive controls contained DMSO with no test compound. Negative controls contained 10 Î¼M staurosporine. The kinase reactions were initiated at time t=0 by the addition of ATP. Kinase reactions were incubated at 21Â° C. for 60 min, then 20 Î¼l of Kinase-Gloâ„¢ reagent were added to each well to quench the kinase reaction and initiate the luminescence reaction. After a 20 min incubation at 21Â° C., the luminescence was detected in a plate-reading luminometer.

AurA Luminescence-Based Enzyme Assay

Materials: Kemptide peptide substrate=LRRASLG (Biopeptide, San Diego, Calif.), ATP (Sigma Cat#A-3377, FW=551), HEPES buffer, pH 7.5, 10% Brij 35 (Calbiochem Cat#203728), MgCl₂, Staurosporine (Streptomyces sp. Sigma Cat#85660-1MG), white Costar 384-well flat-bottom plate (VWR Cat#29444-088), Autophosphorylated AurA kinase (see below), Kinase-Gloâ„¢ (Promega Cat#V6712).

Stock Solutions: 10 mM Kemptide peptide (7.72 mg/ml in water), stored at âˆ’20Â° C.; 100 mM HEPES buffer+0.015% Brij 35, pH 7.5 (5 ml 1M HEPES stock+75 Î¼L 10% Brij 35+45 ml miliQH₂O); 10 mM ATP (5.51 mg/ml in dH₂O) stored at âˆ’20Â° C. (diluted 50 Î¼l into total of 10 ml miliQH₂O daily=50 Î¼M ATP working stock); 100 mM MgCl₂; 200M Staurosporine, 2Ã— Kinase-Gloâ„¢ reagent (made fresh or stored at âˆ’20Â° C.).

AurA Autophosphorylation Reaction: ATP and MgCl₂were added to 1-5 mg/ml AurA at final concentrations of 10 mM and 100 mM, respectively. The autophosphorylation reaction was incubated at 21Â° C. for 2-3 h. The reaction was stopped by the addition of EDTA to a final concentration of 50 mM, and samples were flash frozen with liquid N₂and stored at âˆ’80Â° C.

Standard Assay Setup for 384-well format (20 Î¼l kinase reaction, 40 Î¼l detection reaction): 10 mM MgCl₂; 0.2 mM Kemptide peptide; 141 test compound (in DMSO); 0.3 Î¼g/ml Autophosphorylated AurA kinase; 10 Î¼M ATP; 100 mM HEPES+0.015% Brij buffer. Positive controls contained DMSO with no test compound. Negative controls contained 5 Î¼M staurosporine. The kinase reactions were initiated at time t=0 by the addition of ATP. Kinase reactions were incubated at 21Â° C. for 45 min, then 20 Î¼l of Kinase-Gloâ„¢ reagent were added to each well to quench the kinase reaction and initiate the luminescence reaction. After a 20 min incubation at 21Â° C., the luminescence was detected in a plate-reading luminometer.

PDK1 Luminescence-Based Enzyme Assay

Materials: PDKtide peptide substrate=KTFCGTPEYLAPEVRREPRILSEEEQEMFRDFDYIADWC (Upstate Cat#12-401), ATP (Sigma Cat#A-3377, FW=551), HEPES buffer, pH 7.5, 10% Brij 35 (Calbiochem Cat#203728), MgCl₂, Staurosporine (Streptomyces sp. Sigma Cat#85660-1MG), white Costar 384-well flat-bottom plate (VWR Cat#29444-088), PDK1 kinase (see below), Kinase-Gloâ„¢ (Promega Cat#V6712).

Stock Solutions: 1 mM PDKtide substrate (1 mg in 200 Î¼l, as supplied by Upstate), stored at âˆ’20Â° C.; 100 mM HEPES buffer, pH 7.5 (5 ml 1M HEPES stock+45 ml miliQH₂O); 10 mM ATP (5.51 mg/ml in dH₂O) stored at âˆ’20Â° C. (diluted 25 Î¼l into total of 10 ml miliQH₂O daily=25 Î¼M ATP working stock); 100 mM MgCl₂; 10% Brij 35 stored at 2-8Â° C.; 200 Î¼M Staurosporine, 2Ã— Kinase-Gloâ„¢ reagent (made fresh or stored at âˆ’20Â° C.).

Standard Assay Setup for 384-well format (20 Î¼l kinase reaction, 40 Î¼l detection reaction): 10 mM MgCl₂; 0.01 mM PDKtide; 1 Î¼l test compound (in DMSO); 0.1 Î¼g/ml PDK1 kinase; 5 Î¼M ATP; 10 mM MgCl₂; 100 mM HEPES+0.01% Brij buffer. Positive controls contained DMSO with no test compound. Negative controls contained 10 Î¼M staurosporine. The kinase reactions were initiated at time t=0 by the addition of ATP. Kinase reactions were incubated at 21Â° C. for 40 min, then 20 Î¼l of Kinase-Gloâ„¢ reagent were added to each well to quench the kinase reaction and initiate the luminescence reaction. After a 20 min incubation at 21Â° C., the luminescence was detected in a plate-reading luminometer.

Preparation of Co-Expression Plasmid

A lambda phosphatase co-expression plasmid was constructed as follows.

An open-reading frame for Aurora kinase was amplified from a Homo sapiens (human) HepG2 cDNA library (ATCC HB-8065) by the polymerase chain reaction (PCR) using the following primers:

Forward primer:TCAAAAAAGAGGCAGTGGGCTTTG Reverse primer:CTGAATTTGCTGTGATCCAGG.

The PCR product (795 base pairs expected) was gel purified as follows. The PCR product was purified by electrophoresis on a 1% agarose gel in TAE buffer and the appropriate size band was excised from the gel and eluted using a standard gel extraction kit. The eluted DNA was ligated for 5 minutes at room temperature with topoisomerase into pSB2-TOPO. The vector pSB2-TOPO is a topoisomerase-activated, modified version of pET26b (Novagen, Madison, Wis.) wherein the following sequence has been inserted into the NdeI site: CATAATGGGCCATCATCATCATCATCACGGT GGTCATATGTCCCTT and the following sequence inserted into the BamHI site: AAGGGGGATCCTAAACTGCAGAGATCC. The sequence of the resulting plasmid, from the Shine-Dalgarno sequence through the â€œoriginalâ€ NdeI site, the stop site and the â€œoriginalâ€ BamHI site is as follows: AAGGAGGAGATATACATAATGGGCCATCATCATCATCATCACGGTGGTCATATG TCCCTT [ORF] AAGGGGGATCCTAAACTGCAGAGATCC. The Aurora kinase expressed using this vector has 14 amino acids added to the N-terminus (MetGlyHisHisHisHisHisHisGlyGlyHisMetSerLeu) and four amino acids added to the C-terminus (GluGlyGlySer).

The phosphatase co-expression plasmid was then created by inserting the phosphatase gene from lambda bacteriophage into the above plasmid (Matsui T, et al., Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun., 2001, 284:798-807). The phosphatase gene was amplified using PCR from template lambda bacteriophage DNA (HinDIII digest, New England Biolabs) using the following oligonucleotide primers:

Forward primer (PPfor):GCAGAGATCCGAATTCGAGCTCCGTCGACGGATGGAGTGAAAGAGATGCGC Reverse primer (PPrev):GGTGGTGGTGCTCGAGTGCGGCCGCAAGCTTTCATCATGCGCCTTCTCCCTGTAC.

The PCR product (744 base pairs expected) was gel purified. The purified DNA and non-co-expression plasmid DNA were then digested with SacI and XhoI restriction enzymes. Both the digested plasmid and PCR product were then gel purified and ligated together for 8 h at 16Â° C. with T4 DNA ligase and transformed into Top10 cells using standard procedures. The presence of the phosphatase gene in the co-expression plasmid was confirmed by sequencing. For standard molecular biology protocols followed here, see also, for example, the techniques described in Sambrook et al., Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, NY, 2001, and Ausubel et al., Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Greene Publishing Associates and Wiley Interscience, NY, 1989.

This co-expression plasmid contains both the Aurora kinase and lambda phosphatase genes under control of the lac promoter, each with its own ribosome binding site. By cloning the phosphatase into the middle of the multiple cloning site, downstream of the target gene, convenient restriction sites are available for subcloning the phosphatase into other plasmids. These sites include SacI, SalI and EcoRI between the kinase and phosphatase and HinDIII, NotI and XhoI downstream of the phosphatase.

Protein Kinase Expression

An open-reading frame for c-Abl was amplified from a Mus musculus (mouse) cDNA library prepared from freshly harvested mouse liver using a commercially available kit (Invitrogen) by PCR using the following primers:

Forward primer:GACAAGTGGGAAATGGAGC Reverse primer:CGCCTCGTTTCCCCAGCTC.

The PCR product (846 base pairs expected) was purified from the PCR reaction mixture using a PCR cleanup kit (Qiagen). The purified DNA was ligated for 5 minutes at room temperature with topoisomerase into pSGX3-TOPO. The vector pSGX3-TOPO is a topoisomerase-activated, modified version of pET26b (Novagen, Madison, Wis.) wherein the following sequence has been inserted into the NdeI site: CATATGTCCCTT and the following sequence inserted into the BamHI site: AAGGGCATCATCACCATCACCACTGATCC. The sequence of the resulting plasmid, from the Shine-Dalgarno sequence through the stop site and the BamHI, site is as follows: AAGGAGGA GATATACATATGTC CCTT[ORF]AAGGGCATCAT CACCATCACCACTGATCC. The c-Abl expressed using this vector had three amino acids added to its N-terminus (Met Ser Leu) and 8 amino acids added to its C-terminus (GluGlyHisHisHisHisHisHis).

A c-Abl/phosphatase co expression plasmid was then created by subcloning the phosphatase from the Aurora co-expression plasmid of Example 1 into the above plasmid. Both the Aurora co-expression plasmid and the Abl non-co-expression plasmid were digested 3 hrs with restriction enzymes EcoRI and NotI. The DNA fragments were gel purified and the phosphatase gene from the Aurora plasmid was ligated with the digested c-Abl plasmid for 8 h at 16Â° C. and transformed into Top10 cells. The presence of the phosphatase gene in the resulting construct was confirmed by restriction digestion analysis.

This plasmid codes for c-Abl and lambda phosphatase co expression. It has the additional advantage of two unique restriction sites, XbaI and NdeI, upstream of the target gene that can be used for subcloning of other target proteins into this phosphatase co-expressing plasmid.

The plasmid for Abl T315I was prepared by modifying the Abl plasmid using the Quick Change mutagenesis kit (Stratagene) with the manufacturer's suggested procedure and the following oligonucleotides:

Mm05582dS45â€²-CCACCATTCTACATAATCATTGAGTTCATGACCTATGGG-3â€² Mm05582dA45â€²-CCCATAGGTCATGAACTCAATGATTATGTAGAATGGTGG-3â€².

Protein from the phosphatase co-expression plasmids was purified as follows. The non-co-expression plasmid was transformed into chemically competent BL21(DE3)Codon+RIL (Stratagene) cells and the co-expression plasmid was transformed into BL21(DE3) pSA0145 (a strain that expresses the lytic genes of lambda phage and lyses upon freezing and thawing (Crabtree S, Cronan J E Jr. J Bacteriol 1984 April; 158(1):354-6)) and plated onto petri dishes containing LB agar with kanamycin. Isolated single colonies were grown to mid-log phase and stored at âˆ’80Â° C. in LB containing 15% glycerol. This glycerol stock was streaked on LB agar plates with kanamycin and a single colony was used to inoculate 10 ml cultures of LB with kanamycin and chloramphenicol, which was incubated at 30Â° C. overnight with shaking. This culture was used to inoculate a 2 L flask containing 500 ml of LB with kanamycin and chloramphenicol, which was grown to mid-log phase at 37Â° C. and induced by the addition of IPTG to 0.5 mM final concentration. After induction flasks were incubated at 21Â° C. for 18 h with shaking.

The c-Abl T315I KD (kinase domain) was purified as follows. Cells were collected by centrifugation, lysed in diluted cracking buffer (50 mM Tris HCl, pH 7.5, 500 mM KCl, 0.1% Tween 20, 20 mM Imidazole, with sonication, and centrifuged to remove cell debris. The soluble fraction was purified over an IMAC column charged with nickel (Pharmacia, Uppsala, Sweden), and eluted under native conditions with a gradient of 20 mM to 500 mM imidazole in 50 mM Tris, pH7.8, 500 mM NaCl, 10 mM methionine, 10% glycerol. The protein was then further purified by gel filtration using a Superdex 75 preparative grade column equilibrated in GF5 buffer (10 mM HEPES, pH7.5, 10 mM methionine, 500 mM NaCl, 5 mM DTT, and 10% glycerol). Fractions containing the purified c-Abl T315I KD kinase domain were pooled. The protein obtained was 98% pure as judged by electrophoresis on SDS polyacrylamide gels. Mass spectroscopic analysis of the purified protein showed that it was predominantly singly phosphorylated. The protein was then dephosphorylated with Shrimp Alkaline Phosphatase (MBI Fermentas, Burlington, Canada) under the following conditions: 100 U Shrimp Alkaline Phosphatase/mg of c-Abl T315I KD, 100 mM MgCl₂, and 250 mM additional NaCl. The reaction was run overnight at 23Â° C. The protein was determined to be unphosphorylated by Mass spectroscopic analysis. Any precipitate was spun out and the soluble fraction was separated from reactants by gel filtration using a Superdex 75 preparative grade column equilibrated in GF4 buffer (10 mM HEPES, pH7.5, 10 mM methionine, 150 mM NaCl, 5 mM DTT, and 10% glycerol).

Purification of Met:

The cell pellets produced from half of a 12 L Sf9 insect cell culture expressing the kinase domain of human Met were resuspended in a buffer containing 50 mM Tris-HCl pH 7.7 and 250 mM NaCl, in a volume of approximately 40 ml per 1 L of original culture. One tablet of Roche Complete, EDTA-free protease inhibitor cocktail (Cat# 1873580) was added per 1 L of original culture. The suspension was stirred for 1 hour at 4Â° C. Debris was removed by centrifugation for 30 minutes at 39,800Ã—g at 4Â° C. The supernatant was decanted into a 500 ml beaker and 10 ml of 50% slurry of Qiagen Ni-NTA Agarose (Cat# 30250) that had been pre-equilibrated in 50 mM Tris-HCl pH 7.8, 50 mM NaCl, 10% Glycerol, 10 mM Imidazole, and 10 mM Methionine, were added and stirred for 30 minutes at 4Â° C. The sample was then poured into a drip column at 4Â° C. and washed with 10 column volumes of 50 mM Tris-HCl pH 7.8, 500 mM NaCl, 10% Glycerol, 10 mM Imidazole, and 10 mM Methionine. The protein was eluted using a step gradient with two column volumes each of the same buffer containing 50 mM, 200 mM, and 500 mM Imidazole, sequentially. The 6Ã— Histidine tag was cleaved overnight using 40 units of TEV protease (Invitrogen Cat# 10127017) per 1 mg of protein while dialyzing in 50 mM Tris-HCl pH 7.8, 500 mM NaCl, 10% Glycerol, 10 mM Imidazole, and 10 mM Methionine at 4Â° C. The 6Ã— Histidine tag was removed by passing the sample over a Pharmacia 5 ml IMAC column (Cat# 17-0409-01) charged with Nickel and equilibrated in 50 mM Tris-HCl pH 7.8, 500 mM NaCl, 10% Glycerol, 10 mM Imidazole, and 10 mM Methionine. The cleaved protein bound to the Nickel column at a low affinity and was eluted with a step gradient. The step gradient was run with 15% and then 80% of the B-side (A-side=50 mM Tris-HCl pH 7.8, 500 mM NaCl, 10% Glycerol, 10 mM Imidazole, and 10 mM Methionine; B-side=50 mM Tris-HCl pH 7.8, 500 mM NaCl, 10% Glycerol, 500 mM Imidazole, and 10 mM Methionine) for 4 column volumes each. The Met protein eluted in the first step (15%), whereas the non-cleaved Met and the cleaved Histidine tag eluted in the 80% fractions. The 15% fractions were pooled after SDS-PAGE gel analysis confirmed the presence of cleaved Met; further purification was done by gel filtration chromatography on an Amersham Biosciences HiLoad 16/60 Superdex 200 prep grade (Cat# 17-1069-01) equilibrated in 50 mM Tris-HCl pH 8.5, 150 mM NaCl, 10% Glycerol and 5 mM DTT. The cleanest fractions were combined and concentrated to Ëœ10.4 mg/ml by centrifugation in an Amicon Ultra-15 10,000 Da MWCO centrifugal filter unit (Cat# UFC901024).

Purification of AurA:

The Sf9 insect cell pellets (Ëœ18 g) produced from 6 L of cultured cells expressing human Aurora-2 were resuspended in 50 mM Na Phosphate pH 8.0, 500 mM NaCl, 10% glycerol, 0.2% n-octyl-Î²-D-glucopyranoside (BOG) and 3 mM Î²-Mercaptoethanol (BME). One tablet of Roche Complete, EDTA-free protease inhibitor cocktail (Cat# 1873580) and 85 units Benzonase (Novagen Cat#70746-3)) were added per 1 L of original culture. Pellets were resuspended in approximately 50 ml per 1 L of original culture and were then sonicated on ice with two 30-45 sec bursts (100% duty cycle). Debris was removed by centrifugation and the supernatant was passed through a 0.8 Î¼m syringe filter before being loaded onto a 5 ml Ni²⁺ HiTrap column (Pharmacia). The column was washed with 6 column volumes of 50 mM Na Phosphate pH 8.0, 500 mM NaCl, 10% glycerol, 3 mM BME. The protein was eluted using a linear gradient of the same buffer containing 500 mM Imidazole. The eluant (24 ml) was cleaved overnight at 4Â° C. in a buffer containing 50 mM Na Phosphate pH 8.0, 500 mM NaCl, 10% glycerol, 3 mM BME and 10,000 units of TEV (Invitrogen Cat# 10127-017). The protein was passed over a second nickel affinity column as described above; the flow-through was collected. The cleaved protein fractions were combined and concentrated using spin concentrators. Further purification was done by gel filtration chromatography on a S75 sizing column in 50 mM Na Phosphate (pH 8.0), 250 mM NaCl, 1 mM EDTA, 0.1 mM AMP-PNP or ATP buffer, and 5 mM DTT. The cleanest fractions were combined and concentrated to approximately 8-11 mg/ml, and were either flash frozen in liquid nitrogen in 120 Î¼l aliquots and stored at âˆ’80Â° C., or stored at 4Â° C.

Purification of PDK1:

Cell pellets produced from 6 L of Sf9 insect cells expressing human PDK1 were resuspended in a buffer containing 50 mM Tris-HCl pH 7.7 and 250 mM NaCl in a volume of approximately 40 mL per 1 L of original culture. One tablet of Roche Complete, EDTA-free protease inhibitor cocktail (Cat# 1873580) and 85 units Benzonase (Novagen Cat#70746-3)) were added per 1 L of original culture. The suspension was stirred for 1 hour at 4Â° C. Debris was removed by centrifugation for 30 minutes at 39,800Ã—g at 4Â° C. The supernatant was decanted into a 500 mL beaker and 10 ml of a 50% slurry of Qiagen Ni-NTA Agarose (Cat# 30250) that had been pre-equilibrated in 50 mM Tris-HCl pH 7.8, 500 mM NaCl, 10% Glycerol, 10 mM Imidazole, and 10 mM Methionine, were added and stirred for 30 minutes at 4Â° C. The sample was then poured into a drip column at 4Â° C. and washed with 10 column volumes of 50 mM Tris-HCl pH 7.8, 500 mM NaCl, 10% Glycerol, 10 mM Imidazole, and 10 mM Methionine. The protein was eluted using a step gradient with two column volumes each of the same buffer containing 50 mM, and 500 mM Imidazole, sequentially. The 6Ã—Histidine tag was cleaved overnight using 40 units of TEV protease (Invitrogen Cat# 10127017) per 1 mg of protein while dialyzing in 50 mM Tris-HCl pH 7.8, 500 mM NaCl, 10% Glycerol, 10 mM Imidazole, and 10 mM Methionine at 4Â° C. The 6Ã— Histidine tag was removed by passing the sample over a Pharmacia 5 ml IMAC column (Cat# 17-0409-01) charged with Nickel and equilibrated in 50 mM Tris-HCl pH 7.8, 500 mM NaCl, 10% Glycerol, 10 mM Imidazole, and 10 mM Methionine. The cleaved protein eluted in the flow-through, whereas the uncleaved protein and the His-tag remained bound to the Ni-column. The cleaved protein fractions were combined and concentrated using spin concentrators. Further purification was done by gel filtration chromatography on an Amersham Biosciences HiLoad 16/60 Superdex 200 prep grade (Cat# 17-1069-01) equilibrated in 25 mM Tris-HCl pH 7.5, 150 mM NaCl, and 5 mM DTT. The cleanest fractions were combined and concentrated to Ëœ5 mg/ml by centrifugation in an Amicon Ultra-15 10,000 Da MWCO centrifugal filter unit (Cat# UFC901024).

Example 3Cell Assays

MV4-11 and THP cells were maintained in Iscove's Modified Dulbecco's Medium supplemented with 10% fetal bovine serum (FBS) and penicillin/streptomycin, Ba/F3 cells were maintained in RPMI 1640 supplemented with 10% FBS, penicillin/streptomycin and 5 ng/ml recombinant mouse IL-3.

Cell Survival Assays

Compounds were tested in the following assays in duplicate.

96-well XTT assay: Cells (e.g. BaF3 315I, M351I, or E255K cells) were grown in growth media containing various concentrations of compounds (duplicates) on a 96-well plate for 72 hours at 37Â° C. The starting cell number was 5000-8000 cells per well and volume was 120 Î¼l. At the end of the 72-hour incubation, 40 Î¼l of XTT labeling mixture (50:1 solution of sodium 3â€²-[1-(phenylamino-carbonyl)-3,4-tetrazolium]-bis(4-methoxy-6-nitro) benzene sulfonic acid hydrate and Electron-coupling reagent: PMS (N-methyl dibenzopyrazine methyl sulfate) were added to each well of the plate. After an additional 2-6 hours of incubation at 37Â° C., the absorbance reading at 405 nm with background correction at 650 nm was measured with a spectrophotometer.

384-well AlamarBlue assay: 90 Î¼l of cell suspension were plated onto each well of a 384-well plate preprinted with 0.5 Î¼l of compound in DMSO or DMSO only. The starting cell number was 4000 cells per well. After a 72-hour incubation, 10 Î¼l of AlamarBlue solution (440 Î¼M resazurin in PBS) were then added to each well of the plate. After an additional 2-hour incubation at 37Â° C., fluorescence was measured using a TECAN plate reading fluorometer with excitation at 535 nm and emission at 591 nm.

BCR-ABL Phospho-ELISA Assay

The following table shows the reagents that were typically used in the BCR-ABL phospho-ELISA (â€œP-ELISAâ€ ) assay.

TABLE 76BCR-ABL phospho-ELISA(p-ELISA) Typical Reagent ListDescriptionVendorCatalog #RPMI 1640Invitrogen11875-13510% Fetal Bovine Serum,VWR16777-014characterized, heat inactivatedHuman Plasma,BioreclamationHMPLEDTAAnticoagulant = EDTAInc.c-Abl (Ab-3) monoclonal antibodyVWR80001-286Recombinant Mouse Interleukin-3ChemiconIL015Adhesive Plate Seals96well PP 325 Î¼l round bottomThompson932465plate w/lid TCInstrument Co96well Nunc Maxisorp plate (forFisher12-565-136colorimetric assay)Scientific96well white flat-bottom plate (forMatrixâ€ƒ4923luminescent assay)Lysis buffer componentsTris-Cl pH 7.4 (20 mM)NP-40 (1%)EDTA (5 mM)Sodium pyrophosphate (NaPP;5 mM)NaF (5 mM)NaCl (150 mM)Protease Inhibitor CocktailSigmaP2714PMSF (1 mM)Sodium vanadate (NaVO₄; 2 mM)PBS, ice coldAnti-Phosphotyrosine (4G10â€‰â„¢),Upstate16-105 or 05-321HRP conjugate or unconjugatedGoat Anti-Mouse IgG, HRPUpstate12-349conjugate (if unconjugated 4G10 isused)BD OptEIA Reagent Set BBD550534BiosciencesCoating Buffer (0.1M Na-carbonate,pH 9.5)Assay DiluentWash buffer (.05% Tween/PBS)Stop Solution (2N sulfuric acid)Substrate Reagents A&BSuperSignal ELISA PicoPierceâ€‚37070Chemiluminescent Substrate(may be used instead of SubstrateReagents A&B;)

Cells (Ba/F₃cells transfected with WT BCR-ABL, other kinases, or T315I, Y253F, M351T, E255K, or other mutant forms of BCR-ABL) were grown in the absence of IL-3 at least Â½ week before the assay. The day before assay, the cells were fed with fresh media so that at the time of assay the cells were in log phase. Ba/F3 cells that had been grown in the absence of IL-3 for at least Â½ week were resuspended in RPMI 1640 so that each well of a 96-well plate would contain approximately 200,000 cells. Cells were distributed in a 96-well plate containing serially diluted concentrations of test compounds. Cells were typically incubated with or without test compounds for 60-120 minutes at 5% CO₂, 37Â° C. The incubation was performed with or without other additives such as 10% FCS or 50% human plasma. After incubation of compounds, lysis buffer was added and incubated for 10-15 minutes; the lysate was cleared by centrifugation.

To make the ELISA plate, commercially available Anti-ABL antibodies (e.g. (Ab-3, Calbiochem OP20) were prepared at a concentration of 0.125 Î¼g/ml in coating buffer (0.1M Na-carbonate, pH 9.5), and plated at 10 ml per plate (12.5 Î¼l 100 Î¼g/ml Ab/10 ml). In a high binding multi-well plate, 100 Î¼l Ab in coating buffer were added to each well, and each plate was covered with a plate seal and incubated overnight at 4Â° C.

Excess antibody was removed and the ELISA plate was washed 3-4 times with 200 Î¼l of wash buffer (0.05% Tween in PBS, pH 7.4). 150 Î¼l of lysate (see above) were transferred to the ELISA plate. Plates were sealed and incubated 2 hours at room temperature. The detection antibody (e.g. HRP conjugated anti-pTyr or unconjugated Î±-p-Y 4G10, Upstate) was prepared in assay diluent. The antibody was diluted 1:1000 (stock=2 Î¼g/Î¼l, 200 Î¼g in 100 Î¼l; f.c.=2 Î¼g/ml) in assay diluent and 10 ml of diluted antibody per plate were added. The lysate was removed from the ELISA plates, and wells were washed four times with 200 Î¼l of wash buffer per well. 100 Î¼l of detection antibody was added to each well; the plate was covered, and incubated 1 hr at room temperature (21Â° C.). Excess detection antibody was removed from the ELISA plates, and the wells were washed four times with 200 Î¼l of wash buffer per well.

If necessary, (i.e. for unconjugated anti-pTyr antibody) secondary antibody (goat anti-rabbit HRP) was diluted 1:3000 in assay diluent (3.33 Î¼l per 10 ml diluent) and added at 10 ml of diluted antibody per plate. Excess secondary antibody was removed from the ELISA plate, and the plate was washed four times with 200 Î¼l per well of wash buffer.

Substrate Reagent A and Substrate Reagent B (Pierce Cat#37070 SuperSignal ELISA Pico Chemiluminescent Substrate) were added immediately before use (10 ml resultant solution per plate). 100 Î¼l substrate were added per well, mixed for 1 minute, and chemiluminescent signal was measured with a luminometer.

Assay Results on Selected Compounds:Abl_T315I Bioassay:

IC₅₀<0.05 Î¼M: AE1, AE2, AE3, AE4, AE5, AE6, AE7, AE8, AE9, AE10, AE11, AE12, AE13, AE14, AE15, AE16, AE17, AE18, AE19, AE20, AE21, AE22, AE23, AE24, AE25, AE27, AE28, AE29, AE30, AE31, AE32, AE33, AE34, AE35, AE37, AE40, AE41, AE42, AE43, AE44, AE47, AE48, AE49, AE50, AE52, AE55, AE58, AE59, AE60, AE61, AE64, AE62, AE63, AE65, AE66, AE67, AE68, AE100, AE101, AE103, AE105, AE106, AE107, AE109, AE110, AE112, AE113, AE114, AE115, AE116, AE119, AE120, AE122, AE123, AE124, AE125, AE126, AE127, AE128, AE129, AE130, AE131, AE132, AE133, AE134, AE135, AE136, AE137, AE138, AE139, AE141, AE142, AE143, AE144, AE146, AE147, AE148, AE149, AE150, AE151, AE152, AE153, AE154, AE155.

0.05 Î¼M<IC₅₀<0.2 Î¼M: AE26, AE36, AE38, AE39, AE45, AE46, AE51, AE53, AE54, AE102, AE104, AE108, AE117, AE118, AE121, AE140, AE145.

Abl_T315I p-ELISA Cellular Assay:

IC₅₀<0.1 Î¼M: AE1, AE3, AE5, AE6, AE7, AE14, AE20, AE25, AE26, AE30, AE31, AE37, AE41, AE42, AE44, AE54, AE55, AE58 and AE64.

0.1 Î¼M<IC₅₀<1 Î¼M: AE2, AE4, AE9, AE11, AE13, AE15, AE16, AE18, AE19, AE22, AE29, AE32, AE34, AE35, AE48, AE49, AE52, AE61, AE62 and AE63.

AurA Bioassay:

IC₅₀<0.5 M: AE6, AE7, AE15, AE30, AE31, AE32, AE34, AE35, AE47, AE51, AE52, AE53, AE54, AE55 and AE60.

0.5 Î¼M<IC₅₀<5 Î¼M: AE1, AE11, AE13, AE33, AE59, AE62, AE67, AE68.

Met Bioassay:

IC₅₀<1 Î¼M: AE8, AE14, AE40, AE42, AE43, AE48, AE53, AE56 and AE66.

1 Î¼M<IC₅₀<5 Î¼M: AE22, AE26, AE41, AE46, AE52, AE57, AE58 and AE65.

PDK1 Bioassay:

IC₅₀<1 Î¼M: AE50, AE55 and AE58.

1 Î¼M<IC₅₀<5 Î¼M: AE2, AE3, AE9, AE10, AE11, AE20, AE21, AE38, AE44, AE45, AE46, AE48, AE49, AE52, AE53, AE59, AE60, AE61, AE63 and AE64.

Ba/F3-T315I XTT Assay:

IC₅₀<0.1 Î¼M: AE10, AE106, AE107, AE109, AE112, AE119, AE124, AE126, AE128, AE130, AE131, AE133, AE134, AE135, AE153, AE154

0.1 Î¼M<IC₅₀<1 Î¼M: AE101, AE103, AE110, AE113, AE120, AE122, AE127, AE129, AE132, AE136, AE138, AE140, AE141, AE142, AE144, AE146, AE147, AE148, AE149, AE151, AE152.

Ba/F3-M351T XTT Assay:IC50<0.5 Î¼M: AE100, AE103, AE106, AE107, AE109, AE110, AE112, AE126, AE128, AE130, AE131, AE133, AE134, AE135, AE136, AE137, AE138, AE141, AE146, AE148, AE151, AE152, AE153, AE154Ba/F3-E255K XTT Assay:

IC50<1 Î¼M: AE100, AE103, AE106, AE107, AE109, AE112, AE119, AE120, AE122, AE124, AE126, AE128, AE129, AE130, AE131, AE133, AE134, AE135, AE148, AE151, AE152, AE153, AE154

Ba/F3-Y253F XTT Assay:

IC50<1 Î¼M: AE100, AE109, AE119, AE131, AE148, AE154.